Download Daikin EWAQ100DAYN Service manual
Transcript
ESIE06-05 Service Manual EWAQ080~260DAYN EWYQ080~250DAYN Packaged air-cooled water chillers ESIE06-05 Table of Contents 1 1 Introduction 1.1 About This Manual .................................................................................. i–i Part 1 System Outline 1 3 General Outline 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.26 1.27 1.28 1.29 1.30 1.31 1.32 1.33 1.34 1.35 1.36 1.37 1.38 1.39 1.40 Table of Contents What Is in This Chapter? ........................................................................ Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN ..................................... Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN.................... Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN.................... Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN.................... Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN.................... Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN ..................................... Technical specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN .................... Technical specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN .................... Technical specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN .................... Technical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN.................... Electrical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN ...................................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications: EWYQ080-260DAYN ...................................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN .................... Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN .................... Correction Factors for Glycol .................................................................. Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYN (N-P-B) ....................................... Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYN (N-P-B) ....................................... Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(P-B) ......................................... Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N) ............................................ Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(P-B) ......................................... 1–3 1–5 1–8 1–9 1–10 1–11 1–12 1–15 1–16 1–17 1–18 1–19 1–20 1–21 1–22 1–23 1–24 1–26 1–27 1–28 1–29 1–30 1–32 1–33 1–34 1–36 1–38 1–40 1–42 1–44 1–46 1–48 1–50 1–52 1–54 1–56 1–58 1–60 1–62 1–64 1 4 5 ESIE06-05 1 3 2 3 4 Piping Layout 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 What Is in This Chapter? ......................................................................... Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B). Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B). Components Refrigeration Side : EWAQ080-260DAYN.......................... Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B). Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B). Components refrigeration side: EWYQ080-250DAYN............................. Functional Diagram Water Piping: EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B)............ Components Water Side : EWAQ- EWYQ- DAYN(N-P-B) ...................... 1–67 1–68 1–70 1–72 1–74 1–76 1–78 1–80 1–82 1–84 1–85 3.1 3.2 What Is in This Chapter? ......................................................................... 1–87 Wiring Layout : EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) Standard Unit ........................................................................................... 1–88 Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) Standard Unit ........................................................................................... 1–116 Wiring layout: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF ................................................................................................. 1–149 Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF ................................................................................................. 1–177 Wiring Layout 3.3 3.4 3.5 5 Part 2 Functional Description 1 Operation Range 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2 What Is in This Chapter? ......................................................................... Operational Range: EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B)...... Operational Range: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) .................................. Operational Range: EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B)...... Operational Range: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) .................................. 2–3 2–4 2–5 2–6 2–7 Table of Contents ESIE06-05 2 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11 2.12 2.13 2.14 2.15 2.16 2.17 3 1 What Is In This Chapter? ........................................................................ 2–9 The Controller ......................................................................................... 2–10 Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings .................................... 2–12 Menu Overview ....................................................................................... 2–13 How to Read or Adjust Parameter Settings: the Programming Procedure 2–14 Read-out Menu ....................................................................................... 2–15 Set Points Menu...................................................................................... 2–25 User Settings .......................................................................................... 2–26 Timers menu ........................................................................................... 2–43 Info menu ................................................................................................ 2–45 Input/Output Status Menu ....................................................................... 2–48 User Password Menu.............................................................................. 2–56 Network Menu ......................................................................................... 2–58 Cool / Heat Menu .................................................................................... 2–60 Service Menu .......................................................................................... 2–61 Menu overview ........................................................................................ 2–102 Service menu overview ........................................................................... 2–103 4 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 Table of Contents What Is in This Chapter? ........................................................................ Operation Flowchart................................................................................ On/Off Management ............................................................................... Thermostat Control ................................................................................. Manual Control........................................................................................ Compressor Control ................................................................................ Fan Control ............................................................................................. Pump Control .......................................................................................... Floating Setpoint ..................................................................................... Free Cooling ........................................................................................... Superheat control.................................................................................... Changeable digital inputs........................................................................ Changeable digital outputs ..................................................................... Changeable analogue inputs .................................................................. Changeable analogue outputs ................................................................ DICN Basic Setup (=master/slave system)............................................. BMS Function ......................................................................................... Freeze-up Control ................................................................................... Discharge gas safety .............................................................................. Password Function ................................................................................. History logging ........................................................................................ Defrost management .............................................................................. Reversing valve ...................................................................................... Low pressure bypass .............................................................................. Simulation ............................................................................................... 3 2–105 2–106 2–107 2–108 2–114 2–115 2–119 2–128 2–129 2–133 2–137 2–140 2–141 2–142 2–143 2–144 2–153 2–157 2–163 2–164 2–165 2–166 2–171 2–172 2–173 3 5 ESIE06-05 1 Part 3 Troubleshooting 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 3 2 4 5 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties Introduction .............................................................................................. Login/Logout ............................................................................................ 3–31 3–32 What is in this chapter ............................................................................. Overview hardware software/Source files................................................ Software upload procedure: PCASOflash ............................................... Installation of PCASOflash Software ....................................................... Overview of most common problems....................................................... 3–33 3–34 3–35 3–40 3–41 Procedure for main PCB changing 5.1 5.2 5.3 4 3–27 3–28 3–29 3–30 Procedure for Software Upload 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 5 Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 1 ............ Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 2 ............ Temperature and Resistance characteristics of Thermistor Type 3 ........ Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 4. ........... Reset procedure 3.1 3.2 4 3–3 3–4 3–5 3–6 3–11 3–19 3–21 3–23 Checking the Temperature Sensors 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3 What Is in This Chapter? ......................................................................... What happens in the Event of an Alarm? ................................................ What to do in the Event of an Alarm? ...................................................... Overview of Unit Safeties ........................................................................ Overview of Circuit Safeties..................................................................... Overview of Network Safeties.................................................................. Overview of Warnings.............................................................................. Overview of Start Problems ..................................................................... Changing the main PCB .......................................................................... Configuration of Main PCB nr 1 ............................................................... Configuration of Main PCB nr 2 ............................................................... 3–43 3–44 3–45 Table of Contents ESIE06-05 6 Procedure for extension PCB changing 6.1 6.2 7 Changing the EEV PCB .......................................................................... Configuration of EEV PVB ...................................................................... 3–51 3–51 Introduction ............................................................................................. Use of Suction Washer ........................................................................... 3–53 3–53 Introduction ............................................................................................. Compressor connections ........................................................................ 3–55 3–55 Compressor electrical connections and wiring 11.1 11.2 11.3 11.4 11.5 12 3 Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain 10.1 10.2 11 3–49 3–49 3–49 4 Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer 9.1 9.2 10 Changing the Main Controller ................................................................. Configuration of the Main Controller ....................................................... Configuration of the Sub Controller......................................................... Procedure for EEV PCB changing 8.1 8.2 9 1 3–47 3–47 Procedure for controller changing 7.1 7.2 7.3 8 Changing the extension PCB .................................................................. Configuration of the extension PCB ........................................................ Electrical connections for SJ161 ............................................................. Electrical connections SJ180 .................................................................. Electronic protection module wiring ........................................................ Electrical connections for SJ240-300...................................................... Electronic protection module wiring ........................................................ 3–57 3–57 3–57 3–58 3–58 Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Table of Contents 5 5 ESIE06-05 Evaporators 1 Part 4 Commissioning and Test Run 1 Pre-Test Run Checks 3 4 5 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.15 1.16 1.17 1.18 1.19 1.20 1.21 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.26 1.27 1.28 1.29 What Is in This Chapter? ......................................................................... General Checks ....................................................................................... Water Piping Checks ............................................................................... Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B) Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) Unit pressure drop : EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model ................. Unit pressure drop : EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model ................. Unit pressure drop : EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model ................. Unit pressure drop : EWYQ080-100DAYNN Standard Unit..................... Unit pressure drop : EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit..................... Unit pressure drop : EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit..................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B) .................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B) .................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B) ..................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B) ..................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B) ..................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B) ..................... External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) ................. External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) ................. External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP) ................. External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) ................. External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) ................. External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP) ................. Electrical Checks ..................................................................................... Field wiring connection diagram : EWAQ/EWYQ 080-260 DAYN*.......... 4–3 4–5 4–6 4–11 4–12 4–13 4–14 4–15 4–16 4–17 4–19 4–21 4–23 4–25 4–27 4–29 4–31 4–32 4–34 4–35 4–36 4–37 4–39 4–40 4–41 4–43 4–45 4–46 4–47 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 What Is in This Chapter ........................................................................... Maintenance of the Main Parts ................................................................ Maintenance of the Control Devices ........................................................ Periodical Checks .................................................................................... 5–3 5–4 5–6 5–7 Part 5 Maintenance 1 6 Maintenance Table of Contents ESIE06-05 Part 6 Appendix 1 1 Appendix 1.1 1.2 What Is in This Chapter .......................................................................... History of the Software............................................................................ 6–3 6–4 3 4 5 Table of Contents 7 ESIE06-05 1 3 4 5 8 Table of Contents ESIE06-05 Introduction Part 0 1 Introduction 1.1 About This Manual Target group This service manual is intended for and should only be used by qualified engineers. Purpose of this manual This service manual contains all the information you need to carry out the necessary repair and maintenance tasks for the EWAQ 080~260 DAYN and EWYQ 080~250 DAYN. EWAQ 080~ 260 DAYN The Daikin EWAQ 080~260 DAYN packaged air-cooled water chillers: ■ Are designed for outdoor installation. ■ Are used for cooling applications. ■ Used refrigerant R410a. ■ Are available in 8 standard sizes with nominal cooling capacities ranging from 80 kW to 254 kW. ■ Have 3 types of units: 3 4 5 EWAQ 080~260 DAYNN: without hydraulic module, naked model EWAQ 080~260 DAYNP: with hydraulic module: pump and expansion vessel EWAQ 080~260 DAYNB: with hydraulic module: buffer tank, pump and expansion vessel EWYQ 080~250 DAYN The Daikin EWYQ 080~250DAYN packaged air-cooled water chillers: ■ Are designed for outdoor installation. ■ Are used for cooling and heating applications ■ Used refrigerant R410a. ■ Are available in 8 standard sizes with nominal cooling capacities ranging from 77kW to 252kW and heating from 87,7 kW to 284kW. ■ Have 3 types of units: EWAQ 080~250 DAYNN: without hydraulic module, naked model EWAQ 080~250 DAYNP: with hydraulic module: pump and expansion vessel EWAQ 080~250 DAYNB: with hydraulic module: buffer tank, pump and expansion vessel Before starting up the unit Before starting up the unit for the first time, make sure it has been properly installed. i Introduction 1 3 4 5 ii ESIE06-05 ESIE06-05 14 Part 1 System Outline Introduction This part contains an outline of all the relevant elements in the EWAQ 080~260DAYN and EWYQ 080~250 DAYN installation. What is in this part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter See page 1–General Outline 1–3 2–Piping Layout 1–67 3–Wiring Layout 1–87 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–1 ESIE06-05 11 3 5 1–2 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 General Outline Part 1 1 General Outline 1.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction This chapter contains the following information: Q Q Q Overview Part 1 – System Outline 1 Technical specifications Electrical specifications Outlook drawings: Outlook, dimensions, installation and service space. 3 This chapter contains the following topics: Topic See page 1.2–Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN 1–5 1.3–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN 1–8 1.4–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN 1–9 1.5–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN 1–10 1.6–Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN 1–11 1.7–Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN 1–12 1.8–Technical specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN 1–15 1.9–Technical specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN 1–16 1.10–Technical specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN 1–17 1.11–Technical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN 1–18 1.12–Electrical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN 1–19 1.13–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN 1–20 1.14–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN 1–21 1.15–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN 1–22 1.16–Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN 1–23 1.17–Electrical Specifications: EWYQ080-260DAYN 1–24 1.18–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN 1–26 1.19–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN 1–27 1.20–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN 1–28 1.21–Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN 1–29 1.22–Correction Factors for Glycol 1–30 1.23–Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYN (N-P-B) 1–32 1.24–Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYN (N-P-B) 1–33 1.25–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N) 1–34 1.26–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(P-B) 1–36 1.27–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N) 1–38 1.28–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(P-B) 1–40 4 5 1–3 General Outline 11 3 ESIE06-05 Topic See page 1.29–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(N) 1–42 1.30–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(P-B) 1–44 1.31–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N) 1–46 1.32–Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(P-B) 1–48 1.33–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N) 1–50 1.34–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(P-B) 1–52 1.35–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N) 1–54 1.36–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(P-B) 1–56 1.37–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(N) 1–58 1.38–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(P-B) 1–60 1.39–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N) 1–62 1.40–Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(P-B) 1–64 4 5 1–4 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.2 General Outline Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN Technical specifications 1 The table below contains the technical specifications. EWAQ080DA YN EWAQ100DA YN EWAQ130DA YN EWAQ150DA YN EWAQ180DA YN EWAQ210DAY N EWAQ240DA YN EWAQ260DA YN kW 80 105 131 152 182 209 236 254 % 0-50-100 0-50-100 0-25 50-75-100 0-25 50-75-100 21/29-43/50/ 57-71/79-10 0 0-25 50-75-100 22/28-40/50/ 56-72/78-10 0 0-25 50-75-100 kW 26.4 36.2 46.6 56.3 64.5 74.6 82.2 94.0 EER 3.03 2.90 2.81 2.70 2.82 2.80 2.80 2.70 ESEER 4.12 4.00 4.34 4.22 4.36 4.32 4.20 4.00 Capacity (Eurovent conditions specified in notes) Cooling Nominal Capacity Steps Nominal input (Eurovent conditions specified in notes) Casing Cooling Ivory white Colour Material Dimensions Weight Water Heat Exchanger Unit 4 Polyester painted galvanised steel plate/Munsell code 5Y7.5/1 Height mm 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 Width mm 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 2566 2566 2631 2631 3081 3081 4850 4850 Unit kg 1350 1400 1500 1550 1800 1850 3150 3250 Operating weight kg 1315 1415 1517 1569 1825 1877 3189 3292 Gross weight kg 1400 1450 1550 1600 1850 1900 3200 3300 Type Filter 3 5 Brased plate STRAINER GALVANIZED Type Diameter perforation s mm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minimum water volume in the system l 358 470 295 341 408 468 529 569 Water flow rate Min l/min 115 151 188 218 261 300 339 364 Max l/min 459 602 754 871 1043 1198 1355 1456 Nominal Water Flow Cooling l/min 229 301 377 436 522 599 677 728 Nominal Water Flow Cooling Total kPa 59 58 52 49 52 53 51 47 Water Heat Exchanger Insulation material Model Part 1 – System Outline Foamed synthetic elastomer Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Model PT120 PT120 DV47 DV47 DV58 DV58 DV58 DV58 1–5 General Outline 11 ESIE06-05 EWAQ080DA YN Air Heat Exchanger 3 Fan EWAQ130DA YN Type EWAQ150DA YN 3 3 3 3 3 3 Stages 56 56 48 56 56 56 48 48 Fin Pitch mm 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 Face Area m2 2.46 2.46 2.11 2.46 3.02 3.02 2.11 2.11 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 Unit water volume l 15 15 17 19 25 27 39 42 Nominal water pressure drop unit kPa 66 67 64 63 72 79 83 85 4 Direct drive m3/min Quantity 780 780 800 860 1290 1290 1600 1600 4 4 4 4 6 6 8 8 Speed rpm 880 880 900 970 970 970 900 900 Motor Output W 500 500 600 1000 1000 1000 600 600 Discharge direction Vertical Type Scroll compressor Refrigerant oil type Daphne FVC68D Refrigerant oil charge Model l Quantity Model Speed rpm 6.7 6.7 3.3 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 6.7 2 2 4 4 2 4 2 4 SJ180 SJ240 SJ161 SJ180 SJ180 SJ240 SJ240 SJ300 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 Quantity Model Speed rpm Cooling dBA Sound Level Sound Power Refrigerant circuit Refrigerant type Refrigerant charge 86 86 88 89 2 2 SJ240 SJ300 2900 2900 90 91 91 91 29 28 39 39 39 39 2 2 2 3” OD 3” 3” R-410A kg 33 33 kg No of circuits 1 1 19 25 19 25 2 2 Refrigerant control Water heat exchanger inlet / outlet Water heat exchanger drain 1–6 EWAQ260DA YN 2 Model Piping connections EWAQ240DA YN 2 Nominal air flow 5 EWAQ210DAY N Rows Drive Compressor EWAQ180DA YN Cross fin coil / Hi-Xss tubes and PE coated No. of Coils Hydraulic Components EWAQ100DA YN 2 Electronic expansion valve 3” OD 3” OD 3” OD 3” OD 3” OD 1/2” G Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 General Outline EWAQ080DA YN Safety Devices EWAQ100DA YN EWAQ130DA YN EWAQ150DA YN High pressure switch EWAQ180DA YN EWAQ210DAY N EWAQ240DA YN EWAQ260DA YN High pressure (pressure switch) 1 Pressure relief valve Low pressure protection Low pressure safety Freeze up protection Flowswitch Discharge temperature control Reverse phase protector Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180 SJ240) Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180) Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180 SJ240) Electronic protection module compressors 3 Overcurrent relays for compressors and fans Notes Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC (= Power input compressors + fans + electrical circuit) Minimum required watervolume for standard thermostat settings and at nominal conditions 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–7 General Outline 11 1.3 ESIE06-05 Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN Technical specifications The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ080-100 DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight 3 Pump kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 283 283 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP50-240/2 TP50-240/2 kPa 142 133 Additional unit water volume l 33 33 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Model Nominal Static Height Unit Hydraulic components EWAQ100DAYN* Additional machine weight Quantity 4 EWAQ080DAYN* OPSB + OPBT 5 Units Weight Pump EWAQ100DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 523 523 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP50-240/2 TP50-240/2 Type Quantity Model Hydraulic components EWAQ080DAYN* Nominal Static Height Unit kPa 142 133 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 223 223 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit 1–8 kPa EWAQ080DAYN* EWAQ100DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP50-240/2 TP50-240/2 337 322 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.4 General Outline Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN Technical specifications 1 The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ130-150DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight Pump EWAQ150DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 286 286 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-230/2 TP65-230/2 kPa 134 126 Additional unit water volume l 36 36 Expansion vessel l 35 4 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 EWAQ130DAYN* EWAQ150DAYN* 5 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Hydraulic components EWAQ130DAYN* OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 526 526 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-230/2 TP65-230/2 kPa 134 126 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 226 226 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Hydraulic components OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Part 1 – System Outline kPa EWAQ130DAYN* EWAQ150DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-340/2 TP65-340/2 253 248 1–9 3 General Outline 11 1.5 ESIE06-05 Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN Technical specifications The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ180-210DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight 3 Pump kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 286 286 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 142 120 Additional unit water volume l 36 36 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Model 5 Nominal Static Height Unit Hydraulic components EWAQ210DAYN* Additional machine weight Quantity 4 EWAQ180DAYN* OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump EWAQ210DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 526 526 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 142 120 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 226 226 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Hydraulic components EWAQ180DAYN* OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit 1–10 kPa EWAQ180DAYN* EWAQ210DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-410/2 TP65-410/2 296 278 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.6 General Outline Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN Technical specifications 1 The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWAQ240-260DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight Pump EWAQ260DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 271 271 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 119 110 Additional unit water volume l 21 21 Expansion vessel l 50 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWAQ240DAYN* 4 5 OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump EWAQ260DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 511 511 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 126 117 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 211 211 Expansion vessel l 50 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWAQ240DAYN* OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Part 1 – System Outline kPa 3 EWAQ240DAYN* EWAQ260DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-410/2 TP65-410/2 321 276 1–11 General Outline 11 1.7 ESIE06-05 Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN Technical Specifications The table below contains the technical specifications. 2-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Capacity (Eurovent conditions specified in notes) 4 EWYQ100D AYN EWYQ130DA YN EWYQ150D AYN EWYQ180DA YN EWYQ210D AYN EWYQ230DA YN EWYQ250D AYN Cooling Nominal kW 77 100 136 145 183 211 234 252 Heating Nominal kW 87.7 114 149 165 199 225 258 284 % 0-50-100 0-50-100 0-25 50-75-100 0-25 50-75-100 21/29-43/50 /57-71/79-1 00 0-25 50-75-100 22/28-40/50 /56-72/78-1 00 0-25 50-75-100 Cooling kW 26.5 36.2 47.6 55.7 63.8 75.3 82.2 94.0 Heating kW 30.0 38.1 49.6 58.8 68.0 77.0 86.9 97.9 EER 2.91 2.76 2.86 2.60 2.87 2.80 2.85 2.68 COP (Eurovent conditions specified in notes) 2.92 2.99 3.00 2.81 2.93 2.92 2.97 2.90 ESEER 4.00 4.00 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 4.20 Capacity Steps 3 EWYQ080 DAYN Nominal input (Eurovent conditions specified in notes) Casing Ivory white Colour Material Dimensions 5 Weight Water Heat Exchanger Unit Polyester painted galvanised steel plate Height mm 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 2311 Width mm 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 Depth mm 2566 2566 2631 2631 3081 3081 4850 4850 Unit kg 1400 1450 1550 1600 1850 1900 3200 3300 Operating weight kg 1415 1465 1567 1619 1875 1927 3239 3342 Gross weight kg 1450 1500 1600 1650 1900 1950 3250 3350 Type Filter Brased plate STRAINER GALVANIZED Type Diameter perforations mm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minimum water volume in the system l 393 511 334 370 446 504 560 616 Water flow rate Min l/min 110 143 195 208 262 302 330 358 Max l/min 503 654 854 946 1141 1290 1433 1571 Nominal Water Flow Cooling l/min 221 287 390 416 525 605 659 717 Heating l/min 251 327 427 473 570 645 717 786 Nominal Water Flow Cooling Total kPa 36 36 43 38 41 44 38 37 Water Heat Exchanger Insulation material Model 1–12 Foamed synthetic elastomer Quan tity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Mode l PT120 PT120 DV47HP DV47HP DV58HP DV58HP DV58HP DV58HP Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 General Outline 2-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Air Heat Exchanger Fan EWYQ100D AYN EWYQ130DA YN Type EWYQ150D AYN EWYQ230DA YN EWYQ250D AYN 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 Stages 56 56 48 56 56 56 48 48 Fin Pitch mm 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 Face Area m2 2.46 2.46 2.11 2.46 3.02 3.02 2.11 2.11 4 4 4 4 4 4 8 8 Unit water volume l 15 15 17 19 25 27 39 42 Nominal water pressure drop unit kPa 42 43 55 51 61 70 68 74 Drive Model Direct drive m3/m in Quantity 780 780 800 860 1290 1290 1600 1600 4 4 4 4 6 6 8 8 Speed rpm 880 880 900 970 970 970 900 900 Motor Output W 500 500 600 1000 1000 1000 600 600 Discharge direction Scroll compressor Refrigerant oil type Daphne FVC68D Model l Quantity Model Speed rpm 6.7 6.7 3.3 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 2 2 4 4 2 4 2 4 SJ180 SJ240 SJ161 SJ180 SJ180 SJ240 SJ240 SJ300 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 2900 Quantity Model Speed rpm Cooling dBA Sound Level Sound Power Refrigerant circuit Refrigerant type Refrigerant charge 86 86 88 33 37 kg No of circuits Water heat exchanger inlet / outlet Part 1 – System Outline 2 SJ240 SJ300 2900 2900 89 90 91 91 93 1 1 22 22 32 32 39 39 22 22 32 32 39 39 2 2 2 2 2 2 3” OD 3” 3” Refrigerant control Water heat exchanger drain 2 R-410A kg Electronic expansion valve 3” OD 3” OD 3” OD 3” OD 1 3 4 Vertical Type Refrigerant oil charge Piping connections EWYQ210D AYN Rows Nominal air flow Compressor EWYQ180DA YN Cross fin coil / Hi-Xss tubes and PE coated No. of Coils Hydraulic Components EWYQ080 DAYN 3” OD 1/2” G 1–13 5 General Outline 11 2-1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ESIE06-05 EWYQ080 DAYN EWYQ100D AYN EWYQ130DA YN Safety Devices EWYQ150D AYN EWYQ180DA YN EWYQ210D AYN EWYQ230DA YN EWYQ250D AYN Low pressure protection Low pressure safety Low pressure safety Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180 SJ240) Electronic protection module compressors Electronic protection module compressors High pressure (pressure switch) Pressure relief valve Low pressure safety Low pressure safety Low pressure safety Low pressure safety Low pressure protection Freeze up protection Flowswitch Discharge temperature control Reverse phase protector Electronic protection module compressors 3 Electronic protection module compressors Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180 SJ240) Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180 SJ240) Electronic protection module compressors (only for SJ180 SJ240) Overcurrent relays for compressors and fans Notes 4 Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC Nominal cooling capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 12xC/7xC; ambient 35xC (= Power input compressors + fans + electrical circuit) Minimum required watervolume for standard thermostat settings and at nominal conditions Nominal heating capacity at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 40xC/45xC, ambient: drybulb 7xC, wetbulb 6xC Nominal heating power input at Eurovent conditions: Evaporator 40xC/45xC, ambient: drybulb 7xC, wetbulb 6xC (=Power input compressors+fans+electrical circuit) 5 1–14 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.8 General Outline Technical specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN Technical specifications 1 The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ080-100DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight Pump EWYQ100DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 268 268 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP50-240/2 TP50-240/2 kPa 173 154 Additional unit water volume l 18 18 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ080DAYN* 4 5 OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump EWYQ100DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 508 508 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP50-240/2 TP50-240/2 kPa 173 154 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 208 208 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ080DAYN* OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Part 1 – System Outline kPa 3 EWYQ080DAYN* EWYQ100DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP50-430/2 TP50-430/2 365 348 1–15 General Outline 11 1.9 ESIE06-05 Technical specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN Technical specifications The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ130-150DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight 3 Pump kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 286 286 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 141 141 Additional unit water volume l 36 36 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Model 5 Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ150DAYN* Additional machine weight Quantity 4 EWYQ130DAYN* OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump EWYQ150DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 526 526 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 141 141 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 226 226 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ130DAYN* OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit 1–16 kPa EWYQ130DAYN* EWYQ150DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-340/2 TP65-340/2 261 261 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.10 General Outline Technical specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN Technical specifications 1 The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ180-210DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight Pump EWYQ210DAYN Additional machine weight kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 286 286 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 152 128 Additional unit water volume l 36 36 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ180DAYN 4 5 OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump EWYQ210DAYN Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 526 526 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 152 128 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 226 226 Expansion vessel l 35 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ180DAYN OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Part 1 – System Outline kPa 3 EWYQ180DAYN* EWYQ210DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-410/2 TP65-410/2 306 286 1–17 General Outline 11 1.11 ESIE06-05 Technical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN Technical specifications The table below contains the technical specifications for the options of the EWYQ230~250DAYN. Technical specifications options OPSP Units Weight 3 Pump kg 250 250 Additional operation weight kg 271 271 Additional gross weight kg 250 250 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 143 129 Additional unit water volume l 21 21 Expansion vessel l 50 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Model 5 Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ250DAYN* Additional machine weight Quantity 4 EWYQ230DAYN* OPSP + OPBT Units Weight Pump EWYQ250DAYN* Additional machine weight kg 300 300 Additional operation weight kg 511 511 Additional gross weight kg 300 300 Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-260/2 TP65-260/2 kPa 143 129 Buffer tank l 190 190 Additional unit water volume l 211 211 Expansion vessel l 50 Pre-charge pressure exp. vessel bar 1,5 Safety valve bar 3 Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit Cooling Hydraulic components EWYQ230DAYN* OPHP Units Pump Type Quantity Model Nominal Static Height Unit 1–18 kPa EWYQ230DAYN* EWYQ250DAYN* Single-stage-in-line-pumps Single-stage-in-line-pumps 1 1 TP65-410/2 TP65-410/2 292 280 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.12 General Outline Electrical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN Electrical specifications Power supply The table below contains the electrical specifications. Phase Compressor EWAQ100D AYN 3 3 EWAQ130D AYN EWAQ150D AYN EWAQ180D AYN EWAQ210D AYN EWAQ240DA YN EWAQ260D AYN 3 3 3 3 3 3 Hz 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Voltage V 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Minimum % -10% Maximum % +10% Starting current A 201 (max. 240) 221 (max. 272) 161 (max. 269) 199 (max. 320 221(max. 357) 221 (max. 368) 266 (max. 426) 266 (max. 468) Nominal Running Current Cooling A 60 72 88 113 131 144 162 181 Maximum Running Current A 96 120 160 177 209 233 262 290 3x125gL 3x160gL 3x200gL 3x200gL 3x250gL 3x250gL 3x300gL 3x355gL Recommended fuses according to IEC standard 269-2 Fan EWAQ080 DAYN Frequency Voltage Tolerance Unit 1 Starting method Maximum Running Current A 1.5 1.5 1.4 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.6 Starting current A 195 215 158 195 195/215 215 215/260 260 Nominal Running Current (RLA) A 25/25 31/31 19/19 25/25 25/31 31/31 31/40 40/40 Maximum Running Current A 39 51 35 39 39/51 51 51/65 65 Direct On-Line Phase Frequency Hz Voltage V Crankcase heater (E1/2HC) W Notes Part 1 – System Outline 4 Direct On-Line Starting method Control circuit 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 75 75 230V (supplied by factory installed transformers) 2x75 2x75 4x65 4x75 4x75 4x75 Starting current of the unit = maximum running current 4 fans + starting current 1 compressor Starting current of the unit = maximum running current 2 fans(1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Starting current of the unit = maximum running current 3 fans(1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Initial starting current = maximum running current 4 fans + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 4 fans + maximum running current 1 compressor + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current of the unit = maximum running current 4 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 6 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 8 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor 1–19 5 General Outline 11 1.13 ESIE06-05 Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN Electrical specifications The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ080-100 DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump 3 EWAQ080DAYN* Starting method EWAQ100DAYN* Direct On-Line Power W 2,2kW 2,2kW Maximum Running current A 4,5 4,5 Starting current A 42 42 EWAQ080DAYN* EWAQ100DAYN* OPHP Units 4 High Esp Pump Starting method Direct On-Line Power W 5,5kW 5,5kW Maximum Running current A 11,2 11,2 Starting current A 131 131 EWAQ080DAYN* EWQ100DAYN* OP 10 5 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2x 10 A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and buffer tank 1–20 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.14 General Outline Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN Electrical specifications 1 The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ130-150DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump EWAQ130DAYN* Starting method EWAQ150DAYN* Direct On-Line Power W 3 kW 3 kW Maximum Running current A 6,3 6,3 Starting current A 58 58 EWAQ130DAYN* EWAQ150DAYN* 3 OPHP Units High Esp Pump Starting method Direct On-Line Power W 5,5 kW 5,5 kW Maximum Running current A 11,2 11,2 Starting current A 131 131 EWAQ130DAYN* EWAQ150DAYN* 4 OP 10 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2x 10 A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and buffer tank Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–21 General Outline 11 1.15 ESIE06-05 Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN Electrical specifications The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ180-210 DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump 3 EWAQ180DAYN* Starting method EWAQ210DAYN* Direct On-Line Power W 4kW 4kW Maximum Running current A 8 8 Starting current A 98 98 EWAQ180DAYN* EWAQ210DAYN* OPHP Units 4 High Esp Pump Starting method Direct On-Line Power W 7,5kW 7,5kW Maximum Running current A 15,2 15,2 Starting current A 169 169 EWAQ180DAYN* EWAQ210DAYN* OP10 5 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2x 10A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and buffer tank 1–22 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.16 General Outline Electrical Specifications for options: EWAQ240-260DAYN Electrical specifications 1 The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWAQ240-260 DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump EWAQ240DAYN* Starting method Power EWAQ260DAYN* Direct On-Line kW 4,0 4,0 Maximum Running current A 8,0 8,0 Starting current A 98 98 EWAQ240DAYN* EWAQ260DAYN* 3 OPHP Units High Esp Pump Starting method Power Direct On-Line kW 7,5 7,5 Maximum Running current A 15,2 15,2 Starting current A 169 169 EWAQ240DAYN* EWAQ260DAYN* 4 OP10 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2x 10 A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and buffer tank Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–23 General Outline 11 1.17 Electrical Specifications: EWYQ080-260DAYN Electrical specifications Power supply ESIE06-05 The table below contains the electrical specifications. Phase 4 5 Compressor EWYQ150DA YN EWYQ180D AYN EWYQ210D AYN EWYQ230DA YN EWYQ250D AYN 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Voltage V 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 Minimum % -10% Maximum % +10% Starting current A 201 (max. 240) 221 (max. 272) 161 (max. 269) 199 (max. 320) 221(max. 357) 221 (max. 368) 266 (max. 440) 266 (max. 468) Nominal Running Current Cooling A 60 72 88 113 131 144 162 181 Maximum Running Current A 96 120 160 177 209 233 262 290 3x125gL 3x160gL 3x200gL 3x200gL 3x250gL 3x250gL 3x300gL 3x355gL Recommended fuses according to IEC standard 269-2 Fan EWYQ130DA YN Hz Tolerance Unit EWYQ100D AYN Frequency Voltage 3 EWYQ080 DAYN Starting method Direct On-Line Maximum Running Current A 1.5 1.5 1.4 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.6 Starting current A 195 215 158 195 195/215 215 215/260 260 Nominal Running Current (RLA) A 25/25 31/31 19/19 25/25 25/31 31/31 31/40 40/40 Maximum Running Current A 39 51 35 39 39/51 51 51/65 65 Starting method Control circuit 1–24 Direct On-Line Phase 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 50 50 50 50 230V/24V AC (supplied by factory installed transformers) 230V/24 V AC (supplied by factory installed transformers) 4x75 4x75 Frequency Hz 50 50 50 50 Voltage V 230V (supplied by factory installed transformers) 230V (supplied by factory installed transformers) 230V (supplied by factory installed transformers) 230V (supplied by factory installed transformers) Crankcase heater (E1/2HC) W 2x75 2x75 4x65 4x75 4x75 4x75 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Notes General Outline EWYQ080 DAYN EWYQ100D AYN EWYQ130DA YN EWYQ150DA YN EWYQ180D AYN EWYQ210D AYN EWYQ230DA YN EWYQ250D AYN Initial starting current = Maximum running current 4 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Initial starting current = Maximum running current 4 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Starting current of the unit = Maximum running current 2 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Starting current of the unit = Maximum running current 2 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Initial starting current = Maximum running current 3 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Initial starting current = Maximum running current 3 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Initial starting current = Maximum running current 4 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Initial starting current = Maximum running current 4 fans (1 circuit) + starting current 1 compressor Max. starting current of the unit = Maximum running current 4 fans + max. running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Max. starting current of the unit = Maximum running current 4 fans + max. running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Max. starting current of the unit = Maximum running current 4 fans + max. running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Max. starting current of the unit = Maximum running current 4 fans + max. running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 6 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 6 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 8 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor Maximum starting current = maximum running current 8 fans + maximum running current 3 compressors + starting current 1 compressor 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–25 General Outline 11 1.18 ESIE06-05 Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ080-100DAYN Electrical specifications The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ080-100DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump EWYQ080DAYN* Starting method Power 3 EWYQ100DAYN* Direct On-Line kW 2,2 2,2 Maximum Running current A 4,45 4,45 Starting current A 42 42 EWYQ080DAYN* EWYQ100DAYN* OPHP Units 4 High Esp Pump Starting method Power Direct On-Line kW 5,5 5,5 Maximum Running current A 11,2 11,2 Starting current A 131 131 EWYQ080DAYN* EWYQ100DAYN* OP10 5 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2 x 10 A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and OPBT 1–26 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.19 General Outline Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ130-150DAYN Electrical specifications 1 The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ130-150DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump EWYQ130DAYN* Starting method EWYQ150DAYN* Direct On-Line Power W 3kW 3kW Maximum Running current A 6,3 6,3 Starting current A 58 58 EWYQ130DAYN* EWYQ150DAYN* 3 OPHP Units High Esp Pump Starting method Direct On-Line Power W 5,5kW 5,5kW Maximum Running current A 11,2 11,2 Starting current A 131 131 EWYQ130DAYN* EWYQ150DAYN* 4 OP10 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2 x 10A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and OPBT Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–27 General Outline 11 1.20 ESIE06-05 Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ180-210DAYN Electrical specifications The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ180-210DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump EWYQ180DAYN* Starting method Power 3 EWYQ210DAYN* Direct On-Line kW 4kW 4kW Maximum Running current A 8 8 Starting current A 98 98 EWYQ180DAYN* EWYQ210DAYN* OPHP Units 4 High Esp Pump Starting method Power Direct On-Line kW 7,5kW 7,5kW Maximum Running current A 15,2 15,2 Starting current A 169 169 EWYQ180DAYN* EWYQ210DAYN* OP10 5 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2 x 10A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and buffer tank 1–28 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.21 General Outline Electrical Specifications for options: EWYQ230-250DAYN Electrical specifications 1 The table below contains the electrical specifications for the options of the EWYQ230-250DAYN. Electrical specifications options OPSP Units Std Pump EWYQ230DAYN* Starting method Power EWYQ250DAYN* Direct On-Line kW 4,0 4,0 Maximum Running current A 8,0 8,0 Starting current A 98 98 EWYQ230DAYN* EWYQ250DAYN* 3 OPHP Units High Esp Pump Starting method Power Direct On-Line kW 7,5 7,5 Maximum Running current A 15,2 15,2 Starting current A 169 169 EWYQ230DAYN* EWYQ250DAYN* 4 OP 10 Units Heater Tape Supply Voltage V 230+/-10% Recommended fuses A 2 x 10A Power standard model 1 x 300W 1 x 300W Power model with pump 2 x 300W 2 x 300W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W 2 x 300W + 1 x 150W Power model with pump and OPBT Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–29 General Outline 11 1.22 ESIE06-05 Correction Factors for Glycol Correction factors The illustration below shows the correction factors for glycol. Correction factors 1.90 1.80 3 Kp 1.70 1.60 1.50 4 1.40 1.30 1.20 5 Kf 1.10 1.00 0.99 Ki 0.98 0.97 0.96 0.95 Kc 0.94 % glycol 0 1–30 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Legend Glycol freezing point General Outline The table below describes the patterns and symbols used for the correction factors illustrated above. Pattern Description _______ Ethylene glycol _____ Propylene glycol Kc Correction on cooling capacity Ki Correction on power input Kf Correction on flow rate Kp Correction on pressure drop 3 The table below contains glycol freezing points for different glycol concentrations. Concentration (wt%) 0 10 20 30 40 Ethylene glycol Freezing point °C 0 -4 -9 -16 -23 Minimum LWE °C 4 2 0 -5 -11 Propylene glycol Freezing point °C 0 -3 -7 -13 -22 Minimum LWE °C 4 3 -2 -4 -10 Type Part 1 – System Outline 1 4 5 1–31 General Outline 11 1.23 ESIE06-05 Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYN (N-P-B) Optional equipment for EWAQ-DAYNN Capacity: 080-260 kW 3 4 5 Option number EWAQ080DAYNN EWAQ150DAYNN EWAQ240DAYNN EWAQ100DAYNN EWAQ180DAYNN EWAQ260DAYNN EWAQ130DAYNN EWAQ210DAYNN Option description Unit size Availability 080 100 130 150 180 210 240 260 Standard unit ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° OPSC Single pump contactor ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPTC Twin pump contactor ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPSP Single pump ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPTP Twin pump (1 pump house, dual motor) ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPHP High ESP pump (single pump only) ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPBT Buffer tank ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPIF Inverter fans (For low ambient -15°C) ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPZL Glycol 0°C/ -10°C ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OP03 Dual pressure relief valve ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OP10 Evaporator heater tape ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OP12 Option valves (discharge-, liquid line- and suction stop valve) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) fact. mount. OP57 A-meter / V-meter ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPLN Low noise = OPIF + Compressor housing ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPCG Condenser protection grills ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. Kit Available kits EKLONPG Gateway for LON ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° EKBNPG Gateway for BACNET ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit EKACPG Address card ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit EKRUPG Remote user interface ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit Notes 1–32 ° Available - Not available (S) Option required for Swedish national law SNFS 1992:16 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 1.24 General Outline Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYN (N-P-B) 1 Optional equipment for EWYQ-DAYNN Capacity: 080-250 kW Option number EWYQ080DAYNN EWYQ150DAYNN EWYQ230DAYNN EWYQ100DAYNN EWYQ180DAYNN EWYQ250DAYNN EWYQ130DAYNN EWYQ210DAYNN Option description Unit size 080 100 130 150 180 Availability 210 230 250 Standard unit ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° OPSC Single pump contactor ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° OPTC Twin pump contactor ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPSP Single pump ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPTP Twin pump (1 pump house, dual motor) ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPHP High ESP pump (single pump only) ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPBT Buffer tank ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPIF Inverter fans (For low ambient -15°C) ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPZL Glycol 0°C / -10°C ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OP03 Dual pressure relief valve ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OP10 Evaporator heater tape ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. fact. mount. OP12 Option valves (discharge-, liquid line- and suction stop valve) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) °(S) fact. mount. OP57 A-meter / V-meter ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPLN Low noise = OPIF + Compressor housing ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. OPCG Condenser protection grills ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° fact. mount. EKLONPG Gateway for LON ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit EKBNPG Gateway for BACNET ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit EKACPG Address card ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit EKRUPG Remote user interface ° ° ° ° ° ° ° ° Kit Available kits Notes Part 1 – System Outline ° Available - Not available (S) Option required for Swedish national law SNFS 1992:16 3 1–33 4 5 General Outline 11 1.25 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ080-100DAYN (N) 1200 1000 1100 23 1200 3 1200 4 1000 2000 AIR AIR AIR 3000 AIR 17 18 16 11 6 19 970 5 2311 20 22 7 30 4 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 AIR AIR 49 15 26 120 25 3 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 1922 AIR AIR 14 2 13 27 673 8 29 21 28 24 1388 2566 1–34 1 217 5 12 407 9 10 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 16 Power supply intake 2 Condensor 17 Switchbox 3 Compressor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 19 Field wiring intake 5 Discharge valve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 23 Fan 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 10 Water drain evaporator 25 High pressure sensor 11 Air purge 26 Low pressure sensor 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 27 High pressure switch 13 Entering water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 14 Ambient temperature sensor 29 Water filter 15 Drier + charge valve 30 Frame 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–35 General Outline 11 1.26 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ080-100DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ080-100DAYN (P-B) 23 1200 3 1090 1200 1000 1120 4 1000 2000 AIR AIR AIR 3000 AIR 17 18 5 16 22 2311 20 29 1 31 34 27 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 25 4 7 15 49 26 120 6 900 19 33 3 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 1922 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 11 33 AIR AIR AIR 29 14 38 31 2 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 11 5 32 32 33 8 673 35 673 383 37 36 21 28 24 1388 2566 1–36 30 36 407 38 13 217 AIR 38 9 10 12 1000 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 20 Main isolator switch 2 Condensor 21 Transport beam 3 Compressor 22 Flowswitch 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 23 Fan 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 24 Safety valve 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 27 High pressure switch 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 10 Water drain evaporator 29 Pump (optional) 11 Air purge 30 Buffer tank (optional) 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 31 Expansion vessel (optional) 13 Entering water temperature sensor 32 Water filter 14 Ambient temperature sensor 33 Water stopvalve (optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 34 Frame 16 Power supply intake 35 Buffer tank drain valve (optional) 17 Switchbox 36 Regulating valve (optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 37 Water safety valve (optional) 19 Field wiring intake 38 Pressure gauge (optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–37 General Outline 11 1.27 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ130-150DAYN (N) 1000 1200 23 1200 1000 3 2000 4 AIR AIR AIR AIR 1200 1000 17 20 18 22 16 5 19 2311 5 3000 14 6 24 26 29 10 1 30 120 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 3 15 49 AIR 925 31 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 32 1922 AIR AIR AIR 2 11 4 13 673 8 217 12 7 28 25 27 1388 9 21 407 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 2631 1–38 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 16 Power supply intake 2 Condensor 17 Switchbox 3 Compressor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 19 Field wiring intake 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 23 Fan 9 Chilled water OUT (Victalic coupling) 24 Safety valve 10 Water drain evaporator 25 High pressure sensor 11 Air purge 26 Low pressure sensor 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 27 High pressure switch 13 Entering water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 14 Ambient temperature sensor 29 Water filter 15 Drier + charge valve 30 Frame 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–39 General Outline 11 1.28 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ130-150DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ130-150DAYN (P-B) 1000 1200 1000 23 1200 3 1200 1000 2000 AIR AIR AIR 3000 4 AIR 17 20 18 14 5 19 6 2311 16 5 875 4 36 26 24 30 35 1 31 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 3 15 AIR 32 33 11 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 36 1922 49 AIR ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 120 33 AIR AIR 40 35 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 2 40 29 22 25 27 1388 34 21 407 29 38 40 10 1000 673 9 412 12 39 28 217 8 37 7 673 13 11 38 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 2631 1–40 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 20 Main isolator switch 2 Condensor 21 Transport beam 3 Compressor 22 Flowswitch 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 23 Fan 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 24 Safety valve 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 27 High pressure switch 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 10 Water drain evaporator 29 Pump (optional) 11 Air purge 30 Buffer tank (optional) 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 31 Expansion vessel (optional) 13 Entering water temperature sensor 32 Water filter 14 Ambient temperature sensor 33 Water stopvalve (optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 34 Frame 16 Power supply intake 35 Buffer tank drain valve (optional) 17 Switchbox 36 Regulating valve (optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 37 Water safety valve (optional) 19 Field wiring intake 38 Pressure gauge (optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–41 General Outline 11 1.29 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ180-210DAYN (N) 1200 1000 1000 23 1200 3 4 2000 AIR AIR AIR AIR 1500 AIR 20 3000 17 18 16 14 19 5 22 25 26 2311 5 930 27 29 10 120 24 30 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 3 7 49 AIR AIR AIR 1000 4 15 4 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 7 1922 AIR AIR 2 11 13 8 6 1 217 612 12 9 1000 21 28 1838 407 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 3081 1–42 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 16 Power supply intake 2 Condensor 17 Switchbox 3 Compressor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 19 Field wiring intake 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 23 Fan 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 10 Water drain evaporator 25 High pressure sensor 11 Air purge 26 Low pressure sensor 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 27 High pressure switch 13 Entering water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 14 Ambient temperature sensor 29 Water filter 15 Drier + charge valve 30 Frame 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–43 General Outline 11 1.30 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ180-210DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ180-210DAYN (P-B) 1000 1200 1000 1200 3 1000 1500 4 AIR AIR 23 AIR AIR 3000 2000 AIR 17 20 18 2311 14 5 16 6 19 27 1 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 25 29 880 5 26 33 34 31 10 28 3 120 26 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 24 7 45 4 15 4 7 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 29 38 1920 31 AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 11 32 38 2 217 13 11 8 32 27 673 22 30 36 412 35 37 21 3 24 33 1838 407 1000 38 9 1000 12 673 25 36 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 3081 1–44 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 20 Main isolator switch 2 Condensor 21 Transport beam 3 Compressor 22 Flowswitch 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 23 Fan 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 24 Safety valve 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 27 High pressure switch 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 10 Water drain evaporator 29 Pump (optional) 11 Air purge 30 Buffer tank (optional) 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 31 Expansion vessel (optional) 13 Entering water temperature sensor 32 Water filter 14 Ambient temperature sensor 33 Water stopvalve (optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 34 Frame 16 Power supply intake 35 Buffer tank drain valve (optional) 17 Switchbox 36 Regulating valve (optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 37 Water safety valve (optional) 19 Field wiring intake 38 Pressure gauge (optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–45 General Outline 11 1.31 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ240-260DAYN (N) 1000 1200 1000 1200 3 2500 1000 23 950 3000 4 5 2000 AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR 17 18 14 16 6 2311 20 25 19 29 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 30 1 4 5 3 24 49 AIR AIR AIR AIR 15 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 120 26 12 1922 AI R AIR 2 27 22 13 11 21 28 1388 814 4852 1–46 1388 406 7 10 9 583 212 8 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 16 Power supply intake 2 Condensor 17 Switchbox 3 Compressor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 19 Field wiring intake 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 23 Fan 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 10 Water drain evaporator 25 High pressure sensor 11 Air purge 26 Low pressure sensor 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 27 High pressure switch 13 Entering water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 14 Ambient sensor 29 Water filter 15 Drier + charge valve 30 Frame 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–47 General Outline 11 1.32 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWAQ240-260DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B) 1000 1200 1000 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 22 3 33 1200 34 36 23 38 2500 1000 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 11 29 38 212 670 3000 4 1000 5 900 36 2000 AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR 17 18 14 16 25 34 19 5 6 26 33 1 4 7 3 24 15 49 AIR AIR AIR AIR 120 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 30 2311 20 27 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 1922 AIR AIR 2 11 8 37 38 433 35 32 21 28 1388 814 4852 1–48 1388 406 29 36 12 9 10 1000 670 13 22 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 20 Main isolator switch 2 Condensor 21 Transport beam 3 Compressor 22 Flowswitch 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 23 Fan 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 24 Safety valve 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 27 High pressure switch 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 10 Water drain evaporator 29 Water filter 11 Air purge 30 Frame 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 31 Pump (optional) 13 Entering water temperature sensor 32 Buffer tank (optional) 14 Ambient sensor 33 Expansion vessel (optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 34 Water stopvalve (optional) 16 Power supply intake 35 Buffertank drain valve (optional) 17 Switchbox 36 Regulating valve (optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 37 Water safety valve (optional) 19 Field wiring intake 38 Pressure gauge (optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–49 General Outline 11 1.33 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ080-100DAYN (N) 1100 1200 1000 23 1200 3 1200 1000 4 2000 AIR AIR AIR 3000 AIR 5 17 18 5 16 11 970 22 2311 20 30 1 6 26 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 7 4 15 AIR 31 1922 49 AIR 32 AIR 3 120 19 29 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 AIR 14 2 13 217 673 8 21 28 24 27 1388 2566 1–50 25 12 407 9 10 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 17 Switchbox 2 Condensor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 3 Compressor 19 Field wiring intake 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 20 Main isolator switch 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 23 Fan 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 25 High pressure sensor 10 Water drain evaporator 26 Low pressure sensor 11 Air purge 27 High pressure switch 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 13 Entering water temperature sensor 29 Water filter 14 Ambient temperature sensor 30 Frame 15 Drier + charge valve 31 4-way valve 16 Power supply intake 32 Liquid receiver 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–51 General Outline 11 1.34 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ080-100DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B) 1090 1200 1000 1200 3 23 1120 1000 2000 AIR AIR AIR AIR 3000 4 17 18 5 20 16 11 19 900 22 2311 5 36 30 35 1 6 26 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 7 4 15 49 AIR 32 31 120 33 3 1922 AIR AIR ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 36 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 11 AIR 14 40 2 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 11 12 38 8 13 33 35 8 217 39 673 13 383 37 673 29 36 21 28 24 27 1388 2566 1–52 25 34 407 38 40 9 10 12 1000 9 29 40 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 21 Transport beam 2 Condensor 22 Flowswitch 3 Compressor 23 Fan 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 24 Safety valve 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 27 High pressure switch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 29 Water filter 10 Water drain evaporator 30 Frame 11 Air purge 31 4-way frame 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 32 Liquid receiver 13 Entering water temperature sensor 33 Pump (Optional) 14 Ambient temperature sensor 34 Buffer tank (Optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 35 Expansion vessel (Optional) 16 Power supply intake 36 Water stopvalve (Optional) 17 Switchbox 37 Buffer tank drain valve (Optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 38 Regulating valve (Optional) 19 Field wiring intake 39 Water safety valve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 40 Pressure gauge (Optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–53 General Outline 11 1.35 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ130-150DAYN (N) 1000 1200 23 1200 1000 3 2000 4 AIR AIR AIR AIR 1200 1000 17 20 18 22 16 5 19 2311 5 3000 14 6 24 26 29 10 1 30 120 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 3 15 49 AIR 925 31 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 32 1922 AIR AIR AIR 2 11 4 13 673 8 217 12 7 28 25 27 1388 9 21 407 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 2631 1–54 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 17 Switchbox 2 Condensor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 3 Compressor 19 Field wiring intake 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 20 Main isolator switch 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 23 Fan 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 25 High pressure sensor 10 Water drain evaporator 26 Low pressure sensor 11 Air purge 27 High pressure switch 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 13 Entering water temperature sensor 29 Water filter 14 Ambient temperature sensor 30 Frame 15 Drier + charge valve 31 4-way valve 16 Power supply intake 32 Liquid receiver 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–55 General Outline 11 1.36 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ130-150DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ130-150DAYN (P-B) 1000 1200 1000 23 1200 3 1200 1000 2000 AIR AIR AIR AIR 3000 4 17 20 18 14 5 19 6 2311 16 5 875 4 36 26 24 30 35 1 31 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 3 15 AIR 32 33 11 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 36 1922 49 AIR ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 120 33 AIR AIR 40 35 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 2 40 29 22 25 27 1388 34 21 407 29 38 40 10 1000 673 9 412 12 39 28 217 8 37 7 673 13 11 38 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 2631 1–56 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 21 Transport beam 2 Condensor 22 Flowswitch 3 Compressor 23 Fan 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 24 Safety valve 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 27 High pressure switch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 29 Water filter 10 Water drain evaporator 30 Frame 11 Air purge 31 4-way frame 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 32 Liquid receiver 13 Entering water temperature sensor 33 Pump (Optional) 14 Ambient temperature sensor 34 Buffer tank (Optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 35 Expansion vessel (Optional) 16 Power supply intake 36 Water stopvalve (Optional) 17 Switchbox 37 Buffer tank drain valve (Optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 38 Regulating valve (Optional) 19 Field wiring intake 39 Water safety valve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 40 Pressure gauge (Optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–57 General Outline 11 1.37 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ180-210DAYN (N) 1000 1200 1000 23 1200 3 1500 1000 4 AIR AIR AIR AIR 3000 2000 AIR 17 5 18 20 16 5 19 930 22 2311 14 6 26 24 10 1 30 120 31 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 3 15 49 AIR AIR AIR 32 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 1922 AIR AIR 2 11 4 8 7 28 25 27 1838 21 217 12 9 407 612 13 29 1000 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity 3081 1–58 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 17 Switchbox 2 Condensor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 3 Compressor 19 Field wiring intake 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 20 Main isolator switch 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 23 Fan 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 25 High pressure sensor 10 Water drain evaporator 26 Low pressure sensor 11 Air purge 27 High pressure switch 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 13 Entering water temperature sensor 29 Water filter 14 Ambient temperature sensor 30 Frame 15 Drier + charge valve 31 4-way valve 16 Power supply intake 32 Liquid receiver 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–59 General Outline 11 1.38 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ180-210DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ180-210DAYN (P-B) 1200 1000 1000 23 1200 3 4 2000 AIR AIR AIR 1500 AIR 1000 AIR 18 20 14 16 22 19 5 4 6 36 26 24 31 30 35 1 120 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 880 33 2311 5 3000 17 49 2 x hole for fixation ÿ 20 32 15 3 1922 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 11 AI R AI R AI R 673 AI R 40 217 AI R 29 38 2 1000 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 13 36 8 11 33 9 39 7 28 25 27 1838 3081 1–60 34 40 29 21 407 673 37 412 12 38 40 10 1000 35 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 21 Transport beam 2 Condensor 22 Flowswitch 3 Compressor 23 Fan 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 24 Safety valve 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 27 High pressure switch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 29 Water filter 10 Water drain evaporator 30 Frame 11 Air purge 31 4-way frame 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 32 Liquid receiver 13 Entering water temperature sensor 33 Pump (Optional) 14 Ambient temperature sensor 34 Buffer tank (Optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 35 Expansion vessel (Optional) 16 Power supply intake 36 Water stopvalve (Optional) 17 Switchbox 37 Buffer tank drain valve (Optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 38 Regulating valve (Optional) 19 Field wiring intake 39 Water safety valve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 40 Pressure gauge (Optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–61 General Outline 11 1.39 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ230-250DAYN (N) 1000 1200 1000 1200 3 23 2500 3000 4 1000 5 AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR 950 2000 AIR 18 17 20 16 5 24 30 29 1 4 AIR 7 6 AIR 28 AIR 21 49 AIR 26 120 19 2311 14 31 1922 AIR AIR 2 22 13 11 8 32 15 212 583 12 3 27 1388 25 814 1388 406 10 9 1000 4852 1–62 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 17 Switchbox 2 Condensor 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 3 Compressor 19 Field wiring intake 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 20 Main isolator switch 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 21 Transport beam 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 22 Flowswitch 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 23 Fan 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 24 Safety valve 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 25 High pressure sensor 10 Water drain evaporator 26 Low pressure sensor 11 Air purge 27 High pressure switch 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 28 Oil sight glass 13 Entering water temperature sensor 29 Water filter 14 Ambient sensor 30 Frame 15 Drier + charge valve 31 4-way valve 16 Power supply intake 32 Liquid receiver 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–63 General Outline 11 1.40 ESIE06-05 Outlook Drawing: EWYQ230-250DAYN(P-B) The illustration below shows the outlook, the dimensions and the installation and service space of the unit (mm). EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B) 1000 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 29 1200 40 212 670 1000 35 36 1000 38 1200 3 23 ONLY FOR UNIT WITHOUT OPBT 33 2500 1000 35 22 4 3000 38 40 AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR AIR 17 18 14 20 5 16 19 2311 5 900 2000 33 35 1 32 15 7 6 28 24 21 26 49 AIR AIR AIR AIR 120 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 30 31 2 x hole for fixation Ø20 1922 AIR AIR 2 22 13 11 8 29 36 37 3 27 25 1388 814 4 39 1388 406 38 9 10 12 40 4852 1000 1–64 670 433 34 Required space around the unit for service and air intake Center of gravity Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Components General Outline 1 The table below lists the components. No. Component No. Component 1 Evaporator 21 Transport beam 2 Condensor 22 Flowswitch 3 Compressor 23 Fan 4 Expansion valve + sight glass 24 Safety valve 5 Discharge stopvalve (Optional) 25 High pressure sensor 6 Suction stopvalve (Optional) 26 Low pressure sensor 7 Liquid stopvalve (Optional) 27 High pressure switch 8 Chilled water IN (Victaulic coupling) 28 Oil sight glass 9 Chilled water OUT (Victaulic coupling) 29 Water filter 10 Water drain evaporator 30 Frame 11 Air purge 31 4-way valve 12 Leaving water temperature sensor 32 Liquid receiver 13 Entering water temperature sensor 33 Pump (Optional) 14 Ambient temperature sensor 34 Buffer tank (Optional) 15 Drier + charge valve 35 Expansion vessel (Optional) 16 Power supply intake 36 Water stopvalve (Optional) 17 Switchbox 37 Buffer tank drain valve (Optional) 18 Digital display controller (Inside switchbox) 38 Regulating valve (Optional) 19 Field wiring intake 39 Water safety valve (Optional) 20 Main isolator switch 40 Pressure gauge (Optional) Part 1 – System Outline 3 4 5 1–65 General Outline ESIE06-05 11 3 4 5 1–66 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout Part 1 2 Piping Layout 2.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction Overview Part 1 – System Outline This chapter describes the internal refrigeration circuit and the water piping, depending on the unit model (N-P-B). 1 3 This chapter contains the following topics: Topic See page 2.2–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) 1–68 2.3–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) 1–70 2.4–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B) 1–72 2.5–Components Refrigeration Side : EWAQ080-260DAYN 1–74 2.6–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) 1–76 2.7–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) 1–78 2.8–Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) 1–80 2.9–Components refrigeration side: EWYQ080-250DAYN 1–82 2.10–Functional Diagram Water Piping: EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B) 1–84 2.11–Components Water Side : EWAQ- EWYQ- DAYN(N-P-B) 1–85 4 5 1–67 Piping Layout 11 2.2 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) Functional diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications. 13 13 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 15 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 14 M13F DISTRIBUTOR 3 M15F R1T t> SUBCOOL PASS SUBCOOL PASS AIR HEAT EXCHANGER AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M14F M16F 12 DISTRIBUTOR B1PH 16 DISTRIBUTOR 6 OP12 4 15 DISTRIBUTOR SUBCOOL PASS p> p> SUBCOOL PASS S1PH 18 12 1 OR 2 R15T M11C 5 OP12 4 4 NON RETURN R25T M12C 9 12 NON RETURN FILTER VALVE 8 OIL EQ. 10 10 R14T 12 12 17 B1PL p< 11 Y11E 5 OP12 12 12 R17T PHE R2T t> 3 WATER IN 2 1 R3T t> WATER OUT 1. STD SAFETY VALVE 7 2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03) SAFETY VALVES 7 1–68 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout 1 . M11-12C Compressor motors B1PH High pressure sensor M13-16F Fan motors B1PL Low pressure sensor R14T Suction temperature sensor Y11E Electronic expansion valve cooling R17T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor R1T Ambient temperature sensor S1PH High pressure switch R2T Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor Discharge temperature switch R3T Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor R15T, R25T : Check valve : Flange connection : Flare connection : Pinched pipe : Screw connection : Spinned pipe 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–69 Piping Layout 11 2.3 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) Functional diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications. . 14 13 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 15 13 R1T t> AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M15F ONLY 70/80HP 3 M13F 15 M25F DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR 9 SUBCOOL PASS 12 12 OP12 ONLY 70/80HP 9 SUBCOOL PASS OP12 8 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER FILTER FILTER M23F AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 8 M24F M14F Y21E 11 11 Y11E SUBCOOL PASS 12 4 DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR 12 12 6 OP12 6 16 B1PH 5 OP12 p> 5 OP12 p> 18 p> S1PH 12 12 p> 12 S2PH 18 1 OR 2 12 4 12 B1PL B2PH 16 R34T 1 OR 2 17 OP12 12 R14T 5 12 SUBCOOL PASS R15T M12C M11C p< NON RETURN 12 PHE 4 R25T NON RETURN OIL EQ. 10 R37T 2 R17T 4 10 R35T R3T t> 1 WATER OUT 3 R2T t> WATER IN M22C 4 R45T 12 M21C p< NON RETURN NON RETURN 10 10 B2PL 17 OIL EQ. 1. STD SAFETY VALVE 2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03) SAFETY VALVES 1–70 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout 1 M11-12C Compressor motors circuit 1 R34T Suction temperature sensor circuit 2 M13-15F Fan motors circuit 1 R37T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R14T Suction temperature sensor circuit 1 S2PH High pressure switch circuit 2 R17T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 R35T Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 S1PH High pressure switch circuit 1 B2PH High pressure sensor circuit 2 Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 B2PL Low pressure sensor circuit 2 B1PH High pressure sensor circuit 1 Y21E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 B1PL Low pressure sensor circuit 1 R1T Ambient temperature sensor Y11E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 R2T Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor M21-22C Compressor motors circuit 2 R3T Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor M23-25F Fan motors circuit 2 R15T, R25T : Check valve : Flange connection : Flare connection : Pinched pipe : Screw connection : Spinned pipe 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–71 Piping Layout 11 2.4 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B) Functional diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of EWAQ240-260DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications. 14 R1T 13 15 13 t> AIR HEAT EXCHANGER AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M15F 3 SUBCOOL PASS 12 SUBCOOL PASS 12 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M16F M26F DISTRIBUTOR 4 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER DISTRIBUTOR SUBCOOL PASS SUBCOOL PASS 9 12 12 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 9 OP12 OP12 M14F M24F DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR 8 FILTER FILTER 8 SUBCOOL PASS SUBCOOL PASS 12 5 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 11 Y11E M23F DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR SUBCOOL PASS SUBCOOL PASS 6 OP12 6 OP12 5 B1PH 16 p> OP12 OP12 5 18 p> S1PH 12 12 12 p> B2PH 16 p> S2PH 18 12 R14T 1 OR 2 R17T 4 R15T NON RETURN 12 4 R25T M12C NON RETURN OIL EQ. 10 R37T 2 PHE 4 M11C p< 10 R34T 1 OR 2 12 B1PL 12 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER Y21E 11 M13F 17 15 M25F DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR R35T R3T t> 1 WATER OUT 3 R2T t> WATER IN 4 R45T M21C NON RETURN M22C p< B2PL 17 NON RETURN OIL EQ. 10 10 1. STD SAFETY VALVE 2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03) SAFETY VALVES 1–72 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Symbols Piping Layout 1 The table below describes the symbols. . M11-12C Compressor motors circuit 1 R34T Suction temperature sensor circuit 2 M13-16F Fan motors circuit 1 R37T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R14T Suction temperature sensor circuit 1 S2PH High pressure switch circuit 2 R17T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 R35T Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 S1PH High pressure switch circuit 1 B2PH High pressure sensor circuit 2 Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 B2PL Low pressure sensor circuit 2 B1PH High pressure sensor circuit 1 Y21E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 B1PL Low pressure sensor circuit 1 R1T Ambient temperature sensor Y11E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 R2T Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor M21-22C Compressor motors circuit 2 R3T Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor M23-26F Fan motors circuit 2 R15T, R25T 3 4 : Check valve : Flange connection : Flare connection : Pinched pipe : Screw connection : Spinned pipe Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–73 Piping Layout 11 2.5 Components Refrigeration Side : EWAQ080-260DAYN Components refrigeration side EWAQ080-260 DAYN 3 4 5 1–74 ESIE06-05 The table below describes the main components of the refrigeration circuit. 1 Water outlet The water outlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic joint but without a counter pipe. 2 Evaporator The water-heat exchanger is of the brazed plate-heat exchanger type. 3 Water inlet The water inlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic joint but without a counter pipe. 4 Compressor A hermetically sealed scroll compressor 5 Suction stop valve (optional) This suction stop valve can be used in combination with the discharge stop valve to separate the compressors from the system. 6 Discharge stop valve (optional) This discharge stop valve is used during pump down and service work in combination with the liquid stop valve or suction stop valve if present (optional). 7 Refrigerant circuit safety valve The safety valve prevents a too high pressure. Activation above 45 bar. 8 Drier/ charge valve The replaceable filter drier will keep the refrigerant system dry. It is installed behind the condenser and removes small particles from the refrigerant to prevent damage to the compressor and the expansion valve. It is equipped with a 3/8” charge valve. 9 Liquid stop valve (optional) The liquid stop valve is used as a shut-off valve in case of a pump down. 10 Oil sight glass An oil sight glass is placed in the compressor to check the oil level of the compressor during operation. 11 Electronic expansion valve + sight glass with moisture indication The electronic expansion valve is set up to control the superheat between minimum and maximum setpoint. A sight glass with moisture indication is integrated in the expansion valve body and is used to check the refrigerant shortage and/or moisture level in the system. 12 Check valve Service port. 13 Condenser The air-heat exchanger is of the cross fin coil type. Hi-X-tubes and PE coated waffle louvre fins are used. The air is discharged upwards. 14 Ambient temperature sensor The ambient temperature senor is used to measure the temperature in order to perform some controls. 15 Fan Direct driven single speed fan or inverter driver fan (only OPIF) 16 High pressure sensor The high pressure transmitter is used to gain information in order to perform some controls and also to act as safety. 17 Low pressure sensor The low pressure transmitter is used to gain information in order to perform some controls and also to act as safety. Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout 18 High pressure switch This switch acts as a circuit safety. ■ Activation at 40,5 bar ■ Automatic reset at 30,2 bar 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–75 Piping Layout 11 2.6 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) Functional diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications. . 16 16 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 18 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER DISTRIBUTOR M13F M15F 14 14 17 18 DISTRIBUTOR R1T Y12E R18T SUBCOOL PASS 3 Y22E t> R28T 7 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER SUBCOOL PASS 7 t > R16T R26T t> AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M14F M16F DISTRIBUTOR 4 DISTRIBUTOR SUBCOOL PASS SUBCOOL PASS 15 9 12 OP12 15 OP12 5 7 7 15 Liq Receiver 5 6 19 B1PH VALVE 11 FILTER Y1R p> 15 OP12 8 7 S1PH 21 Y11E p> 15 15 R14T 14 1 OR 2 4 15 20 B1PL M11C p< R17T 4 R15T M12C NON RETURN 2 R25T NON RETURN PHE R2T t> 3 1 R3T t> OIL EQ. 13 13 WATER IN WATER OUT COOLING HEATING 1. STD SAFETY VALVE 10 2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03) SAFETY VALVES 10 1–76 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout 1 . M11-12C Compressor motors B1PH High pressure sensor M13-16F Fan motors B1PL Low pressure sensor R14T Suction temperature sensor Y11E Electronic expansion valve cooling R17T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor Y12S Liquid injection valve R18T, R28T Heating suction piping temperature sensor Y12E, Y22E Electronic expansion valve heating coil 1 R16T, R26T Coil temperature sensor R1T Ambient temperature sensor S1PH High pressure switch R2T Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor Reverse valve R3T Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor Y1R R15T, R25T 3 Discharge temperature sensor : Check valve : Flange connection : Flare connection : Pinched pipe : Screw connection : Spinned pipe 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–77 Piping Layout 11 2.7 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) Functional diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications. 16 18 16 17 R1T t> AIR HEAT EXCHANGER AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M15F M25F 14 DISTRIBUTOR 14 R38T R18T Y12E ONLY EWYQ170-190DAYN* SUBCOOL PASS M13F 3 15 Y22E 15 12 t > R16T 7 7 OP12 7 5 DISTRIBUTOR 14 FILTER FILTER 6 15 9 OP12 Y1R 8 p> 15 OP12 8 15 5 20 B1PL p< R37T 4 R15T M12C NON RETURN R3T t> 1 WATER OUT OIL EQ. 13 R35T R25T NON RETURN 13 S2PH 21 R34T 4 M11C B2PH 19 p> 1 OR 2 FILTER PHE p> 15 15 R17T 9 Y2R OP12 2 4 OP12 6 1 OR 2 15 15 SUBCOOL PASS S1PH R14T M24F 11 15 21 p> DISTRIBUTOR Y21E Y11E B1PH AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 5 14 SUBCOOL PASS 19 R36T t > OP12 15 11 4 ONLY EWYQ170-190DAYN* M23F 12 7 Liq Receiver Liq Receiver 15 M14F SUBCOOL PASS 7 7 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 15 18 DISTRIBUTOR 3 R2T t> WATER IN 4 M22C R45T NON RETURN 15 M21C p< B2PL 20 NON RETURN OIL EQ. 13 13 COOLING HEATING 1. STD SAFETY VALVE 10 2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03) SAFETY VALVES 10 1–78 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout M11-12C Compressor motors circuit 1 R34T Suction temperature sensor circuit 2 M13-15F Fan motors circuit 1 R36T Coil temperature sensor circuit 2 R14T Suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R37T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R16T Coil temperature sensor circuit 1 R38T Heating suction temp sensor circuit 2 R17T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 S2PH High pressure switch circuit 2 R18T Heating suction temp sensor circuit 1 S1PH High pressure switch circuit 1 R35T, R45T Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 Y1R Y2R Reverse valve circuit 2 Reverse valve circuit 1 B2PH High pressure sensor circuit 2 R15T, R25T Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 B2PL Low pressure sensor circuit 2 B1PH High pressure sensor circuit 1 Y21E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 B1PL Low pressure sensor circuit 1 Y22S Liquid injection valve circuit 2 Y11E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 Y22E Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 Y12S Liquid injection valve circuit 1 R1T Ambient temperature sensor Y12E Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 R2T Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor M21-22C Compressor motors circuit 2 R3T Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor M23-25F Fan motors circuit 2 : Check valve : Flange connection : Flare connection : Pinched pipe : Screw connection : Spinned pipe Part 1 – System Outline 1 3 4 5 1–79 Piping Layout 11 2.8 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) Functional diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the refrigeration circuit of EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B). It is also applicable for glycol applications. 17 16 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 18 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M16F 14 DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR 15 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER Y23E R48T 7 SUBCOOL PASS 7 SUBCOOL PASS t > R26T 15 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER R46T t > M15F M25F DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR 4 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER SUBCOOL PASS SUBCOOL PASS AIR HEAT EXCHANGER M14F 14 DISTRIBUTOR SUBCOOL PASS AIR HEAT EXCHANGER 5 M24F 14 DISTRIBUTOR Y12E R18T 15 12 Y22E 15 7 15 R38T 7 OP12 7 t > R16T SUBCOOL PASS 12 OP12 7 7 Liq Receiver 15 7 Liq Receiver 15 AIR HEAT EXCHANGER R36T t > 15 M13F 5 DISTRIBUTOR SUBCOOL PASS 14 DISTRIBUTOR 14 Y11E 7 11 Y21E 15 9 M23F 5 11 OP12 SUBCOOL PASS 7 OP12 15 Y1R OP12 p> OP12 8 Y2R 8 S1PH 21 15 15 1 OR 2 4 15 B2PH 19 S2PH 21 R15T NON RETURN NON RETURN R35T R3T t> 1 WATER OUT OIL EQ. 13 R37T 2 PHE R25T M12C 13 R34T 15 1 OR 2 R17T 4 M11C p< p> p> 15 R14T B1PL 9 6 6 19 B1PH p > 20 18 M26F 14 Y13E R28T 3 16 R1T t> 3 R2T t> WATER IN M21C R45T NON RETURN 15 M22C p< B2PL 20 NON RETURN OIL EQ. 13 13 COOLING HEATING 1. STD SAFETY VALVE 10 2. DUAL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE (OP03) SAFETY VALVES 10 1–80 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout 1 . M11-12C Compressor motors circuit 1 M13-16F Fan motors circuit 1 R14T R16T, R26T R36T, R46T Suction temperature sensor circuit 2 Coil temperature sensor circuit 2 Suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R37T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 Coil temperature sensor circuit 1 S2PH High pressure switch circuit 2 R17T Refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 S1PH High pressure switch circuit 1 Y1R R34T Y2R R35T, R45T Reverse valve circuit 2 Discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 Reverse valve circuit 1 B2PH High pressure sensor circuit 2 Discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 B2PL Low pressure sensor circuit 2 B1PH High pressure sensor circuit 1 Y21E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 B1PL Low pressure sensor circuit 1 R38T, R48T Heating suction temperature sensor circuit 2 Y11E Electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 Y22E, Y23E Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 R18T, R28T Heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R1T Ambient temperature sensor Y12E, Y13E Electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 R2T Evaporator inlet water temperature sensor M21-22C Compressor motors circuit 2 R3T Evaporator outlet water temperature sensor M23-26F Fan motors circuit 2 R15T, R25T 3 4 5 : Check valve : Flange connection : Flare connection : Pinched pipe : Screw connection : Spinned pipe Part 1 – System Outline 1–81 Piping Layout 11 2.9 Components refrigeration side: EWYQ080-250DAYN Components refrigeration side EWYQ080-250DAY N 3 4 5 1–82 ESIE06-05 The table below describes the main components of the refrigeration circuit. 1 Water outlet The water outlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic joint but without a counter pipe. 2 Evaporator The water-heat exchanger is of the brazed plate-heat exchanger type. 3 Water inlet The water inlet piping connection is delivered with a victaulic joint but without a counter pipe. 4 Compressor A hermetically sealed scroll compressor 5 Liquid receiver The liquid receiver is installed to accumulate the refrigerant. 6 4-way valve The 4-way valve is used to select cooling or heating. 7 Non-return valve The non return valve is used to block the refrigerant in one direction. 8 Suction stop valve (optional) This suction stop valve can be used in combination with the discharge stop valve to separate the compressors from the system. 9 Discharge stop valve (optional) This stop valve is used during pump down and service work in combination with the liquid stop valve or suction stop valve if present (optional). 10 Refrigerant circuit safety valve The safety valve prevents a too high pressure. Activation above 45 bar. 11 Drier/ charge valve The replaceable filter drier will keep the refrigerant system dry. It is installed behind the condenser and removes small particles from the refrigerant to prevent damage to the compressor and the expansion valve. It is equipped with a 3/8” charge valve. 12 Liquid stop valve (optional) The liquid stop valve is used as a shut-off valve in case of a pump down. 13 Oil sight glass An oil sight glass is placed in the compressor to check the oil level of the compressor during operation. 14 Electronic expansion valve + sight glass with moisture indication The electronic expansion valve is set up to control the superheat between minimum and maximum setpoint. A sight glass with moisture indication is integrated in the expansion valve body and is used to check the refrigerant shortage and/or moisture level in the system. 15 Check valve Service port 16 Condenser The air-heat exchanger is of the cross fin coil type. Hi-X-tubes and PE coated waffle louvre fins are used. The air is discharged upwards. 17 Ambient temperature sensor The ambient temperature senor is used to measure the temperature in order to perform some controls. 18 Fan Direct driven single speed fan or inverter driver fan (only OPIF) Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Piping Layout 19 High pressure sensor The high pressure transmitter is used to gain information in order to perform some controls and also to act as safety. 20 Low pressure sensor The low pressure transmitter is used to gain information in order to perform some controls and also to act as safety. 21 High pressure switch This switch acts as a circuit safety. ■ Activation at 40,5 bar ■ Automatic reset at 30,2 bar 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–83 Piping Layout 11 2.10 ESIE06-05 Functional Diagram Water Piping: EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B) Water piping diagram The illustration below shows the functional diagram of the water piping of the EWAQ080~260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080~250DAYN(N-P-B). OPTIONAL SERVICE PORT AIR PURGE PRESSURE GAUGE OPTIONAL SHUT OFF VALVE EXPANSION VESSEL SERVICE PORT FILL PORT R2T t> AIR PURGE FILTER 3 SAFETY VALVE FLOW SWITCH PUMP EVAPORATOR BUFFER TANK WATER IN DRAIN VALVE DRAIN PORT SERVICE PORT R3T REGULATING OPTIONAL VALVE 4 WATER OUT 5 t> DRAIN VALVE : Check valve : Screw connection : Flange connection 1–84 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 2.11 Piping Layout Components Water Side : EWAQ- EWYQ- DAYN(N-P-B) Components water piping side Part 1 – System Outline 1 The table below describes the main components of the water piping. 1 Flow switch The mechanical flow switch is used to check if there is flow or enough water flow. 2 Service port The service port can be used to connect a pressure gauge. 3 Drain valve The drain valve can be used to drain water from the water circuit. 4 Regulating valve The pressure regulating valve is used to regulate the water flow on the water side (option). 5 Pump The single or double pump circulates the water (depending on the option). 6 Fill port on the pump The fill port can be used to fill the water circuit. 7 Drain port on the pump The drain port can be used to drain water from the water circuit. 8 Expansion vessel The expansion vessel deals with water expansion, which occurs when the temperature of the water varies. 9 Pressure gauge Pressure gauge to check the water pressure 10 Air purge To purge the water circuit, to prevent air in the water circuit. 11 Buffer tank This buffer tank is used to store water in order to prevent the compressor from switching ON/OFF continuously depending on the load. 12 Filter This strainer prevents dirt particles from entering the evaporator. A filter with 1mm mesh is used. 13 Shut off valve Makes it possible to shut-off a part of the water piping for maintenance (e.g. to change a filter). 14 Water circuit safety valve The safety valve prevents a too high pressure. Activation above 3 bar. 15 Inlet water sensor R2T The water temperature sensor is used to control the thermostat function at the heat exchanger inlet. 16 Outlet water sensor R3T This protection device shuts down the circuit when the temperature of the chilled water becomes too low in order to prevent the water from freezing during operation and is also used to control the thermostat function at the heat exchanger outlet. 3 4 5 1–85 Piping Layout ESIE06-05 11 3 4 5 1–86 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part 1 3 Wiring Layout 3.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction This part gives a general overview of the wiring layout. Overview This chapter contains the following topics: Part 1 – System Outline 1 3 Topic See page 3.2–Wiring Layout : EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) Standard Unit 1–88 3.3–Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) Standard Unit 1–116 3.4–Wiring layout: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF 1–149 3.5–Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF 1–177 4 5 1–87 Wiring Layout 11 3.2 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout : EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) Standard Unit Introduction This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB interconnection, I/O overview, switchbox outlook and wiring of the EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) standard units. Overview This chapter contains the following topics: 3 4 5 1–88 Page description Page 3.2.1 Notes 1–89 3.2.2 Legend 1–91 3.2.3 PCB interconnection diagram 1–96 3.2.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses 1–97 3.2.5 PCB changeable I/O overview 1–101 3.2.6 Unit outlook 1–102 3.2.7 Switchbox outlook (typical) 1–103 3.2.8 Main power supply 1–104 3.2.9 Trafo & PCB power supply 1–105 3.2.10 Compressor & fan 1–106 3.2.11 Circuit 1: control compressors 1–107 3.2.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1–108 3.2.13 Control circuit (DI 230V) 1–109 3.2.14 Control circuit and EEV 1–110 3.2.15 Circuit 1: sensors 1–111 3.2.16 Field wiring DI, changeable DI 1–112 3.2.17 Field wiring changeable AI/AO 1–113 3.2.18 Field wiring DO, changeable DO 1–114 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.2.1 Wiring Layout Notes 1 L1, L2, L3 : Main terminals 1-99 : Field wiring terminals 100-199 : Factory upwiring terminals 200- : Internal wiring terminals U-Z : Main terminals in compressor switchbox : Earth wiring 3 : Wire number 15 : Terminal number 15 4 : Field supply : Option 5 : Not mounted in switchbox : Wiring depending on model : PCB : Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2 ! : Pin against miswiring : Several wiring possibilities N-model : unit with no options included Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode. Part 1 – System Outline 1–89 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Factory installed: ❏ OP10 = Heater tape ❏ OP57 = A-meter, V-meter ❏ OPLN = Low noise (OPIF+ Compressor housing) 3 User installed: 4 ❏ OPTP = Twinpump ❏ OPSC = Single pump contactor ❏ OPTC = Twin pump contactor ❏ OPIF = Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C) ❏ OPHP = Hi ESP pump ❏ OPSP = Single pump ❏ OPBT = Buffer tank ❏ EKACPG = Address card including: -RS485 (Integrated modbus) -F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection) ❏ EKRUPG DI: Digital input DO: Digital output AI: Analog input AO: Analog output Ch: Changeable (function can be selected by the customer) Remote used interface Definitions: 5 1–90 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.2.2 Wiring Layout Legend 1 Not included with standard unit Not possible as option Possible as option Obligatory # ## Not obligatory * ** Part number Description A01P PCB Extension A02P ** A4P A5P ** PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG) ** frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) PCB EEV driver A72P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ) A73P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250) B1PH, B2PH high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 B1PL, B2PL low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 DS1 (A*P) PCB dipswitch E1HS ** switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250) E3H ** heatertape (OP10) E4H ** heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP) E5H * field heater E6H ** buffer tank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT) E7H ** switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100) E11HC, E12HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 1 E21HC, E22HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 2 # F1U (A*P) F4, F5 F9B 5 main fuses fuse PCB # F6B F8B 4 PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2 A71P F1-F3 Part 1 – System Outline PCB Communication (EKACPG) PCB wired remote controller A11P, A21P A13P, A23P 3 fuses for heaters autofuse for primary of TR1 ** autofuse for switchbox heater (OPIF) autofuse for secondary of TR2 1–91 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description F11B, F12B autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C,) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100) F14B, F24B autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 F15B, F25B ** autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) F16B ** autofuse for pump (K1P) (Only for OPSP/ OPHP/ OPSC/ OPTP/OPTC) F17B ** autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC) F21B, F22B 3 4 autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C) H1-6P * indication lamp for changeable digital outputs H11P, H12P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C) H21p, H22P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 2 (M21C, M22C) HAP-HEP (A*P) light emitting diode PCB K1A, K2A auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2 K1P ## pump contactor (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) K1S * overcurrent relay pump K1R-K22R (A*P) K2P 5 PCB relay ** pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC) K3A auxiliary relay for heater tape K11M, K12M compressor contactor for circuit 1 K13F, K14F fan contactor for circuit 1 K13S, K14S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 K15F fan contactor for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K15S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K16F fan contactor for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K16S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K21M, K22M compressor contactor for circuit 2 K23F, K24F fan contactor for circuit 2 K23S, K24S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 K25F fan contactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) 1–92 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description K25S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 1 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) K26F fan contactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ/240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) K26S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ/240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1P ** pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTC) M2P ** pump motor 2 (only for OPTP/OPTC) M11C, M12C compressor motors circuit 1 M13F, M14F fan motors circuit 1 M15F fan motors circuit 1 3 4 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) M16F fan motors circuit 1 5 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) M21C, M22C compressor motors circuit 2 M23F, M24F fan motors circuit 2 M25F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) M26F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1F Q1T Q11C, Q12C switchbox fanmotor ** thermostat (OP10) For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 1 For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 1 Q21C, Q22C For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 2 For EWAQ150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 2 Part 1 – System Outline 1–93 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description R1T ambient temperature sensor R2T inlet water temperature sensor R3T outlet water temperature sensor R8T 3 4 5 * temperature sensor for changeable analog input R14T suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R15T, R25T discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 R16T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ) R17T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 R18T, R38T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) R28T, R48T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250) R26T coil temperature sensor circuit 1(only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250) R34T suction temperature sensor circuit 2 R35T, R45T discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 R36T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ) R37T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R46T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250) S1A-S3A (A*P) PCB dipswitch S1L flowswitch S1M main isolator switch S1PH, S2PH high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2 S1S-S5S * switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...) S1T ** thermal contact (OPIF) S2M # heater tape isolator switch T1A ** current transducer (OP57) T1V ** voltage transducer (OP57) TR1 TR1A transfo control circuit (400V/230V) ** V1C V1F, V2F current measurement transfo (OP57) Ferrite core ** noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) (Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210) (Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210) V2C 1–94 ** Ferrite core (EKACPG) X*A (A*P) PCB terminal X*Y connector X1M (A*P) PCB terminal strip Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description Y1R, Y2R reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y11E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 Y12E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ) Y13E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/ 230-250) Y21E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 Y22E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y23E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ230-250) 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–95 1–96 2 V2C MODBUS DICN EKACPG ON OFF ON OFF HDP ON For S3A setting see installation manual S1A ADDRESS=1 H1P H2P HAP HBP A4P A02P X52A TERM S3A X1M F1 HCP F2 + RS485 - OFF OFF X1M HEP TERM S2A ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=ON ON HBP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB HAP A01P HAP X51A ACS 3 V1C A11P 1 A72P X88A ACS A71P X88A ACS DS1 OFF X1M * DS1 X89A HAP A4P only for EWYQ 080-100 shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) * = DIPSWITCH *= X89A OFF ADDRESS=2 ON HAP OFF ADDRESS=1 ON ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=OFF ON HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB 5 1 EKRUPG 4 + RS485 DC 24V GND ADDRESS=SUB TERM=ON ON OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB 3 + RS485 DC 24V GND X1M A5P 3.2.3 + RS485 DC 24V GND 11 Std Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 PCB interconnection diagram Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.2.4 Wiring Layout PCB I/O overview & fuses 1 Main PCB (A11P) Part 1 – System Outline X12A (1-3-5) DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1 X4A DI: High pressure switch c1 X5A DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1 X6A DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2 X7A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1 X8A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1 X9A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1 X27A not used X29A (3-4) not used X30A DI: Flow switch X31A DI: Pump interlock X32A (3-4) Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined X32A (1-2) Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined X13A DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1 X14A DO:Compressor contactor 2 c1 X15A DO: Heatertape X16A DO: Pump contactor X17A DO: Reverse valve c1 (Only for EWYQ) X19A (1-3) DO: Fanstep 1 c1 X19A (5-7) DO: Fanstep 2 c1 X20A DO: Fanstep 3 c1 X22A Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def) X24A Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def) X25A Ch DO3: function not pre-defined X33A AI: Ambient sensor X34A AI: Inlet water sensor X35A AI: Outlet water sensor X36A AI: Suction temperature sensor c1 X37A AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1 X38A AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ) X39A AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ) X40A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1 X41A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1 3 4 5 1–97 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 X42A AI: High pressure sensor c1 X43A AI: Low pressure sensor c1 X44A AI: Current measurement (OP57) X45A AI: Voltage measurement (OP57) HAP, HBP LED (Service monitor green) H1P, H2P LED (Service monitor red) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 3 Extension PCB (A01P) 4 X63A Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined X64A (1-3) Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined X64A (5-7) Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined X65A (1-2) Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined X65A (3-4) Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined X66A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1 (Only for EWYQ) 5 X67A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1 (Only for EWYQ) X68A Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined X69A Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined X70A Ch AI4: Function not pre-defined X71A Ch AI3: Function not pre-defined X72A (3-4) not used X73A Ch AO1: Function not pre-defined X74A (4-5) not used HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P) 1–98 HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 1 Communication PCB (A02P) HCP, HDP, HEP LED (service monitor green) S3A dipswitch (terminal resistor) EEV PCB (A71P) X86A Y11E Electronic expansion valve X87A not used HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) 3 EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ) X86A Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) X87A Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) 4 5 : EWAQ80 EWAQ100 EWYQ80 EWYQ100 125gL/gG 160gL/gG 500V 500V F1U T 5A/250V T 5A/250V F4, F5 10gL/250V 10gL/250V - - C 2A/250V C 2A/250V F6B 1,55A 1,55A F11B - - F12B - - F16B 4,8A 4,8A 12,0A 12,0A FUSES F1-F3 Circuit breakers F8B (OPIF) F9B Circuit breaker and motor protector settings (OPSP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) F16B (OPHP) Part 1 – System Outline 1–99 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 F17B 11 4,8A 4,8A F14B 6,6A 6,6A F15B (OPIF) 7,7A 7,7A K13S-K16S 1,5A 1,5A (OPTP/OPTC) 3 4 5 1–100 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.2.5 Wiring Layout PCB changeable I/O overview 1 Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O. Changeable digital input (4 available) Changeable analog output (1 available) -None -None -Status - Unit capacity (mA, V) -Dual setpoint -Details of types: Remote on-off Type mA: 0 .. 20mA / 4..20 mA -Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / o-10V 3 -Low noise (only for OPIF) -Free cooling signal -Fan forced on Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available depending on unit) 4 Changeable analog input (4 available) - None (open) -None - Closed -Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI) - 2nd pump -Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*) -100% capacity -Water temperature measurement (NTC**) - Full capacity -Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI) - Free cooling - Details of types: - General operation Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA - Safety + warning NO (internal 5V or external power supply) Safety + warning NC (only for ch DO1) Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V/ 0-10V -Safety NO (excluding warning) Type DI: DI (5V detection) 5 -Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for ch DO1) -C1, C2 Safety NO -Warning NO - C1, C2 operation - Cooling (only EWYQ) - Heating (only EWYQ) - Defrost (only EWYQ) Part 1 – System Outline *: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local dealer. 1–101 Wiring Layout 11 3.2.6 ESIE06-05 Unit outlook TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS) M13F M14F M15F M16F 3 4 5 SWITCHBOX TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB) M11C M12C EWAQ 80-100 EWYQ 80-100 1–102 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.2.7 Wiring Layout Switchbox outlook (typical) 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–103 1–104 S1M 3 4 L2 L3 5 6 Power supply 3ò50Hz 400V L1 F1 F2 F3 1 2 502 32.4 PE 12 / T1A 32.4 300A/5A 11 / T1A F16B 1 2 3 I M1P X17Y 3ò M 12 14 11 PE W 6 PE W V 6 5 6 U I 5 7 4 3 4 3 V 4 6 3ò I U 2 F17B M2P X17Y K2P I M2P 43.3 3ò M M X17Y 9 PE W V 6 5 6 U I 10 4 3 4 5 PE W 3 3ò I 3 V 4 2 1 2 1 U 6 5 4 3 2 1 K2P 5 3 I 1 I 5 6 I 3 4 M F17B 1 2 14 11 6 I 5 4 I 3 2 1 1 2 1 2 1 M1P 22.7 K1P X26Y X26Y X26Y I K1P OPSP/OPHP OPTP 1 2 3 5 F16B X26Y X26Y X26Y OPSC OPTC 9 14 11 14 11 2 2 S2M 1 1 2 1 R2 R1 max. 1kW E5H F5 3 4 2 X10Y 2 0 X10Y Power supply 1ò50Hz 230V F4 21.9 K3A 0 3 TR1A 501 OP57 16.0 16.0 4 L2C1./ L3C1./ 12 OPSP/OPTP /OPHP E4H Q1T OPBT E6H OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 12 MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP E3H PE 24 23 OP10 3.2.8 2 11 L1C1/ 20.0 L2C1/ 20.0 L3C1/ 20.0 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Main power supply Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.2.9 Wiring Layout Trafo & PCB power supply 1 15.2 / L2C1. 15.2 / L3C1. 1 3 5 F6B I I I 2 4 OP57 6 62 60 61 12 / T1V 400 VAC 1 32.6 11 / T1V 32.6 5 3 TR1 31 32 33 34 63 230 VAC X11Y 3 X11Y 3 64 X11Y 1 X11Y 1 65 X11Y 2 X11Y 2 F9B I A11P 1 X1A:3 5 F1U 5A 30.0 30.0 2 E1 E1 A72P SL A11P X2A 21.0 21.0 203 102 101 A71P SN A11P X2A 1 1 X77A:3 X18Y 1 X2A:1 SN / A11P SL A11P / F1U X77A:3 X3A SL A11P only for EWYQ 080-100 21.0 230 VAC Part 1 – System Outline 4 1–105 1–106 Q11C M11C PE W V U M 3~ 6 5 4 3 Q12C M12C K12M PE W V U M 3~ 6 5 4 3 2 1 R1P X12A X12A X12A :5 :3 :1 L3 L2 L1 A11P M13F X14Y K13S K13F X14Y 3ò M U2 22.1 4 PE V2 W1 W2 V1 6 5 6 6 U1 I 36 4 3 4 4 2 I 1 2 1 2 2 96 95 M15F X14Y K15S K15F X14Y 3ò M 16 PE M14F X14Y 3ò M 10 PE X14Y 3ò 22.3 22 PE V2 M U2 M16F W1 V1 U2 W2 6 U1 4 5 6 V2 2 3 4 W1 V1 U2 W2 W2 V1 U1 X14Y K16S 1 2 21 96 95 K16F 20 U1 15 22.3 19 6 5 6 V2 2 4 3 4 W1 X14Y K14S 1 2 9 96 95 K14F 8 22.2 7 6 5 6 14 4 3 4 13 2 1 2 4 2 1 I 5 3 K11M F14B 3 5 1 96 95 11 15.2 / L1C1 15.2 / L2C1 15.2 / L3C1 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.2.10 Compressor & fan Part 1 – System Outline 16.1 / SN A11P X2A 1 3 5 13 21 K11M K1R A11P 30.4 K1A 211 SL A11P 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.0 20.1 20.1 42.1 .5 X13A:3 X13A:1 14 11 K2R 101 1 3 5 13 21 K12M 204 203 212 16.2 / 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.2 20.2 20.2 42.2 .6 X14A:1 X14A:2 102 102 Y1R X10Y X10Y Only for EWYQ 101 K5R 105 102 4 3 X17A:1 X17A:2 101 K11M X10Y E11HC X10Y 106 SL A11P X2A 8 6 22 21 K12M 7 22 21 X10Y E12HC X10Y 107 Part 1 – System Outline 16.1 / 9 X12Y Q11C X12Y 2 N L1 6 X13Y Q12C X13Y 6 N L1 1 101 R1 K3A K3R A11P 203 102 SN A11P X2A R2 15.7 A2 A1 X15A:4 X15A:7 SL / A11P SL A11P X2A / / 22.0 22.0 22.0 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.2.11 Circuit 1: control compressors 1 3 4 5 1–107 213 SN A11P X2A A11P K7R 101 2 4 6 K13F 20.5 K13S 1 20.5 3 20.5 5 20.5 A2 A1 X19A:3 X19A:1 111 96 95 110 K1*S / A11P 2 4 6 K15F K8R 30.3 20.6 K15S 203 203 1 20.6 3 20.6 5 20.6 A2 A1 X19A:7 X19A:5 96 116 95 115 K2*S / A11P 2 4 6 K14F K9R 30.3 20.9 K16S 20.8 K14S 1 20.7 3 20.7 5 20.8 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 96 121 95 96 95 120 K3*S / A11P 2 4 6 K16F 30.3 1 20.8 3 20.8 5 20.9 A2 A1 OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/ OPTC/OPHP 4 21.9 / SL A11P 21.9 / 102 122 121 SL A11P X2A 111 220 116 221 K4R A11P X27Y F16B X27Y 12 1–108 222 1 3 5 13 X27Y K1P X27Y 2 4 6 14 101 1 A2 A1 3 13 15.3 15.3 15.4 40.1 X16A:1 X16A:3 12 4 14 11 2 203 3 13 222 101 203 102 SN A11P X2A / SL / A11P / 43.3 43.2 11 21.9 / Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.2.12 Circuit 1: control fans 5 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.2.13 Control circuit (DI 230V) 1 A11P 16.1 / SL A11P F1U 230 X4A:1 X10Y 10 S1PH P> 239 DI X10Y 11 X12Y 3 14/M2 X4A:3 231 3 X5A:2 Q11C 11/M1 4 X12Y 4 232 DI X5A:1 233 X6A:3 X13Y 3 14/M2 Q12C 11/M1 4 X13Y 5 234 DI X6A:1 235 X7A:1 DI 111 K1*SA11P/ 22.1 116 K2*SA11P/ 22.2 121 K3*SA11P/ 22.4 X7A:2 X8A:1 DI X8A:3 X9A:1 DI X9A:3 X10A:3 A1 K1A DI X10A:1 A2 X11:1 16.1 / Part 1 – System Outline SN A11P 236 X11A:2 11 14 21.1 1–109 X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A71P X15Y 3 V1C 4 Y11E M 3 2 4 X88A:2 3 5 X89A:1 3 * X89A:2 248 X18Y X29A:3 DI 249 X29A:4 315 316 X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A72P X15Y 3 4 M only for EWYQ 080-100 Y12E 7 6 5 8 X88A:2 5 S1L 5 X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X16Y X15Y 3 4 Y13E *= M 12 BLU X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 A01P shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) 11 10 9 5 X89A:2 6 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 WHT X30A:2 * 319 DI BLU X30A:1 BLU X51A:2 36 471 BLU X51A:1 313 470 RED 472 WHT 481 314 473 BLK GRN 480 RED 482 WHT 483 BLK GRN 244 485 RED 486 WHT 487 245 488 BLK GRN X2B:3 WHT X2B:1 X2B:3 BLK X2B:1 X1M:+ A4P X19Y 1 X52A:1 301 301 X1M:- 2 RS485 X1M:24V 3 X52A:3 RS485 X52A:2 302 302 1–110 303 5 303 4 X1M:GND 4 X52A:4 304 3 304 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.2.14 Control circuit and EEV Part 1 – System Outline B1PH X15Y 13 X42A:1 -t∞ A11P R2T -t∞ 2 14 X42A:3 AI X42A:2 1 X34A:2 AI X34A:1 402 R1T 8 400 7 401 X16Y X33A:3 15 B1PL 16 17 18 X43A:4 15.1 / 11 T1A 32 12 / T1A 15.1 T1A 0-5A/0-20mA 31 12 11 OP57 X44A:3 AI -t∞ R26T AI X44A:4 27 X38A:2 411 26 X39A:1 412 X44A:2 AI Only for EWYQ 25 X44A:1 -t∞ X15Y R16T 30 X38A:1 -t∞ 29 X37A:2 AI X37A:1 R17T 20 X43A:3 407 X36A:2 AI AI X43A:2 19 X15Y X43A:1 -t∞ X42A:4 R14T X15Y -t∞ 4 R3T 3 X36A:1 X35A:2 AI X35A:1 404 452 AI 450 WHT 405 RED 403 451 BLK 406 453 WHT 408 455 X33A:1 501 454 BLK 409 RED 410 503 502 16.3 / 28 11 T1V 32 X45A:4 12 / T1V 16.3 T1V 0-500V/0-20mA 31 12 X45A:3 -t∞ R25T 23 24 415 22 X41A:2 X40A:2 AI X41A:1 416 AI AI X45A:2 21 11 X45A:1 -t∞ R15T X15Y X40A:1 X39A:2 413 60 504 414 513 61 417 514 -t∞ Only for EWYQ R28T 32 -t∞ 31 R18T X15Y 33 34 X67A:2 AI X67A:1 X66A:2 X66A:1 418 AI 419 A01P 420 Part 1 – System Outline 421 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.2.15 Circuit 1: sensors 1 3 4 5 1–111 7 44 14 13 44 X27Y 8 45 X27Y 14 13 7 44 OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 22.7 K1P OPSP/OPSC/OPHP OPTP/OPTC X27Y 8 43.3 K2P 45 MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP OBLIGATORY 22.7 K1P X27Y 14 13 7 7 S1S 46 47 X32A:3 Example: remote start/stop 14 13 46 X32A:4 47 X31A:3 45 Changeable DI1 S2S 49 X32A:1 Example: remote cool/heat 14 13 48 X32A:2 Changeable DI2 48 X31A:1 DI 49 1–112 S3S A01P 14 13 50 X65A:1 51 X65A:2 Changeable DI3 50 5 51 4 S4S 14 13 52 X65A:3 53 X65A:4 Changeable DI4 52 3 53 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.2.16 Field wiring DI, changeable DI Part 1 – System Outline 8 8 74 75 -t∞ R8T Ch. AI1 example: temp. sensor Example mA measurement (External power supply) - - Example mA measurement (5V power supply by PCB) + 0 to 20mA + 0 to 20mA + Ch. AI3 example: V measurement - 0 to 10VDC 77 78 70 76 IN X69A:2 71 5V X69A:1 73 GND X69A:3 72 75 5V X68A:1 73 74 IN X68A:2 74 73 GND X68A:3 75 72 5V X71A:1 76 71 IN X71A:2 77 70 GND X71A:3 78 S5S 14 13 79 Ch. AI4 example: Switch 80 IN X70A:2 5V X70A:1 Changeable AI4 79 Changeable AI3 80 Changeable AI2 81 + 91 - 0 to 20mA or 10V Example mA output V output 90 X73A:2 X73A:1 GND X70A:3 Changeable AO1 81 Changeable AI1 90 Part 1 – System Outline 91 A01P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.2.17 Field wiring changeable AI/AO 1 3 4 5 1–113 3 H11P 14 13 4 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 3 K11M 4 Operation M11C K12M H12P 6 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 5 14 13 Operation M12C 5 7 7 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 8 X22A:1 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact open No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NO Default X22A:5 X22A:3 K12R A11P Changeable DO1 (Default: Alarm, NO contact 8-9) 9 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 7 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact closed No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NC Software selection necessary 8 9 Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC 9 1–114 6 5 8 4 K14R A11P H2P 11 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 10 X24A:1 X24A:2 Changeable DO2 (Default: Gen. operation) 10 3 11 11 AC15: max.3A-230V Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.2.18 Field wiring DO, changeable DO Part 1 – System Outline 4 3 K1P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 12 X16A:3 13 13 NOT FOR MODELS WITH OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP K1S X27Y K4R 12 2 14 11 6 22.9 SL A11P X27Y F17B X27Y 14 1 5 15 22.9 1 3 5 13 2 4 6 14 SN A11P X2A X27Y K2P X27Y X25A:3 X25A:1 Changeable DO3 (Default: 2nd pump) MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP 10 K15R A11P 14 X16A:1 15.5 15.5 15.5 40.2 15 X27Y 6 5 H3P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 14 Changeable DO3 (no predefined function) MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP 10 15 K21R A01P 16 A11P Changeable DO3 H4P 17 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 16 X64A:3 X64:1 Changeable DO4 17 K22R A01P 18 DO pump 21 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 20 X63A:3 X63A:1 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 19 K20R A01P Changeable DO6 H6P 19 H5P 18 X64A:7 X64A:5 Changeable DO5 20 Part 1 – System Outline 21 Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 1 3 4 5 1–115 Wiring Layout 11 3.3 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) Standard Unit Introduction This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB interconnection, I/O overview, switchbox outlook and wiring of the EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) standard units. Overview This chapter contains the following topics: 3 4 5 1–116 Page description Page 3.3.1 Notes 1–117 3.3.2 Legend 1–119 3.3.3 PCB interconnection diagram 1–124 3.3.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses 1–125 3.3.5 PCB changeable I/O overview 1–130 3.3.6 Unit outlook 1–131 3.3.7 Switchbox outlook (typical) 1–132 3.3.8 Main power supply 1–133 3.3.9 Trafo & PCB power supply 1–134 3.3.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan 1–135 3.3.11 Circuit 1: control compressors 1–136 3.3.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1–137 3.3.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan 1–138 3.3.14 Circuit 2: control compressors 1–139 3.3.15 Circuit 2: control fans 1–140 3.3.16 Control circuit (DI 230V) 1–141 3.3.17 Control circuit and EEV 1–142 3.3.18 Circuit 1: sensors 1–143 3.3.19 Circuit 2: sensors 1–144 3.3.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI 1–145 3.3.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO 1–146 3.3.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO 1–147 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.3.1 Wiring Layout Notes 1 L1, L2, L3 : Main terminals 1-99 : Field wiring terminals 100-199 : Factory upwiring terminals 200- : Internal wiring terminals U-Z : Main terminals in compressor switchbox : Earth wiring 3 : Wire number 15 : Terminals number 15 4 : Field supply : Option 5 : Not mounted in switchbox : Wiring depending on model : PCB : Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2 ! : Pin against miswiring : Several wiring possibilities N-model : unit with no options included Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode. Part 1 – System Outline 1–117 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Factory installed: ❏ OP10 = Heater tape ❏ OP57 = A-meter, V-meter ❏ OPLN = Low noise (OPIF+ Compressorhousing) 3 User installed: 4 ❏ OPTP = Twinpump ❏ OPSC = Single pump contactor ❏ OPTC = Twin pump contactor ❏ OPIF = Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C) ❏ OPHP = Hi ESP pump ❏ OPSP = Single pump ❏ OPBT = Buffer tank ❏ EKACPG = Address card including: -RS485 (Integrated modbus) -F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection) ❏ EKRUPG DI: Digital input DO: Digital output AI: Analog input AO: Analog output Ch: Changeable (function can be selected by the customer) Remote used interface Definitions: 5 1–118 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.3.2 Wiring Layout Legend 1 Not included with standard unit Not possible as option Possible as option Obligatory # ## Not obligatory * ** Part number Description A01P PCB Extension A02P ** A4P A5P PCB Communication (EKACPG) PCB wired remote controller ** A11P, A21P A13P, A23P PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2 ** frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) PCB EEV driver A72P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ) A73P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250) B1PH, B2PH high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 B1PL, B2PL low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 DS1 (A*P) PCB dipswitch E1HS ** switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250) E3H ** heatertape (OP10) E4H ** heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP) E5H * fieldheater E6H ** buffer tank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT) E7H ** switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100) E11HC, E12HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 1 E21HC, E22HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 2 # F1U (A*P) F4, F5 main fuses # fuses for heaters autofuse for primary of TR1 ** autofuse for switchbox heater F9B autofuse for secondary of TR2 F11B, F12B autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C,) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100) Part 1 – System Outline 5 fuse PCB F6B F8B 4 PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG) A71P F1-F3 3 1–119 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description F14B, F24B autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 F15B, F25B ** autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) F16B ** autofuse for pump (K1P) (Only for OPSP/ OPHP/ OPSC/ OPTP/OPTC) F17B ** autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC) F21B, F22B 3 4 autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C) H1-6P * indication lamp for changeable digital outputs H11P, H12P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C) H21P, H22P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M21C, M22C) HAP-HEP (A*P) light emitting diode PCB K1A, K2A auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2 K1P ## pump contactor (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTC) K1S * overcurrent relay pump K1R-K22R (A*P) K2P 5 PCB relay ** pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC) K3A auxiliary relay for heater tape K11M, K12M compressor contactor for circuit 1 K13F, K14F fan contactor for circuit 1 K13S, K14S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 K15F fan contactor for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K15S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K16F fan contactor for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K16S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K21M, K22M compressor contactor for circuit 2 K23F, K24F fan contactor for circuit 2 K23S, K24S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 K25F fan contactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) 1–120 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description K25S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 1 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) K26F fan contactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ/240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) K26S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ/240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1P ** pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) M2P ** pump motor 2 (only for /OPTC) M11C, M12C compressor motors circuit 1 M13F, M14F fan motors circuit 1 M15F fan motors circuit 1 3 4 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) M16F fan motors circuit 1 5 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) M21C, M22C compressor motors circuit 2 M23F, M24F fan motors circuit 2 M25F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-100/230-250) M26F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1F Q1T Q11C, Q12C switchbox fanmotor ** thermostat (OP10) For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 1 For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 1 Q21C, Q22C For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 2 For EWAQ150/ 180-210/240-260: For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 2 Part 1 – System Outline 1–121 Wiring Layout 11 Part number Description R1T ambient temperature sensor R2T inlet water temperature sensor R3T outlet water temperature sensor R8T 3 4 5 ESIE06-05 * temperature sensor for changeable analog input R14T suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R15T, R25T discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 R16T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ) R17T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 R18T, R38T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) R28T, R48T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250) R26T coil temperature sensor circuit 1(only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250) R34T suction temperature sensor circuit 2 R35T, R45T discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 R36T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ) R37T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R46T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ) S1A-S3A (A*P) PCB dipswitch S1L flowswitch S1M main isolator switch S1PH, S2PH high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2 S1S-S5S * switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...) S1T ** thermal contact (OPIF) S2M # heatertape isolator switch T1A ** current transducer (OP57) T1V ** voltage transducer (OP57) TR1 TR1A transfo control circuit (400V/230V) ** V1C V1F, V2F current measurement transfo (OP57) Ferrite core ** noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) (Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210) (Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210) V2C 1–122 ** Ferrite core (EKACPG) X*A (A*P) PCB terminal X*Y connector X1M (A*P) PCB terminal strip Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description Y1R, Y2R reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y11E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 Y12E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ) Y13E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250) Y21E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 Y22E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y23E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ 230-250) 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–123 1–124 2 V2C MODBUS DICN EKACPG ON OFF A4P TERM S3A A02P X52A OFF HDP ON For S3A setting see installation manual EKACPG S1A ADDRESS=1 H1P H2P HAP HBP ON X53A X1M F1 HCP F2 + RS485 - OFF OFF X1M HEP TERM S2A ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=ON ON HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB A01P HAP X51A ACS 3 V1C A11P 1 A73P X88A ACS A72P X88A ACS A71P X88A ACS DS1 OFF X1M * DS1 X89A X89A * HAP *= X89A A4P only for EWYQ 230-250 only for EWYQ shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) * OFF ADDRESS=3 ON HAP OFF ADDRESS=2 ON HAP OFF ADDRESS=1 ON ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=OFF ON HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB 5 1 EKRUPG ON 4 + RS485 DC 24V GND OFF OFF ON X53A S1A ADDRESS=2 H1P H2P HAP HBP TERM S2A X52A ADDRESS=SUB TERM=ON ON OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB 3 + RS485 DC 24V GND X1M A5P = DIPSWITCH A21P 3.3.3 + RS485 DC 24V GND 11 Std Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 PCB interconnection diagram Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.3.4 Wiring Layout PCB I/O overview & fuses 1 Main PCB (A11P) Part 1 – System Outline X12A (1-3-5) DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1 X4A DI: High pressure switch c1 X5A DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1 X6A DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2 X7A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1 X8A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1 X9A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1 X27A not used X29A (3-4) not used X30A DI: Flow switch X31A DI: Pump interlock X32A (3-4) Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined X32A (1-2) Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined X13A DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1 X14A DO: Compressor contactor 2 c1 X15A DO: Heatertape X16A DO: Pump contactor X17A DO: Reverse valve c1 (Only for EWYQ) X19A (1-3) DO: Fanstep 1 c1 X19A (5-7) DO: Fanstep 2 c1 X20A DO: Fanstep 3 c1 X22A Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def) X24A Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def) X25A Ch DO3: function not pre-defined X33A AI: Ambient sensor X34A AI: Inlet water sensor X35A AI: Outlet water sensor X36A AI: Suction temperature sensor c1 X37A AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1 X38A AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ) X39A AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ) X40A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1 3 4 5 1–125 Wiring Layout 11 3 ESIE06-05 X41A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1 X42A AI: High pressure sensor c1 X43A AI: Low pressure sensor c1 X44A AI: Current measurement (OP57) X45A AI: Voltage measurement (OP57) HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) H1P, H2P LED (service monitor red) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) Extension PCB (A01P) 4 5 X63A Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined X64A (1-3) Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined X64A (5-7) Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined X65A (1-2) Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined X65A (3-4) Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined X66A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1 (Only for EWYQ) X67A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1 (Only for EWYQ) X68A Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined X69A Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined X70A Ch AI4: Function not pre-defined X71A Ch AI3: Function not pre-defined X72A (3-4) not used X73A Ch AO1: Function not pre-defined X74A (4-5) not used HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P) 1–126 HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 1 Communication PCB (A02P) HCP, HDP, HEP LED (service monitor green) S3A dipswitch (terminal resistor) EEV PCB (A71P) X86A Y11E Electronic expansion valve X87A Y21E Electronic expansion valve HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) 3 EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ) X86A Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) X87A Y22E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) 4 5 Main PCB (A21P) Part 1 – System Outline X12A (1-3-5) DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c2 X4A DI: High pressure switch c2 X5A DI: Compressor interclock 1 c2 X6A DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2 X7A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c2 X8A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c2 X9A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c2 X27A not used X13A DO: Compressor contactor 1 c2 X14A DO:Compressor contactor 2 c2 X17A DO: Reverse valve c2 (Only for EWYQ) X19A (1-3) DO: Fanstep 1 c2 X19A (5-7) DO: Fanstep 2 c2 X20A DO: Fanstep 3 c2 X34A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c2 (Only for EWYQ) X35A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c2 (Only for EWYQ) 1–127 Wiring Layout 11 3 ESIE06-05 X36A AI: Suction temperature sensor c2 X37A AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c2 X38A AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c2 (only for EWYQ) X39A AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c2 (only for EWYQ) X40A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c2 X41A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c2 X42A AI: High pressure sensor c2 X43A AI: Low pressure sensor c2 HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) H1P, H2P LED (service monitor red) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 4 EEV PCB (A73P) (Only EWYQ230-250) 5 X86A Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250) X87A Y23E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250) HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) EWAQ130 EWAQ150 EWAQ180 EWAQ210 EWAQ240 EWAQ260 EWYQ130 EWYQ150 EWYQ180 EWYQ210 EWYQ230 EWYQ250 200gL/gG 200gL/ gG 250gL/gG 250gL/gG 300gL/gG 355gL/gG 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V F1U T 5A/250V T 5A/250V T 5A/250V T 5A/250V T 5A/250V T 5A/250V F4, F5 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V - - - - - - C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V FUSES F1-F3 Circuit breakers F8B (OPIF) F9B Circuit breaker and motor protector settings F6B 1–128 2,30A 2,30A 2,30A 2,30A 2,30A 2,30A F11B, F22B 36A 40A 52A 52A 66A 66A F12B, F21B 36A 40A 52A 52A 66A 66A Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout F16B 6,8A 6,8A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A (OPSP/ OPSC/ OPTP/OPTC) 12A 12A 16,3A 16,3A 16,3A 16,3A 6,8A 6,8A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A F14B, F24B 3,5A 5,1A 7,6A 7,6A 7,0A 6,4A F15B, F25B (OPIF) 5,6A 7,9A 7,9A 7,9A 9,5A 9,5A K13S-K16S 1,6A 2,3A 2,3A 2,3A 1,6A 1,6A 1 F16B (OPHP) F17B (OPTP/ OPTC) K23S-K26S 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–129 Wiring Layout 11 3.3.5 ESIE06-05 PCB changeable I/O overview Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O. Changeable digital input (4 available) 3 Changeable analog output (1 available) -None -None -Status -Unit capacity (mA,V) -Dual setpoint -Details of types: -Remote on-off Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA -Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / o-10V -Low noise (only for OPIF) -Free cooling signal -Fan forced on 4 Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available depending on unit) 5 Changeable analog input (4 available) -None (open) -None -Closed -Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI) -2nd pump -Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*) -100% capacity -Water temperature measurement (NTC*) -Full capacity -Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI) -Free cooling - Details of types: -General operation Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA -Safety + warning NO (internal 5V or external power supply) -Safety + warning NC (only for ch DO1) Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V -Safety NO (excluding warning) Type DI: DI (5V detection) -Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for ch DO1) -C1, C2 Safety NO -Warning NO - C1, C2 operation - Cooling (only EWYQ) - Heating (only EWYQ) - Defrost (only EWYQ) 1–130 *: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local dealer. Part 1 – System Outline Part 1 – System Outline M23F M24F M25F M15F M24F M23F EWYQ 180-210 M22C M12C EWYQ 130-150 M21C M11C M12C M22C M11C M21C M16F M26F M15F M25F EWYQ 230-250 EWAQ 240-260 M14F M13F TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB) M13F M14F EWAQ 180-210 M22C SWITCHBOX EWAQ 130-150 M21C M12C M24F M23F M11C M14F SWITCHBOX 3.3.6 M13F TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS) ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Unit outlook 1 1–131 3 4 5 SWITCHBOX Wiring Layout 11 3.3.7 ESIE06-05 Switchbox outlook (typical) 3 4 5 1–132 Part 1 – System Outline Part 1 – System Outline S1M 3 4 L2 L3 5 6 Power supply 3ò50Hz 400V L1 F1 F2 F3 1 2 502 32.4 PE 12 / T1A 32.4 300A/5A 11 / T1A OP57 TR1A 501 16.0 16.0 L1C2./ 23.0 L2C2./ 23.0 L3C2./ 23.0 L2C1./ L3C1./ F16B 1 2 3 I I M1P X17Y M V U 3ò 6 1 4 3 2 1 3 I 3ò 4 I U M 3 V 4 1 2 4 I 3 2 1 2 1 M1P 22.7 K1P K1P X26Y X26Y X26Y OPSP/OPHP OPTP 1 2 3 F16B X26Y X26Y X26Y OPSC OPTC PE W 7 6 5 6 5 I 12 14 11 PE W 6 5 6 5 11 14 F17B F17B M2P X17Y K2P I M2P 43.3 K2P I M 3ò I 3ò M I X17Y U 4 2 1 2 1 U 2 1 2 1 9 V 3 4 3 4 3 V 4 3 4 3 I I PE W 10 6 5 6 5 PE W 6 5 6 5 11 9 14 11 14 2 2 S2M max. 1kW E5H 4 3 2 1 2 F5 12 OPSP/OPTP /OPHP E4H Q1T OPBT E6H OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 12 MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP E3H PE 24 X10Y 2 0 23 OP10 X10Y 1 R2 R1 0 Power supply 1ò50Hz 230V F4 21.9 K3A 1 3.3.8 2 L1C1/ 20.0 L2C1/ 20.0 L3C1/ 20.0 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Main power supply 1 1–133 3 4 5 I 32 33 230 VAC 21.0 230 VAC 21.0 X2A:2 65 64 60 61 21.0 SL A11P 1 SN / A11P SL A11P / F1U X18Y F9B 62 X1A:1 SL A11P X2A I 34 5 6 SN A11P X2A X2A:1 5A F1U X1A:3 31 4 400 VAC I 5 101 X3A A11P TR1 1 2 3 102 I 1 63 F6B 30.0 30.0 E1 OP57 12 / T1V X77A:3 1–134 3 1 2 X11Y X11Y 32.6 151 X2A:1 X2A:2 X1A:1 24.0 SL A21P X2A 230 VAC 24.0 5A F1U X1A:3 SN A21P X2A X3A A21P 11 / T1V X11Y 32.6 A71P X77A:1 5 152 24.0 SL A21P 2 SN / A21P SL A21P / F1U X18Y 4 203 30.5 30.5 E1 X77A:3 only for EWYQ 3 253 3 1 2 X11Y X11Y X11Y A72P X77A:3 X77A:1 A73P only for EWYQ 230-250 E1 3.3.9 X77A:1 11 15.2 / L2C1. 15.2 / L3C1. Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Trafo & PCB power supply Part 1 – System Outline Part 1 – System Outline F11B I Q11C M11C K11M 15.2 / L1C1 15.2 / L2C1 15.2 / L3C1 U M 3~ V PE W 6 5 4 3 1 2 6 I 5 4 I 3 2 1 14 11 F12B Q12C M12C K12M I U I 4 3 4 3 V M 3~ 2 1 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 R1P X12A X12A X12A :1 :3 :5 L1 L2 L3 A11P I K13F M13F X14Y K13S F14B M X14Y 3ò I U2 V1 W2 U1 4 3 4 4 2 I 3 1 2 1 2 2 1 4 PE X14Y M 3ò U2 V1 14 4 3 4 EWYQ 180-210/230-250 Only for EWAQ 180-210/240-260 M15F 13 2 W2 X14Y K15S 1 2 U1 96 95 K15F V2 22.1 W1 36 6 5 6 6 5 16 PE M14F 7 2 5 6 9 W1 V2 3 4 8 V1 U2 22.3 10 PE 6 4 X14Y M 3ò W2 X14Y K14S 1 2 U1 96 95 K14F V2 22.2 W1 15 6 5 6 96 95 EWYQ 230-250 U2 V1 20 4 3 4 X14Y M 3ò W2 U1 19 2 1 2 Only for EWAQ 240-260 M16F X14Y K16S K16F 22.3 22 PE V2 W1 21 6 5 6 96 95 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan 1 3 1–135 4 5 30.3 30.3 16.1 / K1R A11P 30.4 K1A SN A11P X2A 1 3 5 13 21 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.0 20.1 20.1 42.0 .5 X13A:3 X13A:1 14 11 K2R 101 1 3 5 13 21 K12M 204 203 102 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.2 20.2 20.2 42.1 .6 X14A:1 X14A:2 102 102 101 Only for EWYQ K5R X10Y Y1R X10Y 4 3 X17A:1 X17A:2 101 K11M X10Y E11HC X10Y 8 6 PE 22 21 K12M 7 PE X10Y E12HC X10Y 22 21 9 2 N L1 6 X13Y X13Y Q12C Only for EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250 X12Y Q11C X12Y 3 K11M SL A11P 16.2 / 211 SL A11P X2A 212 1–136 105 5 106 4 107 6 N L1 1 101 R1 K3A K3R A11P 203 102 X15A:4 SN A11P X2A R2 15.7 A2 A1 / 22.0 22.0 SL / A11P X15A:7 / 22.0 SL A11P X2A 11 16.1 / Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.3.11 Circuit 1: control compressors Part 1 – System Outline 213 SL A11P SN A11P X2A 21.9 / 21.9 / K7R 101 2 4 6 K13F 20.5 K13S 111 220 1 20.5 3 20.5 5 20.5 A2 A1 X19A:3 X19A:1 111 96 95 110 K15F K8R 30.3 2 4 6 EWYQ 180-210/230-250 Only for EWAQ 180-210/240-260 K1*S / A11P EWYQ 180-210/230-250 Only for EWAQ 180-210/240-260 20.6 K15S 203 203 102 116 221 A11P SL A11P X2A 1 20.6 3 20.6 5 20.6 A2 A1 X19A:7 X19A:5 96 116 95 115 K2*S / A11P 2 4 6 K14F K9R 30.3 20.9 K16S 20.8 K14S 1 20.7 3 20.7 5 20.8 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 96 121 95 96 95 120 Only for EWAQ 240-260 K16F 30.3 2 4 6 EWYQ 230-250 Only for EWAQ 240-260 K3*S / A11P EWYQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 230-250 Shortcut for EWAQ 130-150/180-210 222 122 121 222 1 20.8 3 20.8 5 20.9 A2 A1 OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/ OPTC/OPHP K4R A11P X27Y F16B X27Y 12 1 3 5 13 X27Y K1P X27Y 13 Part 1 – System Outline 21.9 / 2 4 6 14 101 1 A2 A1 3 13 15.3 15.3 15.4 40.1 X16A:1 X16A:3 12 4 14 11 2 203 101 203 102 SN A11P X2A / SL / A11P / 43.3 43.2 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1 3 4 5 1–137 1–138 Q21C M21C U M 3~ V 4 3 1 I PE W 6 5 6 14 11 F22B Q22C M22C K22M I U I 4 3 4 3 V M 3~ 2 1 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 R2P X12A X12A X12A :1 :3 :5 L1 L2 L3 A21P I K23F M23F X24Y K23S F24B X24Y 3ò M I U2 V1 W2 U1 4 3 4 4 2 I 3 1 2 1 2 2 1 25.1 36 PE V2 W1 3 6 5 6 6 5 96 95 U2 V1 14 4 3 4 M24F X24Y K24S U2 V1 8 4 3 4 X24Y 3ò M W2 U1 7 2 1 2 10 PE V2 W1 9 6 5 6 96 95 M26F X24Y K26S K26F U2 V1 20 4 3 4 X24Y 3ò M W2 U1 19 2 1 2 EWYQ 230-250 96 95 K24F Only for EWAQ 240-260 16 PE V2 W1 15 6 5 6 25.2 EWYQ 180-210/230-250 X24Y 3ò M W2 U1 13 2 1 2 25.3 Only for EWAQ 180-210/240-260 M25F X24Y K25S K25F 4 2 4 I 2 5 3 K21M I 3 5 F21B 1 30.8 30.8 25.3 22 PE V2 W1 21 6 5 6 96 95 11 15.2 / L1C2. 15.2 / L2C2. 15.2 / L3C2. Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.3.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan Part 1 – System Outline 16.4 / SN A21P X2A 1 3 5 13 21 K21M K1R A21P 30.8 K2A 261 SL A21P 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 23.0 23.1 23.1 42.2 .5 X13A:3 X13A:1 14 11 K2R 151 1 3 5 13 21 K22M 254 253 262 16.5 / 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 23.2 23.2 23.2 42.3 .6 X14A:1 X14A:2 152 152 K5R 151 X10Y Only for EWYQ Y2R X10Y 155 152 16 15 X17A:1 X17A:2 151 K21M X10Y E21HC X10Y 156 SL A21P X2A 19 PE 17 22 21 K22M PE 18 22 21 X10Y E22HC X10Y 157 Part 1 – System Outline 16.4 / 20 2 N L1 1 X23Y X23Y Q22C Only for EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250 X22Y Q21C X22Y 2 N L1 1 151 253 152 / 25.0 25.0 SL / A21P SN A21P X2A / 25.0 SL A21P X2A ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.14 Circuit 2: control compressors 1 3 4 5 1–139 24.9 / 151 2 4 6 K7R K23F 23.5 K23S A21P SN A21P X2A SL A21P 24.9 / 1 23.5 3 23.5 5 23.5 A2 A1 X19A:3 X19A:1 161 96 95 160 K8R K25F 30.8 2 4 6 EWYQ 180-210/230-250 Only for EWAQ 180-210/240-260 K1*S / A21P EWYQ 180-210/230-250 Only for EWAQ 180-210/240-260 23.6 K25S 253 253 152 166 SL A21P X2A 161 270 1 23.6 3 23.6 5 23.6 A2 A1 X19A:7 X19A:5 96 166 95 165 K2*S / A21P 2 4 6 K9R K24F 30.8 23.9 K26S 23.8 K24S 172 171 1–140 271 1 23.7 3 23.7 5 23.8 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 96 171 95 96 95 170 K26F 30.8 2 4 6 EWYQ 230-250 Only for EWAQ 240-260 K3*S / A21P EWYQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 230-250 Shortcut for EWAQ 130-150/180-210 Only for EWAQ 240-260 1 23.8 3 23.8 5 23.9 A2 A1 5 272 151 253 152 3 272 / / / 11 24.9 / Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.3.15 Circuit 2: control fans 4 Part 1 – System Outline SL A11P F1U SN A11P 16.1 / 16.1 / DI DI DI DI DI DI DI CIRCUIT 1 X11A:2 X11:1 X10A:1 X10A:3 X9A:3 X9A:1 X8A:3 X8A:1 X7A:2 X7A:1 X6A:1 X6A:3 X5A:1 X5A:2 X4A:3 X4A:1 236 121 116 111 235 234 233 232 231 239 230 X12Y 4 X13Y K3*S / A11P K2*S / A11P 11 K1A 22.4 22.2 22.1 3 X13Y 20.2 F12B 4 5 14 21.1 A2 A1 5' 14 For EWAQ 130 EWYQ 130 11 3 11 14 11 10 X12Y K1*S / A11P 5' 5 20.1 F11B X10Y S1PH P> X10Y 11/M1 4 3 14/M2 X13Y Q12C X13Y 11/M1 4 3 14/M2 For EWAQ 150/ 180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/ 180-210/230-250 X12Y Q11C X12Y 237 238 Part 1 – System Outline 16.5 / 16.5 / A21P SN A21P SL A21P F1U DI DI DI DI DI DI DI CIRCUIT 2 X11A:2 X11:1 X10A:1 X10A:3 X9A:3 X9A:1 X8A:3 X8A:1 X7A:2 X7A:1 X6A:1 X6A:3 X5A:1 X5A:2 X4A:3 X4A:1 286 171 166 161 285 284 283 282 281 289 280 6' 6 X22Y 25.2 25.4 K2*S / A21P K3*S / A21P 11 K2A 25.1 6 X23Y K1*S / A21P 3 X23Y 23.2 F22B 4 6 X22Y Q21C X22Y 11/M1 4 6 14/M2 X23Y X23Y Q22C 14 24.1 A2 A1 6' 11/M1 6 3 14/M2 For EWAQ 150/ 180-210/240-260 14 For EWAQ 130 EWYQ 150/ EWYQ 130 180-210/230-250 11 6 11 14 22 21 X22Y 23.1 F21B X10Y S2PH P> X10Y 287 288 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.16 Control circuit (DI 230V) 1 3 4 5 1–141 X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A71P X15Y 3 V1C 4 Y11E M 3 2 36 4 X88A:2 3 5 3 X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X18Y X25Y 3 * DI 4 Y21E M 3 36 1 4 5 X89A:2 315 316 S1L X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A72P X16Y 5 X30A:1 X15Y 3 DI 4 only for EWYQ Y12E M 7 6 5 8 X88A:2 6 X30A:2 5 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X25Y 3 * 4 Y22E M 7 6 5 8 5 X89A:2 317 318 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 A01P BLU X29A:3 BLU X29A:4 BLU X51A:2 X86A:1 2 X15Y 3 only for EWYQ 230-250 M 11 10 12 5 X2B:3 4 9 Y13E X2B:3 X88A:2 X2B:1 X88A:1 A73P X2B:1 BLK X51A:1 313 470 RED 471 WHT 472 248 476 314 473 BLK GRN 475 RED 477 WHT 481 249 478 BLK GRN 485 244 480 RED 486 245 WHT 482 WHT RED 483 BLK GRN BLU WHT 487 GRN 488 BLK 490 RED 491 WHT 492 GRN WHT 493 BLK X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X25Y 3 * 319 X1M:+ A4P 1 X52A:1 X19Y 495 4 *= M 12 3 RS485 X1M:24V shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) 11 10 5 X89A:2 X1M:- 2 X52A:3 RS485 X52A:2 9 Y23E RED 496 302 302 301 301 497 GRN WHT 498 BLK 303 303 1–142 X1M:GND 4 X52A:4 304 5 304 4 X53A:2 RS485 X53A:1 A21P X53A:2 RS485 X53A:1 311 3 312 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.3.17 Control circuit and EEV Part 1 – System Outline B1PH X15Y 13 X42A:1 -t∞ A11P R2T -t∞ 2 14 X42A:3 AI X42A:2 1 X34A:2 AI X34A:1 402 R1T 8 400 7 401 X16Y X33A:3 AI 15 B1PL 16 17 X43A:3 18 X43A:4 15.1 / X44A:1 11 T1A 32 12 / T1A 15.1 27 AI X44A:4 16.3 / 28 11 T1V 32 X45A:4 12 / T1V 16.3 T1V 0-500V/0-20mA 31 12 X45A:3 -t∞ R25T 23 24 415 22 X41A:2 X40A:2 AI X41A:1 416 AI AI X45A:2 21 11 X45A:1 -t∞ R15T X15Y X40A:1 X39A:2 Only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ R26T X44A:3 AI 26 X39A:1 X38A:2 411 X44A:2 AI 412 T1A 0-5A/0-20mA 31 12 11 OP57 25 Only for EWYQ -t∞ X15Y R16T 30 X38A:1 -t∞ 29 X37A:2 AI X37A:1 R17T 20 X36A:2 AI AI X43A:2 19 X15Y X43A:1 -t∞ X42A:4 R14T X15Y -t∞ 4 R3T 3 X36A:1 X35A:2 AI X35A:1 404 452 X33A:1 450 WHT 405 RED 403 451 BLK 406 453 WHT 408 455 407 454 BLK 409 RED 410 501 504 413 60 503 502 414 513 61 417 514 33 Only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ Only for EWYQ R28T 32 -t∞ 31 R18T X15Y 34 X67A:2 AI X67A:1 X66A:2 X66A:1 418 AI 419 A01P 420 Part 1 – System Outline 421 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.18 Circuit 1: sensors 1 3 4 5 1–143 13 X42A:1 X25Y B2PH A21P Only for EWYQ -t∞ R38T 31 424 X25Y 14 X42A:3 15 X42A:4 Only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ 33 AI B2PL AI 16 17 18 X43A:4 20 X36A:2 X43A:3 AI 19 X43A:2 X25Y X43A:1 -t∞ R34T X25Y 425 34 X36A:1 X35A:2 427 X35A:1 R48T AI X42A:2 32 422 X25Y X34A:2 AI 423 X34A:1 457 BLK 456 WHT 458 RED 426 459 WHT 460 BLK -t∞ -t∞ Only for EWYQ R36T R37T 25 26 27 only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ R46T X25Y 28 -t∞ R35T X25Y 21 22 -t∞ R45T X25Y 23 24 428 X25Y 429 30 430 29 431 X25Y X41A:2 AI X41A:1 X40A:2 X38A:2 AI X40A:1 X39A:2 X39A:1 432 X38A:1 AI 433 X37A:2 AI 434 X37A:1 AI 435 1–144 436 5 461 4 RED 3 437 11 A21P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.3.19 Circuit 2: sensors Part 1 – System Outline 7 X27Y 14 8 45 X27Y 14 13 7 44 OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 22.7 K1P OPSP/OPSC/OPHP OPTP/OPTC X27Y 8 43.3 K2P 45 MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP OBLIGATORY 22.7 13 44 13 7 S1S 14 7 44 K1P X27Y X31A:3 45 Example: remote start/stop 14 13 47 X32A:4 46 46 X32A:3 47 X31A:1 S2S Example: remote cool/heat 14 13 49 X32A:2 48 48 X32A:1 49 Changeable DI2 S3S 14 13 50 X65A:1 51 S4S 14 13 52 53 X65A:4 X65A:3 Changeable DI4 X65A:2 Changeable DI3 50 Changeable DI1 51 DI A01P 52 Part 1 – System Outline 53 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI 1 3 4 5 1–145 8 -t∞ R8T Ch. AI1 example: temp. sensor 8 73 74 75 0 to 20mA - 0 to 20mA - Example mA measurement (External power supply) + 75 + 74 Example mA measurement (5V power supply by PCB) 73 + Ch. AI3 example: V measurement - 0 to 10VDC 78 S5S 14 13 79 Ch. AI4 example: Switch 80 81 + 91 - 0 to 20mA or 10V Example mA output V output 90 5V X69A:1 70 77 IN X69A:2 71 76 GND X69A:3 72 72 5V X68A:1 73 71 IN X68A:2 74 70 X73A:2 X73A:1 GND X70A:3 IN X70A:2 5V X70A:1 GND X71A:3 IN X71A:2 5V X71A:1 GND X68A:3 75 Changeable AO1 76 Changeable AI4 77 Changeable AI3 78 Changeable AI2 79 1–146 80 5 81 4 90 Changeable AI1 3 91 11 A01P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.3.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO Part 1 – System Outline 5 6 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 4 14 13 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 4 H12P 3 K12M 6 H11P 3 14 5 13 K21M H21P 22 14 13 K22M 23 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 22 K11M 23 25 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) H22P 24 14 13 Operation M22C 24 Operation M21C 25 Operation M12C 7 7 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 8 X22A:1 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact open No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NO Default X22A:5 X22A:3 K12R A11P Changeable DO1 (Default: Alarm, NO contact 8-9) 8 Operation M11C 9 9 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 7 8 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact closed No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NC Software selection necessary 9 Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC K14R A11P H2P 11 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 10 X24A:1 X24A:2 Changeable DO2 (Default: Gen. operation) 10 Part 1 – System Outline 11 AC15: max.3A-230V ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.3.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO 1 3 4 5 1–147 4 3 K1P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 12 X16A:3 13 13 NOT FOR MODELS WITH OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP K1S X27Y K4R 12 X16A:1 2 14 11 6 22.9 SL A11P X27Y F17B X27Y 14 1 5 15 22.9 1 3 5 13 2 4 6 14 SN A11P X2A X27Y K2P X27Y X25A:3 X25A:1 Changeable DO3 (Default: 2nd pump) MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP 10 K15R A11P 14 A11P 15.5 15.5 15.5 40.2 15 X27Y 6 5 H3P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 14 Changeable DO3 (no predefined function) MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP 10 Changeable DO3 15 K21R A01P 16 DO pump H4P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 16 X64A:3 X64:1 Changeable DO4 17 1–148 17 K22R A01P 18 5 H5P 19 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 18 X64A:7 X64A:5 Changeable DO5 19 3 K20R A01P 20 H6P 21 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 20 X63A:3 X63A:1 Changeable DO6 11 21 4 Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.4 Wiring Layout Wiring layout: EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF Introduction This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB intercommunication, I/O overview, switchbox layout and wiring of the EWAQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080-100DAYN(N-P-B) with option inverter fans (OPIF). Overview This chapter contains the following topics: Part 1 – System Outline Page description Page 3.4.1 Notes 1–150 3.4.2 Legend 1–152 3.4.3 PCB interconnection diagram 1–157 3.4.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses 1–158 3.4.5 PCB changeable I/O overview 1–162 3.4.6 Unit outlook 1–163 3.4.7 Switchbox outlook (typical) 1–164 3.4.8 Main power supply 1–165 3.4.9 Trafo & PCB power supply 1–166 3.4.10 Compressor & fan 1–167 3.4.11 Circuit 1: control compressors 1–168 3.4.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1–169 3.4.13 Control circuit (DI 230V) 1–170 3.4.14 Control circuit and EEV 1–171 3.4.15 Circuit 1: sensors 1–172 3.4.16 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI 1–173 3.4.17 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO 1–174 3.4.18 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO 1–175 1 3 4 5 1–149 Wiring Layout 11 3.4.1 ESIE06-05 Notes L1, L2, L3 : Main terminals 1-99 : Fieldwiring terminals 100-199 : Factory upwiring terminals 200- : Internal wiring terminals U-Z : Main terminals in compressor switchbox : Earth wiring 3 : Wire number 15 : Terminals number 15 4 : Field supply : Option 5 : Not mounted in switchbox : Wiring depending on model : PCB : Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2 ! : Pin against miswiring : Several wiring possibilities N-model : unit with no options included Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode. 1–150 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Factory installed: ❏ OP10 = Heater tape ❏ OP57 = A-meter, V-meter ❏ OPLN = Low noise 1 (OPIF+ Compressorhousing) User installed: ❏ OPTP = Twinpump ❏ OPSC = Single pump contactor ❏ OPTC = Twin pump contactor ❏ OPIF = Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C) ❏ OPHP = Hi ESP pump ❏ OPSP = Single pump ❏ OPBT = Buffertank ❏ EKACPG = Address card including: 3 4 -RS485 (Integrated modbus) -F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection) ❏ EKRUPG DI: Digital input DO: Digital output AI: Analog input AO: Analog output Ch: Changeable (function can be selected by the customer) Remote used interface Definitions: Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–151 Wiring Layout 11 3.4.2 ESIE06-05 Legend Not included with standard unit 3 Not possible as option Possible as option Obligatory # ## Not obligatory * ** Part number Description A01P PCB Extension A02P ** A4P 4 A5P 5 PCB wired remote controller ** A11P, A21P A13P, A23P PCB Communication (EKACPG) PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG) PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2 ** frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) A71P PCB EEV driver A72P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ) A73P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250) B1PH, B2PH high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 B1PL, B2PL low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 DS1 (A*P) PCB dipswitch E1HS ** switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250) E3H ** heatertape (OP10) E4H ** heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP) E5H * fieldheater E6H ** buffertank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT) E7H ** switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100) E11HC, E12HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 1 E21HC, E22HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 2 F1-F3 # F1U (A*P) F4, F5 fuse PCB # F6B F8B main fuses fuses for heaters autofuse for primary of TR1 ** autofuse for switchbox heater (OPIF) F9B autofuse for secondary of TR1 F11B, F12B autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100) 1–152 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description F14B, F24B autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 F15B, F25B ** autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) F16B ** autofuse for pump (K1P) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) F17B ** autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC) F21B, F22B autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C) H1-6P * indication lamp for changeable digital outputs H11P, H12P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C) H21P, H22P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M21C, M22C) HAP-HEP (A*P) light emitting diode PCB K1A, K2A auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2 K1P ## pump contactor (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) K1S * overcurrent relay pump K1R-K22R (A*P) K2P 1 3 4 PCB relay ** pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC) K3A auxiliary relay for heater tape K11M, K12M compressor contactor for circuit 1 K13F, K14F fancontactor for circuit 1 K13S, K14S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 K15F fancontactor for circuit 1 5 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K15S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K16F fancontactor for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K16S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K21M, K22M compressor contactor for circuit 2 K23F, K24F fancontactor for circuit 2 K23S, K24S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 K25F fancontactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) Part 1 – System Outline 1–153 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description K25S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) K26F fancontactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) K26S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) 3 4 (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1P ** pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) M2P ** pump motor 2 (only for OPTP/OPTC) M11C, M12C compressor motors circuit 1 M13F, M14F fan motors circuit 1 M15F fan motors circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) M16F fan motors circuit 1 5 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) M21C, M22C compressor motors circuit 2 M23F, M24F fan motors circuit 2 M25F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-100/230-250) M26F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1F Q1T Q11C, Q12C switchbox fanmotor ** thermostat (OP10) For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 1 For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 1 Q21C, Q22C For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 2 For EWAQ150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 2 1–154 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description R1T ambient temperature sensor R2T inlet water temperature sensor R3T outlet water temperature sensor R8T * temperature sensor for changeable analog input R14T suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R15T, R25T discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 R16T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ) R17T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 R18T, R38T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) R28T, R48T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 R26T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250) R34T suction temperature sensor circuit 2 R35T, R45T discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 R36T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ) R37T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R46T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250) S1A-S3A (A*P) PCB dipswitch S1L flowswitch S1M main isolator switch S1PH, S2PH high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2 S1S-S5S * switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...) S1T ** thermal contact (OPIF) S2M # heatertape isolator switch T1A ** current transducer (OP57) T1V ** voltage transducer (OP57) TR1 TR1A 3 4 5 transfo control circuit (400V/230V) ** V1C V1F, V2F 1 current measurement transfo (OP57) Ferrite core ** noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) (Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210) (Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210) V2C ** Ferrite core (EKACPG) X*A (A*P) PCB terminal X*Y connector X1M (A*P) PCB terminal strip Part 1 – System Outline 1–155 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description Y1R, Y2R reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y11E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 Y12E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ) Y13E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250) Y21E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 Y22E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y23E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ 230-250) 3 4 5 1–156 Part 1 – System Outline ON ON OFF ON OFF HDP ON For S3A setting see installation manual S1A ADDRESS=1 H1P H2P HAP HBP A4P A02P X52A TERM S3A X1M F1 HCP F2 + RS485 - OFF X1M HEP TERM S2A OFF HBP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB HAP ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=ON 2 V2C MODBUS DICN EKACPG 1 + RS485 DC 24V GND Part 1 – System Outline A01P HAP X51A ACS 3 V1C A11P 1 A72P X88A ACS ON DS1 * DS1 X89A HAP *= X89A X1M A4P only for EWYQ 080-100 shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) * OFF ADDRESS=2 ON HAP OFF ADDRESS=1 ON OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=OFF A71P X88A ACS EKRUPG + RS485 DC 24V GND ADDRESS=SUB TERM=ON ON OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB = DIPSWITCH X1M A5P 3.4.3 + RS485 DC 24V GND Std ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout PCB interconnection diagram 1 3 4 5 1–157 Wiring Layout 11 3.4.4 ESIE06-05 PCB I/O overview & fuses Main PCB (A11P) 3 4 5 1–158 X12A (1-3-5) DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1 X4A DI: High pressure switch c1 X5A DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1 X6A DI: Compressor interlock 2 c1 X7A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1 X8A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1 X9A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1 X27A DI: Fan inv safety c1 (only for OPIF) X29A (3-4) not used X30A DI: Flow switch X31A DI: Pump interlock X32A (3-4) Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined X32A (1-2) Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined X13A DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1 X14A DO:Compressor contactor 2 c1 X15A DO: Heatertape X16A DO: Pump contactor X17A DO: Reverse valve c1 (Only for EWYQ) X19A (1-3) DO: Fanstep 1 c1 X19A (5-7) DO: Fanstep 2 c1 X20A DO: Fanstep 3 c1 X22A Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def) X24A Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def) X25A Ch DO3: function not pre-defined X33A AI: Ambient sensor X34A AI: Inlet water sensor X35A AI: Outlet water sensor X36A AI: Suction temperature sensor c1 X37A AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1 X38A AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ) X39A AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ) X40A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout X41A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1 X42A AI: High pressure sensor c1 X43A AI: Low pressure sensor c1 X44A AI: Current measurement (OP57) X45A AI: Voltage measurement (OP57) HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) H1P, H2P LED (service monitor red) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 1 3 Extension PCB (A01P) X63A Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined X64A (1-3) Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined X64A (5-7) Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined X65A (1-2) Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined X65A (3-4) Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined X66A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1 4 5 (Only for EWYQ) X67A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1 (Only for EWYQ) X68A Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined X69A Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined X70A Ch AI 4: Function not pre-defined X71A Ch AI3: Function not pre-defined X72A (3-4) AO: Fanspeed signal c1 (only for OPIF) X73A Ch AO1: Function not pre-defined X74A (4-5) not used HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P) Part 1 – System Outline HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 1–159 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 11 Communication PCB (A02P) HCP, HDP, HEP LED (service monitor green) S3A dipswitch (terminal resistor) EEV PCB (A71P) 3 X86A Y11E Electronic expansion valve X87A not used HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ) 4 X86A Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) X87A Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) 5 EWAQ80 EWAQ100 EWYQ80 EWYQ100 125gL/gG 160gL/ gG 500V 500V F1U T 5A/250V T 5A/250V F4, F5 10gL/250V 10gL/250V F8B (OPIF) C 2A/250V C 2A/250V F9B C 4A/250V C 4A/250V F6B 2,3A 2,3A F11B - - F12B - - F16B 4,8A 4,8A 12,0A 12,0A FUSES F1-F3 Circuit breakers Circuit breaker and motor protector settings (OPSP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) F16B (OPHP) 1–160 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout F17B 4,8A 4,8A F14B 3,3A 3,3A F15B (OPIF) 7,7A 7,7A K13S-K16S 1,5A 1,5A 1 (OPTP/OPTC) 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–161 Wiring Layout 11 3.4.5 ESIE06-05 PCB changeable I/O overview Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O. Changeable digital input (4 available) 3 Changeable analog output (1 available) -None -None -Status -Unit capacity (mA, V) -Dual setpoint -Details of types: -Remote on-off Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA -Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V -Low noise (only for OPIF) -Free cooling signal -Fan forced on 4 5 Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available depending on unit) Changeable analog input (4 available) -None (open) -None -Closed -Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI) -2nd pump -Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*) -100% capacity -Water temperature measurement (NTC*) -Full capacity -Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI) -Free cooling -Details of types: -General operation Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA -Safety + warning NO (internal 5V or external power supply) -Safety + warning NC (only for ch DO1) Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V -Safety NO (excluding warning) Type DI: DI (5V detection) -Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for ch DO1) -C1, C2 Safety NO -Warning NO -C1, C2 operation -Cooling (only EWYQ) -Heating (only EWYQ) -Defrost (only EWYQ) 1–162 *: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local dealer. Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.4.6 Wiring Layout Unit outlook 1 TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS) M13F M14F 3 M15F M16F MxxF : Inverter controlled fan TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB) 5 SWITCHBOX M11C M12C EWAQ 80-100 EWYQ 80-100 Part 1 – System Outline 4 1–163 Wiring Layout 11 3.4.7 ESIE06-05 Switchbox outlook (typical) 3 4 5 1–164 Part 1 – System Outline Part 1 – System Outline S1M L2 F2 3 4 3ò50Hz 400V 5 6 502 L3 F3 Power supply L1 F1 1 2 T1A 11 T1A 12 TR1A 501 OP57 PE / 32.4 300A/5A / 32.4 L2C1. / 16.0 L3C1. / 16.0 1 2 3 F16B X26Y X26Y X26Y 1 2 3 M1P X17Y I M1P W V U PE 6 7 5 6 5 4 I V 6 3 4 3 M 3ò 4 2 M 3ò I U 2 12 14 11 PE W 6 I M2P X17Y K2P M2P X17Y I I 9 V U 4 3 4 3 V 3 M 3ò I M 3ò 4 2 1 2 1 U 4 3 2 1 K2P 43.3 5 3 I 1 I 3 4 F17B F17B 1 2 14 11 6 I 5 4 I 3 2 1 1 1 2 1 I K1P 22.7 K1P OPSP/OPHP F16B X26Y X26Y X26Y OPSC OPTP OPTC PE W 10 6 5 6 5 PE W 6 5 6 5 9 14 11 14 11 2 2 S2M 1 1ò50Hz 230V 3 4 1 2 12 OPSP/OPTP /OPHP E4H Q1T OPBT E6H OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 12 MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP E3H PE 24 X10Y 2 2 F5 max. 1kW E5H 0 23 X10Y 1 R2 R1 Power supply F4 K3A 21.9 0 OP10 3.4.8 2 L1C1 / 20.0 L2C1 / 20.0 L3C1 / 20.0 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Main power supply 1 3 4 5 1–165 I 32 33 230 VAC 230 VAC 21.0 X2A:2 21.0 SL A11P 1 A71P 2 30.0 1 3 32.6 E1 X77A:3 only for EWYQ 080-100 11 / T1V X11Y X11Y 32.6 X11Y E1 12 / T1V 65 30.0 OP57 64 60 61 SN / A11P SL A11P / F1U X18Y F9B 62 X1A:1 21.0 I 34 5 6 SL A11P X2A X2A:1 5A F1U X1A:3 31 4 400 VAC I 5 SN A11P X2A X3A A11P TR1 1 2 3 101 5 102 I 1 63 F6B X77A:3 1–166 X77A:1 4 203 X11Y X11Y X11Y A72P 2 1 3 3 X77A:1 S1T F8B E7H t∞ I 2 1 3 1 2 X11Y X11Y X11Y 3.4.9 66 11 15.2 / L2C1. 15.2 / L3C1. Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Trafo & PCB power supply Part 1 – System Outline F11B Q11C M11C K11M I U M 3~ V 4 3 1 2 4 I 3 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 F12B Q12C M12C K12M I U I 4 3 4 3 V M 3~ 2 1 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 R1P X12A X12A X12A :1 :3 :5 L1 L2 L3 A11P I K14F M14F X14Y K14S F14B 3 X14Y 3ò U2 M V1 W2 I U1 4 3 4 4 8 I 3 7 2 1 2 2 1 10 PE EWYQ 180-210 Only for EWAQ 180-210 M15F 13 2 U2 V1 14 4 3 4 X14Y 3ò M W2 X14Y K15S 1 2 U1 96 95 K15F V2 23.3 W1 9 6 5 6 6 5 16 PE V2 W1 15 6 5 6 96 95 X14Y 4 K13F EWAQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 130-150/180-210 23.2 Part 1 – System Outline 14 13 328 I K13F 8 5 V1F M13F K13S A13P 325 F15B 3ò U2 M V1 W2 I U1 3 4 V L2 4 L2 4 I 3 2 1 2 U L1 2 L1 1 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 W L3 6 L3 5 23.1 15.2 / L1C1 15.2 / L2C1 15.2 / L3C1 96 95 11 10 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.4.10 Compressor & fan 1 3 4 5 1–167 31.2 30.3 30.3 16.1 / K1R A11P 30.4 K1A SN A11P X2A 1 3 5 13 21 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.0 20.1 20.1 42.1 .5 X13A:3 X13A:1 14 11 K2R 101 1 3 5 13 21 K12M 204 203 102 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.2 20.2 20.2 42.2 .6 X14A:1 X14A:2 102 102 Y1R X10Y X10Y Only for EWYQ 101 K5R 4 3 X17A:1 X17A:2 101 K11M X10Y E11HC X10Y 8 6 22 21 K12M 7 X10Y E12HC X10Y 22 21 9 X12Y Q11C X12Y 2 N L1 6 X13Y Q12C X13Y 3 K11M SL A11P 16.2 / 211 SL A11P X2A 212 1–168 105 5 106 4 107 6 N L1 1 101 R1 K3A K3R A11P 203 102 SN A11P X2A R2 15.7 A2 A1 X15A:4 X15A:7 SL / A11P SL A11P X2A / / 22.0 22.0 22.0 11 16.1 / Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.4.11 Circuit 1: control compressors Part 1 – System Outline 213 21.9 / SN A11P X2A K7R 101 2 4 6 13 K13F 20.8 K15S 20.7 K13S A11P SL A11P 21.9 / 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 K1*S / A11P 20.7 20.7 20.7 20.6 X19A:3 X19A:1 96 111 95 96 95 110 2 4 6 13 K15F K8R 203 30.3 203 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 K9R 2 4 6 K14F 30.3 20.5 K16S 20.4 K14S K2*S / A11P 20.8 20.8 20.9 20.6 X19A:7 X19A:5 116 115 1 20.4 3 20.4 5 20.4 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 96 121 95 96 95 120 K3*S / A11P 2 4 6 K16F 30.3 A1 1 20.5 3 20.5 5 20.5 A2 A13P A01P (0V) 2 X72A:4 A0 X72A:3 (AIN+) 3 (AIN-) 4 323 102 324 SL A11P X2A 112 111 220 116 220 122 121 222 OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/ OPTC/OPHP K4R A11P X27Y F16B X27Y 12 1 3 5 13 X27Y K1P X27Y 13 Part 1 – System Outline 21.9 / 2 4 6 14 101 1 A2 A1 3 13 15.3 15.3 15.4 40.1 X16A:1 X16A:3 12 4 14 11 2 203 101 203 102 SN A11P X2A / SL / A11P / 43.3 43.2 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.4.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1 3 4 5 1–169 222 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 3.4.13 Control circuit (DI 230V) A11P 16.1 / SL A11P F1U 230 X4A:1 X10Y 10 S1PH P> 239 DI 3 X10Y 11 X12Y 3 14/M2 X4A:3 231 X5A:2 Q11C X12Y 4 11/M1 4 232 DI X5A:1 233 X6A:3 X13Y Q12C X13Y 5 3 14/M2 11/M1 4 234 DI X6A:1 235 X7A:1 111 DI X7A:2 K1*S / A11P 22.1 K2*S / A11P 22.2 K3*S / A11P 22.3 X8A:1 116 DI X8A:3 X9A:1 121 DI X9A:3 X10A:3 A1 K1A DI X10A:1 A2 X11:1 16.1 / 1–170 SN A11P 236 X11A:2 11 14 21.1 Part 1 – System Outline X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A71P X15Y 3 V1C 4 Y11E M 3 2 36 4 X88A:2 3 5 248 3 X89A:1 X18Y * DI 249 X89A:2 315 316 20.7 A13P A13P OPIF X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A72P ALARM 11 10 X27A:2 DI X27A:1 X15Y 3 4 M only for EWYQ 080-100 Y12E 7 6 5 8 X88A:2 5 S1L 5 X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X16Y X15Y 3 4 Y13E *= M 11 10 9 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 A01P shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) 12 5 X89A:2 6 X30A:2 * 319 DI BLU X30A:1 WHT X29A:3 BLU X29A:4 BLU X51A:2 BLU X51A:1 313 470 RED 471 WHT 472 314 473 BLK GRN 246 481 X2B:3 WHT X2B:1 X2B:3 BLK X2B:1 X1M:+ A4P X19Y 1 X52A:1 X1M:- 2 RS485 X1M:24V 3 X52A:3 RS485 X52A:2 302 302 301 301 247 480 RED 482 WHT 483 BLK GRN 303 303 244 485 RED 486 WHT 487 245 488 BLK GRN X1M:GND 4 X52A:4 304 Part 1 – System Outline 304 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.4.14 Control circuit and EEV 1 3 4 5 1–171 B1PH X15Y 13 X42A:1 -t∞ A11P R2T -t∞ 8 2 14 X42A:3 AI X42A:2 1 X34A:2 AI X34A:1 402 R1T 7 400 X16Y X33A:3 AI 401 X33A:1 450 WHT 15 B1PL 16 17 X43A:3 18 X43A:4 15.1 / 11 OP57 11 T1A 32 12 / T1A 15.1 T1A 0-5A/0-20mA 31 12 X44A:4 16.3 / 11 X45A:1 -t∞ X44A:3 AI R15T X15Y -t∞ 28 R26T 27 11 T1V 32 X45A:4 12 / T1V 16.3 T1V 0-500V/0-20mA 31 12 X45A:3 Only for EWYQ -t∞ X15Y R18T 24 -t∞ 23 R25T 22 31 32 -t∞ R28T 33 34 X67A:2 AI X67A:1 X66A:2 AI X66A:1 X41A:2 AI X41A:1 X40A:2 A01P 415 AI AI X45A:2 21 411 26 X40A:1 X39A:2 X39A:1 412 X38A:2 AI 413 X44A:2 AI Only for EWYQ 25 X44A:1 -t∞ X15Y R16T 30 -t∞ 29 X38A:1 X37A:2 AI X37A:1 R17T 20 X36A:2 AI AI X43A:2 19 X15Y X43A:1 -t∞ X42A:4 R14T X15Y -t∞ 4 R3T 3 X36A:1 X35A:2 AI X35A:1 404 452 403 451 BLK 405 RED 408 455 406 453 WHT 409 RED 407 454 BLK 410 501 503 502 504 416 514 414 60 513 61 417 1–172 418 5 419 4 420 3 421 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.4.15 Circuit 1: sensors Part 1 – System Outline 7 44 14 13 44 X27Y 8 45 X27Y 7 14 13 44 OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 22.7 K1P OPSP/OPSC/OPHP OPTP/OPTC X27Y 8 43.3 K2P 45 MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP OBLIGATORY 22.7 K1P X27Y 45 X31A:3 14 13 7 7 S1S Example: remote start/stop 14 13 47 46 46 X32A:3 47 X32A:4 S2S Example: remote cool/heat 14 13 49 X32A:2 48 48 X32A:1 49 Changeable DI2 S3S 14 13 50 X65A:1 51 S4S 14 13 52 53 X65A:4 X65A:3 Changeable DI4 X65A:2 Changeable DI3 51 Changeable DI1 50 X31A:1 DI A01P 52 Part 1 – System Outline 53 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.4.16 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI 1 3 4 5 1–173 8 8 73 74 -t∞ R8T Ch. AI1 example: temp. sensor 75 - - Example mA measurement (External power supply) 0 to 20mA 0 to 20mA Example mA measurement (5V power supply by PCB) + + 75 + - 0 to 10VDC 77 Ch. AI3 example: V measurement 76 78 S5S 14 13 79 Ch. AI4 example: Switch 80 81 + 91 - 0 to 20mA or 10V Example mA output V output 90 5V X69A:1 70 74 IN X69A:2 71 73 GND X69A:3 72 72 5V X68A:1 73 71 IN X68A:2 74 70 X73A:2 X73A:1 GND X70A:3 IN X70A:2 5V X70A:1 GND X71A:3 IN X71A:2 5V X71A:1 GND X68A:3 75 Changeable AO1 76 Changeable AI4 77 Changeable AI3 78 Changeable AI2 79 1–174 80 5 81 4 90 Changeable AI1 3 91 11 A01P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.4.17 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO Part 1 – System Outline 6 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 5 14 13 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 4 K12M H12P 3 14 4 H11P 3 13 5 K11M 6 Operation M12C 7 7 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 8 X22A:1 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact open No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NO Default X22A:5 X22A:3 K12R A11P Changeable DO1 (Default: Alarm, NO contact 8-9) 8 Operation M11C 9 9 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 7 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact closed No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NC Software selection necessary 8 9 Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC K14R A11P H2P 11 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 10 X24A:1 X24A:2 Changeable DO2 (Default: Gen. operation) 10 Part 1 – System Outline 11 AC15: max.3A-230V ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.4.18 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO 1 3 1–175 4 5 4 3 K1P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 12 X16A:3 13 13 NOT FOR MODELS WITH OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP K1S X27Y K4R 12 X16A:1 2 14 11 6 22.9 SL A11P X27Y F17B X27Y 14 1 5 15 22.9 1 3 5 13 2 4 6 14 SN A11P X2A X27Y K2P X27Y X25A:3 X25A:1 Changeable DO3 (Default: 2nd pump) MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP 10 K15R A11P 14 A11P 15.5 15.5 15.5 40.2 15 X27Y 6 5 H3P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 14 Changeable DO3 (no predefined function) MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP 10 Changeable DO3 15 K21R A01P 16 DO pump H4P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 16 X64A:3 X64:1 Changeable DO4 17 1–176 17 K22R A01P 18 5 H5P 19 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 18 X64A:7 X64A:5 Changeable DO5 19 3 K20R A01P 20 H6P 21 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 20 X63A:3 X63A:1 Changeable DO6 11 21 4 Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.5 Wiring Layout Wiring Layout : EWAQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF Introduction This chapter gives a general overview of the PCB intercommunication, I/O overview, switchbox layout and wiring of the EWAQ130-250DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130-260DAYN(N-P-B) with option inverter fans (OPIF). Overview This chapter contains the following topics: Part 1 – System Outline Page description Page 3.5.1 Notes 1–178 3.5.2 Legend 1–180 3.5.3 PCB interconnection diagram 1–185 3.5.4 PCB I/O overview & fuses 1–186 3.5.5 PCB changeable I/O overview 1–191 3.5.6 Unit outlook 1–192 3.5.7 Switchbox outlook 1–193 3.5.8 Main power supply 1–194 3.5.9 Trafo & PCB power supply 1–195 3.5.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan 1–196 3.5.11 Circuit 1: control compressors 1–198 3.5.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1–199 3.5.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan 1–201 3.5.14 Circuit 2: control compressors 1–203 3.5.15 Circuit 2: control fans 1–204 3.5.16 Control circuit (DI 230V) 1–206 3.5.17 Control circuit and EEV 1–207 3.5.18 Circuit 1: sensors 1–208 3.5.19 Circuit 2: sensors 1–209 3.5.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI 1–210 3.5.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO 1–211 3.5.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO 1–212 1 3 4 5 1–177 Wiring Layout 11 3.5.1 ESIE06-05 Notes L1, L2, L3 : Main terminals 1-99 : Fieldwiring terminals 100-199 : Factory upwiring terminals 200- : Internal wiring terminals U-Z : Main terminals in compressor switchbox : Earth wiring 3 : Wire number 15 : Terminals number 15 4 : Field supply : Option 5 : Not mounted in switchbox : Wiring depending on model : PCB : Connection ** continues on page 12 column 2 ! : Pin against miswiring : Several wiring possibilities N-model : unit with no options included Y1R, Y2R reversing valves are activated in cooling mode. 1–178 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Factory installed: ❏ OP10 = Heater tape ❏ OP57 = A-meter, V-meter ❏ OPLN = Low noise 1 (OPIF+ Compressorhousing) User installed: ❏ OPTP = Twinpump ❏ OPSC = Single pump contactor ❏ OPTC = Twin pump contactor ❏ OPIF = Inverter fans for low ambient (-15°C) ❏ OPHP = Hi ESP pump ❏ OPSP = Single pump ❏ OPBT = Buffertank ❏ EKACPG = Address card including: 3 4 -RS485 (Integrated modbus) -F1, F2 (DICN + DBACS Connection) ❏ EKRUPG DI: Digital input DO: Digital output AI: Analog input AO: Analog output Ch: Changeable (function can be selected by the customer) Remote used interface Definitions: Part 1 – System Outline 5 1–179 Wiring Layout 11 3.5.2 ESIE06-05 Legend Not included with standard unit 3 Not possible as option Possible as option Obligatory # ## Not obligatory * ** Part number Description A01P PCB Extension A02P ** A4P 4 A5P 5 PCB wired remote controller ** A11P, A21P A13P, A23P PCB Communication (EKACPG) PCB wired remote controller (EKRUPG) PCB main controller circuit 1, circuit 2 ** frequency inverter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) A71P PCB EEV driver A72P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ) A73P PCB EEV driver (only for EWYQ230-250) B1PH, B2PH high pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 B1PL, B2PL low pressure sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 DS1 (A*P) PCB dipswitch E1HS ** switchbox heater with fan (OPIF) (only for EWAQ130-260 / EWYQ130-250) E3H ** heatertape (OP10) E4H ** heatertape (OP10) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPTP) E5H * fieldheater E6H ** buffertank heater (OP10) (only for OPBT) E7H ** switchbox heater (OPIF) (only for EWA/YQ80-100) E11HC, E12HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 1 E21HC, E22HC crankcase heater compressor circuit 2 F1-F3 # F1U (A*P) F4, F5 fuse PCB # F6B F8B main fuses fuses for heaters autofuse for primary of TR1 ** autofuse for switchbox heater (OPIF) F9B autofuse for secondary of TR1 F11B, F12B autofuse for compressors (M11C, M12C,) (Not for EWA/YQ80-100) 1–180 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description F14B, F24B autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 F15B, F25B ** autofuse for fan motors circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) F16B ** autofuse for pump (K1P) (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) F17B ** autofuse for pump (K2P) (only for OPTP/OPTC) F21B, F22B autofuse for compressors (M21C, M22C) H1-6P * indication lamp for changeable digital outputs H11P, H12P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 1 (M11C, M12C) H21P, H22P * indication lamp for operation compressor circuit 2 (M21C, M22C) HAP-HEP (A*P) light emitting diode PCB K1A, K2A auxiliary relay for compressor safety circuit 1, circuit 2 K1P ## pump contactor (only for OPSP/ OPHP/OPSC/OPTC) K1S * overcurrent relay pump K1R-K22R (A*P) K2P 1 3 4 PCB relay ** pump contactor (only for OPTP/ OPTC) K3A auxiliary relay for heater tape K11M, K12M compressor contactor for circuit 1 K13F, K14F fancontactor for circuit 1 K13S, K14S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 K15F fancontactor for circuit 1 5 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K15S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) K16F fancontactor for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K16S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) K21M, K22M compressor contactor for circuit 2 K23F, K24F fancontactor for circuit 2 K23S, K24S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 K25F fancontactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) Part 1 – System Outline 1–181 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description K25S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) K26F fancontactor for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) K26S fan overcurrent relay for circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) 3 4 (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1P ** pump motor 1 (only for OPSP/OPHP/OPSC/OPTP/OPTC) M2P ** pump motor 2 (only for OPTP/OPTC) M11C, M12C compressor motors circuit 1 M13F, M14F fan motors circuit 1 M15F fan motors circuit 1 (Only for EWAQ80-100/180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/180-210/230-250) M16F fan motors circuit 1 5 (Only for EWAQ80-100/240-260) (Only for EWYQ80-100/230-250) M21C, M22C compressor motors circuit 2 M23F, M24F fan motors circuit 2 M25F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ180-210/240-260) (Only for EWYQ180-210/230-250) M26F fan motors circuit 2 (Only for EWAQ240-260) (Only for EWYQ230-250) M1F Q1T Q11C, Q12C switchbox fanmotor ** thermostat (OP10) For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 1 For EWAQ80-100/150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ80-100/150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 1 Q21C, Q22C For EWAQ130/EWYQ130: thermal protector compressor circuit 2 For EWAQ150/180-210/240-260: For EWYQ150/180-210/230-250: electronic protection module compressor circuit 2 1–182 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Part number Description R1T ambient temperature sensor R2T inlet water temperature sensor R3T outlet water temperature sensor R8T * 1 temperature sensor for changeable analog input R14T suction temperature sensor circuit 1 R15T, R25T discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 R16T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ) R17T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 R18T, R38T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) R28T, R48T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250) R26T coil temperature sensor circuit 1(only for EQWYQ80-100/230-250) R34T suction temperature sensor circuit 2 R35T, R45T discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 R36T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ) R37T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 R46T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250) S1A-S3A (A*P) PCB dipswitch S1L flowswitch S1M main isolator switch S1PH, S2PH high pressure switch circuit 1, circuit 2 S1S-S5S * switch for changeable digital input (remote on/off, C/H, ...) S1T ** thermal contact (OPIF) S2M # heatertape isolator switch T1A ** current transducer (OP57) T1V ** voltage transducer (OP57) TR1 TR1A 4 5 transfo control circuit (400V/230V) ** V1C V1F, V2F 3 current measurement transfo (OP57) Ferrite core ** noise filter circuit 1, circuit 2 (OPIF) (Only for EWAQ130-150/180-210) (Only for EWYQ130-150/180-210) V2C ** Ferrite core (EKACPG) X*A (A*P) PCB terminal X*Y connector X1M (A*P) PCB terminal strip Part 1 – System Outline 1–183 Wiring Layout 11 ESIE06-05 Part number Description Y1R, Y2R reverse valve circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y11E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 1 Y12E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ) Y13E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 1 (only EWYQ80-100/230-250) Y21E electronic expansion valve cooling circuit 2 Y22E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Y23E electronic expansion valve heating circuit 2 (only EWYQ 230-250) 3 4 5 1–184 Part 1 – System Outline ON ON OFF A4P A02P X52A TERM S3A OFF HDP ON For S3A setting see installation manual EKACPG S1A ADDRESS=1 H1P H2P HAP HBP ON X53A X1M F1 HCP F2 + RS485 - OFF X1M HEP TERM S2A OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=ON 2 V2C MODBUS DICN EKACPG 1 + RS485 DC 24V GND Part 1 – System Outline A01P HAP X51A ACS 3 V1C A11P 1 A73P X88A ACS A72P X88A ACS ON DS1 * DS1 X89A X89A * HAP *= X89A X1M A4P only for EWYQ 230-250 only for EWYQ shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) * OFF ADDRESS=3 ON HAP OFF ADDRESS=2 ON HAP OFF ADDRESS=1 ON OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=OFF A71P X88A ACS EKRUPG + RS485 DC 24V GND ON OFF OFF ON X53A S1A ADDRESS=2 H1P H2P HAP HBP TERM S2A X52A ADDRESS=SUB TERM=ON ON OFF HBP HAP TERM S2A S1A MAIN SUB X1M A5P = DIPSWITCH A21P 3.5.3 + RS485 DC 24V GND Std ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout PCB interconnection diagram 1 3 4 5 1–185 Wiring Layout 11 3.5.4 ESIE06-05 PCB I/O overview & fuses Main PCB (A11P) 3 4 5 1–186 X12A (1-3-5) DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c1 X4A DI: High pressure switch c1 X5A DI: Compressor interclock 1 c1 X6A DI: Compressor interlock 2 c1 X7A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c1 X8A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c1 X9A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c1 X27A DI: Fan inv safety c1 (only for OPIF) X29A (3-4) not used X30A DI: Flow switch X31A DI: Pump interlock X32A (3-4) Ch DI 1: function not pre-defined X32A (1-2) Ch DI 2: function not pre-defined X13A DO: Compressor contactor 1 c1 X14A DO: Compressor contactor 2 c1 X15A DO: Heatertape X16A DO: Pump contactor X17A DO: Reverse valve c1 (only for EWYQ) X19A (1-3) DO: Fanstep 1 c1 X19A (5-7) DO: Fanstep 2 c1 X20A DO: Fanstep 3 c1 X22A Ch DO1: “SAFETY + W. (NO)” (def) X24A Ch DO2: “GEN. OPERATION” (def) X25A Ch DO3: function not pre-defined X33A AI: Ambient sensor X34A AI: Inlet water sensor X35A AI: Outlet water sensor X36A AI: Suction temperature sensor c1 X37A AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c1 X38A AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c1 (only for EWYQ) X39A AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c1 (only for EWYQ) X40A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c1 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout X41A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c1 X42A AI: High pressure sensor c1 X43A AI: Low pressure sensor c1 X44A AI: Current measurement (OP57) X45A AI: Voltage measurement (OP57) HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) H1P, H2P LED (service monitor red) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 1 3 Extension PCB (A01P) X63A Ch DO6: Function not pre-defined X64A (1-3) Ch DO4: Function not pre-defined X64A (5-7) Ch DO5: Function not pre-defined X65A (1-2) Ch DI3: Function not pre-defined X65A (3-4) Ch DI4: Function not pre-defined X66A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c1 4 5 (Only for EWYQ) X67A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c1 (Only for EWYQ) X68A Ch AI2: Function not pre-defined X69A Ch AI1: Function not pre-defined X70A Ch AI 4: Function not pre-defined X71A ChAI3: Function not pre-defined X72A (3-4) AO: Fanspeed signal c1 (Only for OPIF) X73A ChAO1: Function not pre-defined X74A (4-5) AO: Fanspeed signal c2 (Only for OPIF) HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) Wired remote controller PCB (A4P, A5P) Part 1 – System Outline HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 1–187 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 11 Communication PCB (A02P) HCP, HDP, HEP LED (service monitor green) S3A dipswitch (terminal resistor) EEV PCB (A71P) 3 X86A Y11E Electronic expansion valve X87A Y21E Electronic expansion valve HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) EEV PCB (A72P) (Only EWYQ) 4 5 X86A Y12E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) X87A Y22E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ) HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) Main PCB (A21P) 1–188 X12A (1-3-5) DI: Reverse phase detection (L1-L2-L3) c2 X4A DI: High pressure switch c2 X5A DI: Compressor interclock 1 c2 X6A DI: Compressor interlock 2 c2 X7A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 1 c2 X8A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 2 c2 X9A DI: Fan overcurrent relay Fanstep 3 c2 X27A DI: Fan inv safety c2 (Only for OPIF) X13A DO: Compressor contactor 1 c2 X14A DO: Compressor contactor 2 c2 X17A DO: Reverse valve c2 (Only for EWYQ) X19A (1-3) DO: Fanstep 1 c2 X19A (5-7) DO: Fanstep 2 c2 X20A DO: Fanstep 3 c2 X34A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 1 c2 (Only for EWYQ) X35A AI: Heating suction temperature sensor 2 c2 (Only for EWYQ) Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout X36A AI: Suction temperature sensor c2 X37A AI: Refrigerant piping temperature sensor c2 X38A AI: Coil temperature sensor 1 c2 (only for EWYQ) X39A AI: Coil temperature sensor 2 c2 (only for EWYQ) X40A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 1 c2 X41A AI: Discharge temperature sensor 2 c2 X42A AI: High pressure sensor c2 X43A AI: Low pressure sensor c2 HAP, HBP LED (service monitor green) H1P, H2P LED (service monitor red) S1A dipswitch (address) S2A dipswitch (terminal resistor) 1 3 4 EEV PCB (A73P) (Only EWYQ230-250) X86A Y13E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250) X87A Y23E Electronic expansion valve (only EWYQ230-250) HAP LED (service monitor green) DS1 dipswitch (address) 5 EWAQ130 EWAQ150 EWAQ180 EWAQ210 EWAQ240 EWAQ260 EWYQ130 EWYQ150 EWYQ180 EWYQ210 EWYQ230 EWYQ250 200gL/gG 200gL/ gG 250gL/gG 250gL/gG 300gL/gG 355gL/gG 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V 500V F1U T 5A/250V T 5A/250V T5A/250V T5A/250V T5A/250V T5A/250V F4, F5 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V 10gL/250 V F8B (OPIF) C 2A/250V C 2A/250V C 2A/250V C 2A/250V C 2A/250V C 2A/250V F9B C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V C 4A/250V FUSES F1-F3 Circuit breakers Circuit breaker and motor protector settings Part 1 – System Outline F6B 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A 3A F11B, F22B 36A 40A 52A 52A 66A 66A F12B, F21B 36A 40A 52A 52A 66A 66A 1–189 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 F16B 11 6,8A 6,8A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A 12 A 12 A 16,3A 16,3A 16,3A 16,3A 6,8A 6,8A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A 8,6A F14B, F24B 1,8A 2,5A 5,1A 5,1A 3,5 A 3,5 A F15B, F25B (OPIF) 5,6A 7,9A 7,9A 7,9A 9,5A 9,5A K13S-K16S 1,6A 2,3A 2,3A 2,3A 1,6A 1,6A (OPSP/ OPSC/ OPTP/OPTC) F16B (OPHP) F17B (OPTP/ OPTC) 3 K23S-K26S 4 5 1–190 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.5.5 Wiring Layout PCB changeable I/O overview 1 Refer to the installation manual for instructions how to configure changeable I/O. Changeable digital input (4 available) Changeable analog output (1 available) -None -None -Status -Unit capacity (mA, V) -Dual setpoint -Details of types: -Remote on-off Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20 mA -Capacity limitation 25%, 50%, 75%, or setting Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V 3 -Low noise (only for OPIF) -Free cooling signal -Fan forced on Changeable digital output (6 or 5 available depending on unit) 4 Changeable analog input (4 available) -None (open) -None -Closed -Status (mA, V, NTC*, DI) -2nd pump -Floating setpoint (mA, V, NTC*) -100% capacity -Water temperature measurement (NTC*) -Full capacity -Changeable DI, refer to Ch DI for possibilities (DI) -Free cooling - Details of types: -General operation Type mA: 0..20mA / 4..20mA -Safety + warning NO (internal 5V or external power supply) -Safety + warning NC (only for Ch DO1) Type V: 0-1V / 0-5V / 0-10V -Safety NO (excluding warning) Type DI: DI (5V detection) 5 -Safety NC (excluding warning) (only for Ch DO1) -C1, C2 Safety NO -Warning NO -C1, C2 operation -Cooling (only EWYQ) -Heating (only EWYQ) -Defrost (only EWYQ) Part 1 – System Outline *: for allowed NTC types and how to configure the software please contact your local dealer. 1–191 1–192 EWYQ 180-210 M22C M12C EWYQ 130-150 M21C M11C M23F M24F M25F M15F M24F M23F M21C M11C M22C M12C MxxF M26F M16F : Inverter controlled fan M25F M15F EWYQ 230-250 EWAQ 240-260 M14F M13F TOP VIEW OF UNIT (COMP+ SB) M13F M14F EWAQ 180-210 M22C M12C SWITCHBOX EWAQ 130-150 M21C M11C M24F 5 M23F 4 M14F 3 M13F 3.5.6 SWITCHBOX SWITCHBOX 11 TOP VIEW OF UNIT (FANS) Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Unit outlook Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 3.5.7 Wiring Layout Switchbox outlook 1 3 4 5 Part 1 – System Outline 1–193 1–194 S1M 3 4 L2 L3 5 6 Power supply 3ò50Hz 400V L1 F1 F2 F3 1 2 502 32.4 PE 12 / T1A 32.4 300A/5A 11 / T1A OP57 TR1A 501 F16B 1 2 3 I I M1P X17Y M 3ò V U 4 6 1 2 3 1 3 I 3ò M 4 I U V 4 3 1 2 4 I 3 2 1 2 1 M1P 23.8 K1P K1P X26Y X26Y X26Y OPSP/OPHP OPTP 1 2 3 F16B X26Y X26Y X26Y OPSC OPTC W 6 5 6 12 14 11 PE PE W 7 6 5 6 5 I 5 14 11 F17B F17B M2P X17Y K2P I M2P 43.3 K2P I M 3ò I 3ò M I X17Y U 4 2 1 2 1 U 2 1 2 1 5 L1C2./ 25.0 L2C2./ 25.0 L3C2./ 25.0 16.0 16.0 9 V 3 4 3 4 3 V 4 3 4 3 I I PE W 10 6 5 6 5 PE W 6 5 6 5 9 14 11 14 11 2 2 4 L2C1./ L3C1./ S2M 1 2 1 R2 R1 max. 1kW E5H F5 3 4 2 X10Y 2 0 X10Y Power supply 1ò50Hz 230V F4 22.9 K3A 0 3 1 12 OPSP/OPTP /OPHP E4H Q1T OPBT E6H OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 12 MODELS WITHOUT OPSP/OPTP/OPHP E3H PE 24 23 OP10 3.5.8 2 11 L1C1/ 20.0 L2C1/ 20.0 L3C1/ 20.0 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 Main power supply Part 1 – System Outline I 230 VAC 32 33 230 VAC 22.0 X2A:2 65 64 60 61 22.0 SL A11P 1 SN / A11P SL A11P / F1U X18Y F9B 62 X1A:1 22.0 I 34 5 6 SL A11P X2A X2A:1 5A F1U X1A:3 31 4 400 VAC I SN A11P X2A X3A A11P TR1 1 2 101 I 30.0 30.0 E1 OP57 12 / T1V X77A:3 F6B 63 102 3 1 2 X11Y X11Y 32.6 151 X2A:1 X2A:2 X1A:1 27.0 SL A21P X2A 230 VAC 27.0 5A F1U X1A:3 SN A21P X2A X3A A21P 11 / T1V X11Y 32.6 A71P X77A:1 5 152 3 X18Y 27.0 SL A21P 2 SN / A21P SL A21P / F1U 253 1 203 30.5 30.5 X77A:3 only for EWYQ E1 3 1 2 X11Y X11Y X11Y A72P X77A:1 Part 1 – System Outline E1HS S1T F8B 66 t∞ M I 2 1 M1F 2 X11Y 1ò 1 X11Y M 3 X11Y only for EWYQ 230-250 E1 A73P 3.5.9 X77A:1 15.2 / L2C1. 15.2 / L3C1. ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout Trafo & PCB power supply 1 3 4 5 1–195 X77A:3 Q11C M11C K11M I U M 3~ V 4 3 1 2 4 I 2 3 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 F12B Q12C M12C K12M I U I 4 3 4 3 V M 3~ 2 1 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 R1P X12A X12A X12A :1 :3 :5 L1 L2 L3 A11P M14F X14Y K14S K14F X14Y 3ò U2 M V1 W2 I U1 4 3 4 4 8 I 7 2 1 2 2 3 23.3 10 PE V2 W1 9 6 5 6 6 5 96 95 EWYQ 180-210 U2 V1 14 4 3 4 X14Y 3ò M W2 U1 13 2 1 2 Only for EWAQ 180-210 M15F X14Y K15S K15F 16 PE V2 W1 15 6 5 6 23.2 1–196 F11B 1 I 1 5 F14B 3 4 96 95 X14Y 4 K13F EWAQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 130-150/180-210 14 13 328 I K13F 8 5 V1F M13F K13S A13P 325 F15B 3 I 3ò M W2 U1 2 1 2 U L1 2 L1 1 I U2 V1 4 3 4 V L2 4 L2 3 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 W L3 6 L3 5 23.1 30.3 30.3 96 95 11 10 11 15.2 / L1C1 15.2 / L2C1 15.2 / L3C1 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.10 Circuit 1: compressor & fan Part 1 – System Outline 31.2 F14B 3 M14F X14Y K14S K14F I V1 U2 U1 W2 X14Y 3ò M 8 4 I 7 2 3 4 2 1 4 I 3 2 1 24.3 10 PE V2 W1 9 6 5 6 6 5 96 95 M16F X14Y K16S K16F U2 V1 20 4 3 4 X14Y M 3ò W2 U1 19 2 1 2 24.3 22 PE V2 W1 21 6 5 6 K13F X14Y 96 95 K15F 326 Part 1 – System Outline 4 14 13 14 13 328 M13F U2 W2 M V1 U1 3ò 4 I 2 3 4 1 2 K13F V L2 4 U I 8 2 L1 I 3 5 K13S A13P 325 F15B 1 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 W L3 6 5 24.1 EWAQ 240-260 EWYQ 230-250 96 95 11 10 M15F K15S K15F U2 W2 M V1 U1 3ò 4 3 4 2 1 2 24.1 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 96 95 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 1 31.2 3 4 5 1–197 16.1 / K1R A11P 30.4 K1A SN A11P X2A 1 3 5 13 21 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.0 20.1 20.1 42.0 .5 X13A:3 X13A:1 14 11 K2R 101 1 3 5 13 21 K12M 204 203 102 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 20.2 20.2 20.2 42.1 .6 X14A:1 X14A:2 102 102 K5R 101 X10Y Only for EWYQ Y1R X10Y 4 3 X17A:1 X17A:2 101 K11M X10Y E11HC X10Y 8 6 PE 22 21 K12M 7 PE X10Y E12HC X10Y 22 21 9 2 N L1 6 X13Y X13Y Q12C Only for EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250 X12Y Q11C X12Y 3 K11M SL A11P 16.2 / 211 SL A11P X2A 212 1–198 105 5 106 4 107 6 N L1 1 101 R1 K3A K3R A11P 203 102 SN A11P X2A R2 15.7 A2 A1 X15A:4 X15A:7 SL / A11P SL A11P X2A / / 23.0 23.0 23.0 11 16.1 / Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.11 Circuit 1: control compressors Part 1 – System Outline 213 22.9 / 4 SN A11P X2A K7R 101 2 4 6 13 K13F 20.9 K13S A11P SL A11P 22.9 / 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 20.8 20.8 20.8 20.7 X19A:3 X19A:1 111 96 95 110 110 K15F K8R 24.2 2 4 6 EWYQ 180-210 Only for EWAQ 180-210 K1*S / A11P EWYQ 180-210 / Only for EWAQ 180-210 20.6 K15S 203 102 1 20.6 3 20.6 5 20.6 A2 A1 X19A:7 X19A:5 116 96 95 115 K2*S / A11P K14F 2 4 6 K9R 24.3 20.5 K14S 1 20.5 3 20.5 5 20.5 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 121 96 95 120 EWAQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 130-150/180-210 K3*S / A11P 24.4 A13P A01P (0V) 2 (AIN+) 3 (AIN-) 4 X72A:4 AO X72A:3 323 SL A11P X2A 324 112 111 220 116 221 121 222 OPSP/OPTP/OPSC/ OPTC/OPHP K4R A11P X27Y F16B X27Y 12 1 3 5 13 X27Y K1P X27Y 13 Part 1 – System Outline 22.9 / 2 4 6 14 101 1 A2 A1 3 13 15.3 15.3 15.4 40.1 X16A:1 X16A:3 12 4 14 11 2 203 101 203 102 SN A11P X2A SL / A11P / / 43.3 43.2 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.5.12 Circuit 1: control fans 1 3 4 5 1–199 4 101 A11P K7R 2 4 6 13 K13F 21.6 K15S 21.4 K13S 112 111 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 K1*S / A11P 21.3 21.4 21.4 21.3 X19A:3 X19A:1 96 111 95 96 95 110 116 K8R 2 4 6 13 K15F 23.1 203 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 2 4 6 K9R K14F 23.2 21.2 K16S 21.1 K14S K2*S / A11P 21.5 21.5 21.5 21.3 X19A:7 X19A:5 116 115 122 1–200 121 5 220 4 222 3 220 1 21.1 3 21.1 5 21.1 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 96 121 95 96 95 120 K3*S / A11P EWAQ 240-260 EWYQ 230-250 2 4 6 K16F 23.3 1 21.2 3 21.2 5 21.2 A2 A1 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 11 Part 1 – System Outline 222 F21B Q21C M21C K21M I U M 3~ V 4 3 1 2 4 I 3 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 F22B Q22C M22C K22M I U I 4 3 4 3 V M 3~ 2 1 2 1 I PE W 6 5 6 5 14 11 R2P X12A X12A X12A :1 :3 :5 L1 L2 L3 A21P I K24F M24F X24Y K24S F24B 5 X24Y 3ò U2 M V1 W2 I U1 4 3 4 4 8 I 3 7 2 1 2 2 1 28.3 10 PE V2 W1 9 6 5 6 6 5 96 95 EWYQ 180-210 Only for EWAQ 180-210 M25F X24Y K25S K25F U2 W2 X24Y 3ò V1 U1 M 14 4 3 4 13 2 1 2 16 PE V2 W1 15 6 5 6 96 95 X24Y 3 K23F EWAQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 130-150/180-210 28.2 Part 1 – System Outline 14 13 378 I K23F 8 5 V2F M23F K23S A23P 375 F25B U2 W2 3ò V1 U1 M 4 3 4 V I 2 1 2 U L2 L2 L1 L1 4 I 3 2 1 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 W L3 L3 6 5 28.1 15.2 / L1C2. 15.2 / L2C2. 15.2 / L3C2. 96 95 11 10 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.5.13 Circuit 2: compressor & fan 1 3 4 5 1–201 31.9 30.8 30.8 M24F X24Y K24S K24F I X24Y 3ò M U2 V1 U1 W2 8 4 7 2 29.4 10 PE V2 W1 9 6 5 6 3 4 2 1 6 I 5 4 I 3 2 1 96 95 M26F X24Y K26S K26F U2 V1 20 4 3 4 X24Y 3ò M W2 U1 19 2 1 2 22 PE V2 W1 21 6 5 6 29.4 1–202 F24B 5 K23F X24Y 96 95 K25F 3 14 13 14 13 378 I K23F 8 5 M23F K23S A23P 375 F25B 4 376 I 3ò M W2 U1 2 1 2 U L1 2 1 I U2 V1 4 3 4 V L2 4 3 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 W L3 6 5 96 95 11 10 3 29.1 5 EWAQ 240-260 EWYQ 230-250 M25F K25S K25F 3ò M W2 U1 2 1 2 U2 V1 4 3 4 29.1 PE V2 W1 6 5 6 96 95 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 11 Part 1 – System Outline 31.9 16.4 / SN A21P X2A 1 3 5 13 21 K21M K1R A21P 30.8 K2A 261 SL A21P 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 25.0 25.1 25.1 42.2 .5 X13A:3 X13A:1 14 11 K2R 151 1 3 5 13 21 K22M 254 253 262 16.5 / 2 4 6 14 22 A2 A1 25.2 25.2 25.2 42.3 .6 X14A:1 X14A:2 152 152 K5R 151 X10Y Only for EWYQ Y2R X10Y 155 152 16 15 X17A:1 X17A:2 151 K21M X10Y E21HC X10Y 156 SL A21P X2A 19 PE 17 22 21 K22M PE 18 22 21 X10Y E22HC X10Y 157 Part 1 – System Outline 16.4 / 20 2 N L1 1 X23Y X23Y Q22C Only for EWAQ 150/180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/180-210/230-250 X22Y Q21C X22Y 2 N L1 1 151 253 152 SN A21P X2A SL / A21P SL A21P X2A / / 28.0 28.0 28.0 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.5.14 Circuit 2: control compressors 1 3 4 5 1–203 27.9 / SN A21P X2A K7R 151 2 4 6 13 K23F 25.9 K23S A21P SL A21P 27.9 / 6 SL A21P X2A 162 161 270 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 25.8 25.8 25.8 25.7 X19A:3 X19A:1 161 96 95 160 K25F K8R 29.2 2 4 6 EWYQ 180-210 Only for EWAQ 180-210 K1*S / A21P EWYQ 180-210 Only for EWAQ 180-210 25.6 K25S 253 253 152 166 271 1 25.6 3 25.6 5 25.6 A2 A1 X19A:7 X19A:5 166 96 95 165 K2*S / A21P K24F 2 4 6 K9R 29.3 25.5 K24S 1 25.4 3 25.5 5 25.5 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 171 96 95 170 EWAQ 130-150/180-210 EWYQ 130-150/180-210 171 1–204 272 K3*S / A21P 29.4 (0V) 2 A23P A01P 4 (AIN+) 3 (AIN-) 4 X74A:5 AO X74A:4 373 151 253 152 3 374 / / / 11 27.9 / Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.15 Circuit 2: control fans 5 Part 1 – System Outline 6 151 A21P K7R 2 4 6 13 K23F 26.6 K25S 26.4 K23S 162 161 270 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 26.3 26.4 26.4 26.3 X19A:3 X19A:1 96 161 95 96 95 160 K1*S / A21P 253 K8R 2 4 6 13 K25F 28.1 166 270 1 3 5 14 A2 A1 26.5 26.5 26.6 26.3 X19A:7 X19A:5 166 165 K2*S / A21P K9R 2 4 6 K24F 28.2 26.2 K26S 26.1 K24S 172 272 Part 1 – System Outline 171 EWAQ 180-210 EWYQ 180-210 1 26.1 3 26.1 5 26.1 A2 A1 X20A:1 X20A:2 96 171 95 96 95 170 K3*S / A21P 2 4 6 K26F 28.3 1 26.2 3 26.2 5 26.2 A2 A1 ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 1 3 4 5 1–205 272 1–206 16.1 / SN A11P SL A11P F1U DI DI DI DI DI DI DI CIRCUIT 1 X11A:2 X11:1 X10A:1 X10A:3 X9A:3 X9A:1 X8A:3 X8A:1 X7A:2 X7A:1 X6A:1 X6A:3 X5A:1 X5A:2 X4A:3 X4A:1 236 121 116 111 235 234 233 232 231 239 230 X13Y K3*S / A11P K2*S / A11P 11 K1A 4 X13Y 11 3 20.2 F12B 4 X12Y 5 X12Y Q11C X12Y 237 11/M1 4 3 14/M2 14 22.1 A2 A1 5' X13Y Q12C X13Y 11/M1 4 3 14/M2 For EWAQ 150/ 180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/ 14 For EWAQ 130 180-210/230-250 EWYQ 130 3 11 14 11 10 X12Y K1*S / A11P 5' 5 20.1 F11B X10Y S1PH P> X10Y 16.5 / 16.5 / A21P 5 16.1 / SN A21P SL A21P F1U DI DI DI DI DI DI DI 4 238 CIRCUIT 2 X11A:2 X11:1 X10A:1 X10A:3 X9A:3 X9A:1 X8A:3 X8A:1 X7A:2 X7A:1 X6A:1 X6A:3 X5A:1 X5A:2 X4A:3 X4A:1 286 171 166 161 285 284 283 282 281 289 280 3 X23Y X23Y 25.2 F22B 4 X22Y K3*S / A21P K2*S / A21P 6 X22Y X22Y Q21C 11/M1 4 6 14/M2 11 K2A 6 3 11 X23Y Q22C X23Y 14 27.1 A2 A1 6' 11/M1 6 3 14/M2 For EWAQ 150/ 180-210/240-260 EWYQ 150/ 14 For EWAQ 130 EWYQ 130 180-210/230-250 6 11 14 22 21 X22Y K1*S / A21P 6' 6 25.1 F21B X10Y S2PH P> X10Y 287 288 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.16 Control circuit (DI 230V) Part 1 – System Outline X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A71P X15Y 3 V1C 4 Y11E M 3 2 36 4 X88A:2 3 5 248 3 X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X18Y X25Y 3 * DI 4 Y21E M 3 36 1 4 5 X89A:2 315 316 20.9 A13P A13P X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A72P ALARM 11 10 X27A:2 DI X27A:1 X15Y 3 4 only for EWYQ Y12E M 7 6 5 8 X88A:2 5 S1L X87A:1 2 X25Y 3 * DI X89A:1 X16Y 5 X30A:1 4 Y22E M 7 6 5 8 5 X89A:2 6 X30A:2 317 318 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 X86A:1 2 X88A:1 A73P X15Y 3 4 M only for EWYQ 230-250 Y13E 11 10 9 12 X88A:2 5 X1B:1 X1B:2 X1B:3 X1B:4 X1B:5 A01P WHT X29A:3 BLU X29A:4 X2B:1 X87A:1 2 X89A:1 X25Y 3 * 319 X2B:1 4 *= 12 5 shortcut on last EEV PCB (319) 11 10 M X2B:3 X89A:2 9 Y23E X2B:3 BLK X51A:2 X1M:+ A4P X19Y 1 X52A:1 X1M:- 2 RS485 X1M:24V 3 X52A:3 RS485 X52A:2 302 302 X51A:1 313 470 RED 471 WHT 472 314 473 BLK GRN 475 RED 476 WHT 477 249 478 BLK GRN 246 481 303 303 301 301 247 480 RED 482 WHT 483 BLK GRN 486 X1M:GND 4 X52A:4 304 304 244 485 RED BLU 491 245 WHT 487 BLU 490 RED 488 BLK GRN BLU 492 GRN WHT 493 BLK 495 RED 496 25.9 A23P A23P ALARM 11 10 X27A:2 X27A:1 DI RS485 X53A:2 A21P X53A:1 X53A:2 RS485 X53A:1 311 296 WHT 497 GRN WHT 498 BLK 312 Part 1 – System Outline 297 A11P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.5.17 Control circuit and EEV 1 3 4 5 1–207 B1PH X15Y 13 X42A:1 -t∞ A11P R2T 2 14 X42A:3 AI X42A:2 1 X34A:2 -t∞ 8 450 WHT AI X34A:1 402 R1T 7 400 X16Y X33A:3 AI 401 X33A:1 403 451 BLK 15 B1PL 16 17 X43A:3 18 X43A:4 15.1 / 11 OP57 11 T1A 32 12 / T1A 15.1 T1A 0-5A/0-20mA 31 12 X44A:3 AI X44A:4 16.3 / 11 X45A:1 -t∞ Only for EWYQ 230-250 R15T X15Y -t∞ 28 R26T 27 11 T1V 32 X45A:4 12 / T1V 16.3 T1V 0-500V/0-20mA 31 12 X45A:3 Only for EWYQ -t∞ X15Y R18T 24 -t∞ 23 R25T 22 31 32 Only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ R28T 33 34 X67A:2 AI X67A:1 X66A:2 AI X66A:1 X41A:2 AI X41A:1 X40A:2 A01P 415 AI AI X45A:2 21 411 26 X40A:1 X39A:2 X39A:1 412 X38A:2 AI 413 X44A:2 AI Only for EWYQ 25 X44A:1 -t∞ X15Y R16T 30 -t∞ 29 X38A:1 X37A:2 AI X37A:1 R17T 20 X36A:2 AI AI X43A:2 19 X15Y X43A:1 -t∞ X42A:4 R14T -t∞ X15Y R3T 4 404 3 X36A:1 X35A:2 X35A:1 AI 405 452 408 455 406 RED 409 RED 453 WHT 504 407 454 BLK 410 501 503 502 416 514 414 60 513 61 417 1–208 418 5 419 4 420 3 421 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.18 Circuit 1: sensors Part 1 – System Outline 422 13 AI 14 15 X42A:4 Only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ R48T X25Y 33 X35A:1 X42A:3 AI X42A:2 32 X34A:2 423 X42A:1 X25Y 31 B2PH A21P Only for EWYQ -t∞ R38T X25Y AI 456 WHT 424 X34A:1 B2PL 34 16 17 18 X43A:4 20 X36A:2 X43A:3 AI 19 AI X43A:2 X25Y X43A:1 -t∞ R34T X25Y X36A:1 X35A:2 WHT 457 BLK 425 459 BLK 458 RED 426 460 427 461 RED -t∞ R37T 30 25 Only for EWYQ -t∞ R36T X25Y 428 29 429 X25Y X38A:1 X37A:2 AI 430 X37A:1 AI 27 AI only for EWYQ 230-250 -t∞ R46T X25Y 431 26 X39A:1 432 X38A:2 -t∞ R35T 21 22 -t∞ R45T X25Y 23 24 433 X25Y 434 28 X41A:2 X40A:1 AI X41A:1 X40A:2 435 X39A:2 AI 436 Part 1 – System Outline 437 A21P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.5.19 Circuit 2: sensors 1 3 4 5 1–209 7 14 13 X27Y 8 45 X27Y 14 13 7 44 OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP 23.8 K1P OPSP/OPSC/OPHP OPTP/OPTC X27Y 8 43.3 K2P 45 MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP OBLIGATORY 23.8 44 13 7 S1S 14 7 Example: remote start/stop 14 13 S2S Example: remote cool/heat 14 13 S3S 14 13 51 S4S 14 13 52 53 44 50 X31A:3 45 49 X32A:4 46 48 X32A:3 47 47 X32A:2 48 46 X65A:4 X65A:3 X65A:2 X65A:1 X32A:1 49 Changeable DI4 50 Changeable DI3 51 Changeable DI2 52 1–210 K1P X27Y 5 Changeable DI1 4 X31A:1 DI A01P 3 53 11 A11P Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.20 Fieldwiring DI, changeable DI Part 1 – System Outline 8 -t∞ R8T Ch. AI1 example: temp. sensor 75 Example mA measurement (External power supply) - - Example mA measurement (5V power supply by PCB) 0 to 20mA 74 0 to 20mA 8 73 + 75 + 74 70 73 71 72 GND X69A:3 72 71 5V X68A:1 73 70 GND X68A:3 IN X68A:2 74 IN X69A:2 + Ch. AI3 example: V measurement - 0 to 10VDC 78 76 77 77 76 GND X71A:3 IN X71A:2 S5S 14 13 79 Ch. AI4 example: Switch 80 IN X70A:2 Changeable AI4 5V X70A:1 79 Changeable AI3 78 5V X71A:1 80 Changeable AI2 75 5V X69A:1 81 + 91 - 0 to 20mA or 10V Example mA output V output 90 X73A:2 X73A:1 Changeable AO1 GND X70A:3 81 Changeable AI1 90 Part 1 – System Outline 91 A01P ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 3.5.21 Fieldwiring changeable AI/AO 1 3 4 5 1–211 6 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 5 14 13 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 4 K12M H12P 3 14 4 H11P 3 13 5 K11M 6 K21M K22M 23 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) H21P 22 14 13 Operation M21C 22 Operation M12C 23 Operation M11C 25 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) H22P 24 14 13 Operation M22C 24 7 7 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 8 X22A:1 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact open No safety = contact open 9 Alarm NO Default X22A:5 X22A:3 K12R A11P Changeable DO1 (Default: Alarm, NO contact 8-9) 9 H1P External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 8 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact closed No safety = contact open 9 7 Alarm NC Software selection necessary 9 Changeable DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC 9 1–212 25 5 8 4 K14R A11P H2P 11 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 10 X24A:1 X24A:2 Changeable DO2 (Default: Gen. operation) 10 3 11 11 AC15: max.3A-230V Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 3.5.22 Fieldwiring DO, changeable DO Part 1 – System Outline 4 3 K1P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 12 X16A:3 13 13 NOT FOR MODELS WITH OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/OPTP/OPHP K1S X27Y K4R 12 2 14 11 6 23.9 SL A11P X27Y F17B X27Y 14 1 5 15 1 3 5 13 MODELS WITH OPTC/OPTP 23.9 2 4 6 14 SN A11P X2A X27Y K2P X27Y X25A:3 X25A:1 Changeable DO3 (Default: 2nd pump) 10 K15R A11P 14 X16A:1 15.5 15.5 15.5 40.2 15 X27Y 6 5 H3P X27Y External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 14 MODELS WITHOUT OPTC/OPTP Changeable DO3 (no predefined function) 10 15 K21R A01P 16 A11P Changeable DO3 H4P 17 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 16 X64A:3 X64:1 Changeable DO4 17 K22R A01P 18 DO pump 21 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 20 X63A:3 X63A:1 External Power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 19 K20R A01P Changeable DO6 H6P 19 H5P 18 X64A:7 X64A:5 Changeable DO5 20 Part 1 – System Outline 21 Ch. DO: Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC ESIE06-05 Wiring Layout 1 3 4 5 1–213 Wiring Layout ESIE06-05 11 3 4 5 1–214 Part 1 – System Outline ESIE06-05 4 Part 2 Functional Description Introduction This part gives more detailed information on the functions and controls of the unit. This information is used as background information for troubleshooting. An extensive overview of the functioning of the controller is also given in this part. Knowledge of the controller is essential to gather information prior to servicing and troubleshooting. What is in this part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter See page 1–Operation Range 2–3 2–The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 2–9 3–Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 2–105 Part 2 – Functional Description 2 3 4 5 2–1 ESIE06-05 1 2 3 5 2–2 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Operation Range Part 2 1 1 Operation Range 2 1.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction Overview This chapter contains the operation range of the different models. Understanding these operation ranges is vital when selecting a chiller or when diagnosing a malfunction that is related to the chiller operation range. 3 This chapter contains the following topics: Topic See page 1.2–Operational Range: EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B) 2–4 1.3–Operational Range: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) 2–5 1.4–Operational Range: EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B) 2–6 1.5–Operational Range: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) 2–7 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–3 Operation Range 1 1.2 ESIE06-05 Operational Range: EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B) Operational range The illustration below shows the operational range of the EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B). 2 3 4 5 STD: Standard unit OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 4°C by use of glycol Protect the water circuit against freezing by: * OP10: heater tape or * Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit with OPZL) OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260 2–4 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 1.3 Operation Range Operational Range: EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) Operational range 1 The illustration below shows the operational range of the EWAQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B). . 2 3 4 5 STD: Standard unit OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 4°C by use of glycol Protect the water circuit against freezing by: * OP10: heater tape or * Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit with OPZL) OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWAQ130-150 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–5 Operation Range 1 1.4 ESIE06-05 Operational Range: EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B) Operational range The illustration below shows the operational range of the EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B). 2 3 4 5 STD: Standard unit OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 5°C by use of glycol Protect the water circuit against freezing by: * OP10: heater tape or * Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit with OPZL) OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250 2–6 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 1.5 Operation Range Operational Range: EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B) Operational range 1 The illustration below shows the operational range of the EWYQ130-150DAYN(N-P-B). . 2 3 4 5 STD: Standard unit OPZL: Leaving water evaporator from -10° to 5°C by use of glycol Protect the water circuit against freezing by: * OP10: heater tape or * Filling up the system with a glycol solution (only for unit without pump or unit with OPZL) OPIF Option Inverter Fans EWYQ130-150 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–7 Operation Range ESIE06-05 1 2 3 4 5 2–8 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Part 2 2 1 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 2 2.1 What Is In This Chapter? Introduction In this chapter the practical use of the PCASO controller for multiscroll chillers will be explained. Overview This chapter contains the following topics: 3 Topic See page 2.2–The Controller 2–10 2.3–Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings 2–12 2.4–Menu Overview 2–13 2.5–How to Read or Adjust Parameter Settings: the Programming Procedure 2–14 2.6–Read-out Menu 2–15 2.7–Set Points Menu 2–25 2.8–User Settings 2–26 2.9–Timers menu 2–43 2.10–Info menu 2–45 2.11–Input/Output Status Menu 2–48 2.12–User Password Menu 2–56 2.13–Network Menu 2–58 2.14–Cool / Heat Menu 2–60 2.15–Service Menu 2–61 2.16–Menu overview 2–102 2.17–Service menu overview 2–103 Part 2 – Functional Description 4 5 2–9 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.2 ESIE06-05 The Controller Digital Controller The EWAP080-260DAYN and EWYP080-250 DAYN units are equipped with a digital controller, offering a user-friendly way to configure, use and maintain the unit. The digital controller consists of: 2 ■ Graphic LCD display ■ 6 keys Front Panel The illustration below shows the front panel of the controller. Keys The table below contains an overview of the keys and their functions. 3 4 5 key to start up or to shut down the unit p f g h q 2–10 key to enter the safeties menu or to reset an alarm key to enter the main menu or to return to the previous menu keys to scroll up or down through the screens of a menu or to raise, or lower a setting key to confirm a selection or a setting Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 How to switch between screens The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers h g Each menu contains a number of screens. You can switch between the screens, using the or keys. In the upper-left corner of the screen you will find a screen indicator, indicating whether there is a previous or next screen. 1 An overview is given in the table below: The screen indicator ^ v First screen of the menu, press h to go to the next screen Last screen of the menu, press screen g to go to the previous 2 either return to the previous or go to the next screen e Screen Detail Indicates that you should do the following 3 Each screen contains 4 lines which give information about a setting (a description and an entry field). The entry fields can be adjusted using the h and the g keys. The cursor is marked by the sign "_". The cursor can be moved between the screen indicator and the entry fields using the q key. The cursor can be moved directly to the screen indicator by pressing the Cursor f key. 5 Screen indicator _ V/ l i n e 1 l i n e l i n e l i n e : T I T L E 2 v a l u e 1 : 1 0 3 v a l u e 2 : 2 0 4 v a l u e 3 : 3 0 Information Entry field Remark: Make sure that the cursor is at the screen indicator position when scrolling through the screens. After changing a entry field push the Part 2 – Functional Description 4 q key to confirm the setting. 2–11 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.3 Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings Power on 2 ESIE06-05 Remote start/stop ■ The initialization takes 20 seconds. ■ The controller automatically goes to the menu overview. The procedure to start or stop the unit depends on the settings of the remote start/stop. Remark: The remote start/stop is field supply. How to start or stop 3 4 How to cool or heat Local key Remote Switch Unit LED ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Flashing OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF To change from cooling to heating (or visa versa) you have to enter the Cooling/Heating menu through the main menu or a remote cool/heat signal can be used. Remark: The remote cool/heat is field supply. 5 Temperature Setting 2–12 To adjust the inlet or outlet water temperature, go to the Set Points menu through the main menu. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.4 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Menu Overview Introduction 1 This chapter gives an overview of the screens provided by the different menus. Initial Test Appears when connected to power supply Main menu Graphic or Text layout Readout menu 2 Setpoint menu User settings menu 3 Service menu 4 Timers menu History menu Info menu 5 Input/Output menu User password menu Cooling/heating menu Network menu Safety menu Part 2 – Functional Description 2–13 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.5 ESIE06-05 How to Read or Adjust Parameter Settings: the Programming Procedure Programming Procedure Begin (*) 2 Press the f key. Select the desired menu with the 3 h/g keys. Does the controller prompt you to give the password? No Yes Enter the password using the Press the 4 h or g key. q key. Select the desired screen using the No 5 h or g key. Do you want to adjust a parameter setting? Yes Select the parameter by using the Adjust the value using the q key. h or g key. Do you want to save the modifications? No Yes Press the Yes q key. Do you want to adjust another parameter in the same screen? No Press the f key. Do you want to adjust a parameter in another screen? Yes No (*): The display shows the last screen used. 2–14 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.6 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Read-out Menu 1 Operational information Using this menu you can read the operational information, such as the cooling set points, the inlet and outlet water temperature, the circuit status, etc. This menu allows access to several screens. The number of screens depends on the unit type and the options. Screen 1 This screen shows the actual operational information about the status of the pump, the compressor, the fans and the temperature setpoint. This screen can be enabled or disabled in the service/advanced menu. _vc 3 013.6 °C … ≤0U4 ∞11 ∞12 H ∞21 ∞22 H 2 012.0 ° C 4 Legend: cooling mode h heating mode 5 fan (H high or L low or % of inverter fan output) s low noise mode activated (only available when option OPIF is installed) … …1/2 ∞11/12 ∞21/22 ≤ 13.6 ° C 12.0 °C pump on Part 2 – Functional Description in case of dual pump control: pump 1/2 on circuit 1 compressor 1/2 on circuit 2 compressor 1/2 on alarm and last occurred malfunction code (OU4 in example) actual temperature (inlet or outlet temperature depending on active mode) temperature setpoint (inlet or outlet temperature depending on active mode) 2–15 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Screen 2 ESIE06-05 This screen shows the actual operational information about the control mode, the inlet, outlet water temperature and ambient temperature. _ COOL. INLSP1:012.0 ° C INLET WATER:013.6 ° C 2 OUTLET WATER:007.0 °C AMBIENT:006.5 ° C 3 4 5 Display Description COOL operation in cooling mode HEAT operation in heating mode INLSP(1)(2) inlet temperature setpoint 1 (or 2 in case of dual setpoint setting) OUTSP(1)(2) outlet temperature setpoint 1 (or 2 in case of dual setpoint setting) INLET WATER Actual inlet water temperature OUTLET WATER Actual outlet water temperature AMBIENT Actual ambient temperature Remark: For a DICN system, the INLET WATER and OUTLET WATER values are the values of the individual unit, not of the system. Temperatures of the system can be consulted in the first screen of the network menu. These screens show the actual operational information about the EEV control. They are only visible when they are enabled in the Service/EEV menu. Screen 3 C1 TEMP.READOUT SUCTION C1:007.4 ° C SUPERHEAT C1:007.3 ° C EEV PULS C1:0000PLS 2–16 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Screen 4 C1 TEMP.READOUT SUCTION H11:007.4 ° C SUPERHEAT H11:007.3 ° C 2 EEV PULS H11:0000PLS Screen 5 C1 TEMP.READOUT 3 SUCTION H12:007.4 ° C SUPERHEAT H12:007.3 ° C EEV PULS H12:0000PLS 4 Display Description C1 TEMP. READOUT operational information EEV control of circuit 1 SUCTION C1 suction temp. in cooling mode of circuit 1 SUCTION H11 suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 1 of circuit 1 SUCTION H12 suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 2 of circuit 1 SUPERHEAT C1 actual superheat in cooling mode of circuit 1 SUPERHEAT H11 actual superheat in heating mode of coil 1 of circuit 1 SUPERHEAT H12 actual superheat in heating mode of coil 2 of circuit 1 EEV PULS C1 actual electronic expansion valve opening in cooling mode EEV PULS H11 actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating mode of expansion valve of coil 1 EEV PULS H12 actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating mode of expansion valve of coil 2 Part 2 – Functional Description 5 2–17 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 These screens show the actual operational information about the EEV control. They are only visible when they are enabled in the service / EEV menu. The screens are only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. Screen 6 C2 TEMP.READOUT 2 SUCTION C2:007.4 ° C SUPERHEAT C2:007.3 ° C EEV PULS C2:0000PLS 3 Screen 7 C2 TEMP.READOUT SUCTION H21:007.4 ° C 4 SUPERHEAT H21:007.3 ° C EEV PULS H21:0000PLS Screen 8 5 C2 TEMP.READOUT SUCTION H22:007.4 ° C SUPERHEAT H22:007.3 ° C EEV PULS H22:0000PLS : 2–18 Display Description C2 TEMP. READOUT operational information EEV control of circuit 2 SUCTION C2 suction temp. in cooling mode of circuit 2 SUCTION H21 suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 1 of circuit 2 SUCTION H22 suction temp. in heating mode of compressor 2 of circuit 2 SUPERHEAT C2 actual superheat in cooling mode of circuit 2 SUPERHEAT H21 actual superheat in heating mode of coil 1 of circuit 2 SUPERHEAT H22 actual superheat in heating mode of coil 2 of circuit 2 EEV PULS C2 actual electronic expansion valve opening in cooling mode EEV PULS H 21 actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating mode of expansion valve of coil 1 EEV PULS H22 actual electronic expansion valve opening in heating mode of expansion valve of coil 2 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Screen 9 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers These screens show the actual operational information about the discharge temperature of circuits 1 and 2 for compressors 1 and 2. _ C1 TEMP.READOUT C11 DISCHARGE:010.1 ° C 2 C12 DISCHARGE:010.5 ° C Screen 10 3 This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. _ C2 TEMP.READOUT C21 DISCHARGE:010.1 ° C 4 C22 DISCHARGE:010.5 ° C Display Description C1 TEMP. READOUT discharge temperature readout of circuit 1 C2 TEMP. READOUT discharge temperature readout of circuit 2 C11 DISCHARGE discharge temperature compressor 1 of circuit 1 C12 DISCHARGE discharge temperature compressor 2 of circuit 1 C21 DISCHARGE discharge temperature compressor 1 of circuit 2 C22 DISCHARGE discharge temperature compressor 2 of circuit 2 Part 2 – Functional Description 1 5 2–19 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 These screens show the actual operational information about the refrigerant temperature and the coil temperature. Screen 11 _ 2 C1 TEMP.READOUT C1 REFR:000.0 ° C C11 COIL:000.0 ° C C12 COIL:000.0 ° C 3 Screen 12 This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. _ 4 C2 TEMP.READOUT C2 REFR:000.0 ° C C21 COIL:000.0 ° C C22 COIL:000.0 ° C 5 Display Description C1 TEMP. READOUT Temperature readout of circuit 1 C2 TEMP. READOUT Temperature readout of circuit 2 C1 REFR. Refrigerant temperature of circuit 1 C2 REFR. Refrigerant temperature of circuit 2 C11 COIL Temperature of coil 1 of circuit 1 C12 COIL Temperature of coil 2 of circuit 1 C21 Temperature of coil 1 of circuit 2 C22 Temperature of coil 2 of circuit 2 Remark: Coil sensors are only present on EWYQ units. 2–20 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers These screens show the actual operational information about the high and low pressure and the fan output. 1 Screen 13 _ C1 ACT. PRESSURES 2 HP1:019.0b = 050.8 ° C LP1:004.4b = -05.2 ° C FAN1:OFF 3 Screen 14 This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. . _ C2 ACT. PRESSURES 4 HP2:019.0b = 050.8 ° C LP2:004.4b = -05.2 ° C FAN2:OFF Display Description C1 ACT. PRESSURES actual pressures of circuit 1 C2 ACT. PRESSURES actual pressures of circuit 2 HP1: b= °C actual high pressure and corresponding temperature LP1: b= °C actual low pressure and corresponding temperature HP2: b= °C actual high pressure and corresponding temperature LP2: b= °C actual low pressure and corresponding temperature FAN1/FAN2 actual fan output OFF : Part 2 – Functional Description OFF L: low speed M: medium speed H: high speed 000% : LOW NOISE : N/Y 5 percentage of inverter fan output (only with OPIF) Indication if low noise mode is active at the moment (only with OPIF) 2–21 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 These screens show the actual status of the circuit 1 or circuit 2 compressors and the capacity of the unit. Screen 15 _ 2 UNIT STATUS C11:OFF SAFETY ACT. C12:OFF SAFETY ACT. UNIT CAPACITY:000% 3 This screen is only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. Screen 16 _ 4 UNIT STATUS C21:OFF SAFETY ACT. C22:OFF SAFETY ACT. 5 . 2–22 Display Description C11 status of compressor 1 of circuit 1 C12 status of compressor 2 of circuit 1 C21 status of compressor 1 of circuit 2 C22 status of compressor 2 of circuit 2 UNIT CAPACITY percentage of the total unit capacity Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Possible compressor status: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Screen 17 SAFETY ACT: one of the circuit safety devices is activated. FREEZEUP DIS: the compressor is disabled by the freeze-up disable function. FREEZEUP PR: the freeze-up prevention is active. DEFROST BUSY: defrost is active on this circuit. COMP PR: the compressor protection function is active. HP SETBACK: the high pressure setback is active. MIN.RUN.TIM.: the minimum running time of the compressor is active. LIMIT: the compressor is limited by the limitation function. STANDBY DICN: when in a DICN configuration, the unit is in standby mode because there is sufficient current capacity to maintain set point. UNIT OFF: the unit is switched off. AREC INLET: the compressor will not start up when the inlet water temperature has not risen enough compared to the previous switch off of the compressor. FREE COOLING: the free cooling mode is active. TIMER BUSY: the actual value of one of the compressor timers is not zero. PUMPLEAD TIM: the compressor will wait to start up for as long as the pump lead timer is counting down. This screen shows the actual operational information about the current (Ampère) and voltage of the unit. 1 2 3 4 This screen is only visible when the A-meter, V-meter (option OP57) is installed. _ EXTRA READOUT 5 CURRENT:055A VOLTAGE:230V Part 2 – Functional Description 2–23 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 These screens show the actual operational information about the total running hours in cooling and heating mode and the number of compressor stops of each circuit, as well as the total running hours of the pumps. Screen 18 & 19 CIRCUIT 1/ COMPRESSOR 1 2 _ CIRCUIT 1/ COMPRESSOR 2 EXTRA READOUT _ EXTRA READOUT C11RH:00000hCS:00000 C21RH:00000hCS:00000 C11C:00000h H:00000h C21C:00000h H:00000h RHP1:00001hP2:00000h 3 These screens are only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. 4 Screen 20 & 21 CIRCUIT 2/ COMPRESSOR 1 _ EXTRA READOUT CIRCUIT 2/ COMPRESSOR 2 _ EXTRA READOUT C12RH:00000hCS:00000 C22RH:00000hCS:00000 C12C:00000h H:00000h C22C:00000h H:00000h 5 Display Description CxxRH: CS RH: Total running hours of this circuit CS: Total compressor starts of this circuit CxxC: H C: Running hours in cooling mode H: Running hours in heating mode RHP1: 2 RHP1: Running hours of pump 1 P2: Running hours of pump 2 2–24 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.7 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Set Points Menu Screen: password 1 Depending on the settings in the user settings menu explained further on, you may need the user password to be able to enter the screens in this menu. This screen will only appear if a password is required. 2 ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD: 0000 3 TO LOGIN Remark: The units leave the factory with the user password set to "1234". This user password can be modified in the user password menu. Setpoint Screen This menu allows you to set the inlet/outlet water temperature of the evaporator/condenser of setpoint 1 and 2. These set points will not be active in the Manual Control Mode. 4 > COOL. INLSP1:012.0 °C 5 COOL. INLSP2:012.0 ° C COOL. OUTSP1:007.0 ° C COOL. OUTSP2:007.0 ° C . Display Description COOL setpoints in cooling mode HEAT setpoints in heating mode INLSP inlet water temp. setpoint 1 INLSP inlet water temp. setpoint 2 (dual setpoint) OUTSP outlet water temp. setpoint 1 OUTSP outlet water temp. setpoint 2 (dual setpoint) A " >" symbol is displayed in front of the active setpoint in this screen. Remark: You can select setpoint 1 or 2 with a digital input from a switch. In the service menu you can select which digital input you want to use for this. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–25 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.8 ESIE06-05 User Settings User Settings Menu Password You need the user password to enter this menu. 2 ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD: 0000 3 TO LOGIN Remark: The units leave the factory with the user password set to "1234". This user password can be modified in the user password menu. 4 User Settings Menu 5 2–26 h and Use the of your choice. g keys to scroll through the menu and press the q key to enter the submenu Topic See page 2.8.1 Thermostat settings 2–27 2.8.2 Compressor settings 2–28 2.8.3 Fan Settings 2–29 2.8.4 Pump settings 2–31 2.8.5 Floating setpoint 2–32 2.8.6 Language 2–34 2.8.7 Time and Date 2–35 2.8.8 Free cooling 2–35 2.8.9 DICN 2–37 2.8.10 Advanced 2–38 2.8.11 Defrost 2–41 2.8.12 Service Menu 2–42 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.8.1 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Thermostat settings Thermostat 1 This screen allows modification of the control settings. _v THERMOSTAT 2 MODE:INL WATER LOADUP:180s-DWN:030s 3 Possible settings MODE: ■ INL WATER: inlet water control LOAD UP: 180s minimum load up time between 2 compressor starts DOWN : 30 s minimum load down time between 2 compressor stops ■ OUTL WATER: LOAD UP: 30s minimum load up time between 2 compressor starts DOWN: 15s minimum load down time between 2 compressor stops ■ MANUAL CONTROL: 4 outlet water control manual control (no thermostat control active) 5 Remark: The load up and load down time changes according to the selected operation mode. Manual Setting This screen allows modification of the manual control settings. This screen is only visible when MANUAL is selected as thermostat mode (see THERMOSTAT screen) _^ MANUAL SETTINGS C11:OFF C12:OFF C21:OFF C22:OFF F1*:OFF F2*:OFF Possible settings C11 / C12 / C21 / C22: ON : compressor ON OFF : compressor OFF Part 2 – Functional Description 2–27 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 Possible settings F1*/ F2*: 1 For standard fans: 2 OFF : All fans off L : Low speed M : Medium speed H : High speed Inverter fans (OPIF or OPLN) 000% : percentage of fan output 3 2.8.2 4 Compressor settings Compr. Lead-Lag This screen allows modification of the compressor lead-lag settings: _v COMPR.LEAD-LAG MODE:PRIORITY 5 PRIORITY: C11>C12>C21>C22 Possible settings MODE: ■ PRIORITY: The user can select the sequence of the compressors to start. example: C11 > C12 : compressor 1 will start before compressor 2 ■ Compr. Cap. Limit AUTO : The compressor lead-lag according to the running hours of the compressors This screen allows modification of the compressor capacity limitation settings. _^ COMPR.CAP.LIMIT MODE:LIMIT SETTING SET: C11:OFF C12:OFF C21:OFF C22:OFF 2–28 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Possible settings MODE: ■ NOT ACTIVE: The compressor limitation function is disabled. ■ CHANG. DIG. INP.: A changeable digital input can be used to enable/disable the compressor capacity limitation. 1 -When there is no changeable digital input programmed as “CAP LIMIT SET”, no compressor capacity limits can be entered (not displayed) 2 -When there is a changeable digital input programmed as “CAP LIMIT SET”, ■ LIMIT SETTING: • the compressors can be disabled by selecting OFF. • the compressors can be enabled by selecting ON. 3 The programmed limitation will be used without the need of an additional programmed DI. • the compressors can be disabled by selecting OFF. • the compressors can be enabled by selecting ON. 4 Remark: The compressors that are programmed as OFF will always remain off. ■ LIMIT 50%: The total capacity of the unit will be limited on 50% Remark: Lines 3 and 4 of the COMPR. CAP. LIMIT screen will not be displayed. 2.8.3 5 Fan Settings Fan Low Noise This screen allows modification of the fan low noise mode. This screen is only visible when the option inverter fans (OPIF) or the option low noise (OPLN) has been installed. _v FAN LOW NOISE MODE:NOT ACTIVE Possible settings MODE: ■ NOT ACTIVE : fan low noise mode is disabled. ■ ACTIVE : fan low noise mode is enabled. ■ CHANG.DIG.INP. : fan low noise mode can be enabled/disabled with a changeable digital input, programmed in the service/fan menu. ■ DAILY SCHEDULE : fan low noise mode can be enabled/disabled by means of a specified start and stop time. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–29 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the start and stop time of the fan low noise mode. 1 This screen is only visible when “DAILY SCHEDULE” is selected as fan low noise mode. _v FAN LOW NOISE MODE:DAILY SCHEDULE 2 START:20h00 STOP:06h00 Settings: 3 4 Fan forced ON START : start time of the low noise mode STOP : stop time of the low noise mode This screen allows modification of the fan forced ON function. _ FAN FORCED ON IF UNIT IS OFF THEN ALL FANS:OFF 5 Possible settings : 2–30 ■ OFF : If the unit is OFF, then all the fans are OFF. ■ ON : If the unit is OFF, then all the fans are ON. ■ CH. DIG. INP. : If the unit is OFF, all the fans can be switched on by use of a changeable digital input, programmed in the service/fan menu (Fan Forced ON). Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.8.4 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Pump settings Pump Control 1 This screen allows modification of the pump control. _v PUMPCONTROL PUMPLEADTIME :020s PUMPLAGTIME :060s DAILY ON:N 2 AT:00h00 3 Settings: PUMPLEADTIME : Time the water pump will operate before starting up the chiller PUMPLAGTIME : Time the water pump will keep running after stopping the chiller DAILY ON : N: function disabled : Y: activation of daily pump start : Time of the daily ON function AT Dual Pump 4 5 This screen allows modification of the dual pump control. _^ DUAL PUMP MODE:AUTO ROTATION OFFSET ON RH :048h Possible settings MODE: ■ AUTO ROTATION : the sequence of the pump start is done based on the running hours ■ PUMP1 > PUMP2 : pump 1 will always start first ■ PUMP2 > PUMP1 : pump 2 will always start first ■ OFFSET ON RH : offset in running hours between pump1 and pump2 (only when autorotation is selected) Part 2 – Functional Description 2–31 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.8.5 ESIE06-05 Floating setpoint Floating Setpoint This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint function. Different floating setpoint modes will give different screens. 2 _ FLOATING SETPOINT MODE:NOT ACTIVE 3 Possible modes : 4 Floating Setpoint Ambient ■ AMBIENT ■ CH. AI SLOPE NTC ■ CH. AI SLOPE V-A ■ CH. AI MAX VALUE ■ NOT ACTIVE This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint based on ambient temperature. 5 _ FLOATING SETPOINT MODE:AMBIENT MAXPOS:03.0 ° C NEG:00.0 ° C RF:020.0 ° C SLOPE:006.0 ° C Settings: 2–32 MODE : Ambient, floating setpoint function based on ambient temperature MAXPOS : Maximum value of positive floating setpoint correction NEG : Maximum value of negative floating setpoint correction RF : Reference value. At this ambient temperature there is no correction of the setpoint. SLOPE : This parameter is necessary to draw the angle of the curve. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Floating Setpoint CH. AI . SLOPE NTC The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint, based on an additional NTC sensor, connected to an analogue input. _ 1 FLOATING SETPOINT MODE:CH.AI SLOPE NTC 2 MAXPOS:03.0 ° C NEG:03.0 ° C RF:020.0 ° C SLOPE:006.0 ° C Settings: MODE : Changeable analogue input slope NTC, floating setpoint based on an additional NTC sensor MAXPOS : Maximum value of positive floating setpoint correction NEG : Maximum value of negative floating setpoint correction RF : Reference value. At this ambient temperature there is no correction of the setpoint. SLOPE : This parameter is necessary to draw the angle of the curve. Remark: When mode “CH. AI SLOPE NTC” is selected, a changeable analogue input needs to be programmed in the service/input output menu. Floating Setpoint CH. AI. SLOPE V-A This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint based on an external voltage or current signal. _ FLOATING SETPOINT MODE:CH.AI SLOPE V-A MAXPOS:03.0 ° C NEG:03.0 ° C RF:020.0 ° C SLOPE:012.0 ° C Settings: MODE : Changeable analogue input slope V-A, floating setpoint based on an external voltage or current signal MAXPOS : Maximum value of positive floating setpoint correction NEG : Maximum value of negative floating setpoint correction RF : Reference value. At this percentage of the input signal there is no correction of the setpoint. SLOPE : This parameter is necessary to draw the angle of the curve. Remark: When mode “CH. AI SLOPE V-A” is selected, a changeable analogue input needs to be programmed in the service/input output menu. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–33 3 4 5 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Floating Setpoint CH AI MAX VALUE ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the floating setpoint based on an external voltage or current signal. _ FLOATING SETPOINT MODE:CH.AI MAX VALUE 2 MAXIMUM VALUE:003.0 ° C Settings: 3 : Changeable analogue input maximum value, floating setpoint based on an external voltage or current signal MAXIMUM VALUE : Maximum value of floating setpoint correction, value can be positive or negative Remark: When mode “CH. AI MAX VALUE” is selected, a changeable analogue input needs to be programmed in the service/input output menu. 4 2.8.6 5 MODE Language Language This screen allows modification of the language. _ LANGUAGE PRESS ENTER TO CHANGE LANGUAGE: ENGLISH When entering this menu, just press ENTER to change the language. This is a loop function: when reaching the last selectable language you are sent back to the first. 2–34 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.8.7 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Time and Date Time and Date 1 This screen allows modification of the time and date. _ TIME AND DATE 2 TIME: 22h35 DATE FORMAT:DD/MM/YY DATE: WED 24/01/07 3 Settings: TIME : To set the actual time DATE FORMAT : To select date format DATE 2.8.8 : ■ DD/MM/YY ■ YY/MM/DD 4 To set the actual date 5 Free cooling Free Cooling This screen allows modification of the free cooling function. The different free cooling modes will give different screens. _ FREE COOLING MODE:NOT ACTIVE Settings: ■ AMBIENT ■ INLET- AMBIENT ■ CHANG. DIG. INP. ■ NOT ACTIVE Part 2 – Functional Description 2–35 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Free Cooling Ambient ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the free cooling based on ambient temperature. _ FREE COOLING MODE:AMBIENT 2 SP: 05.0 ° C PUMP:ON DIF:01.0 °C LEAD:000s Settings: 3 4 Free Cooling InletAmbient MODE : AMBIENT, free cooling based on ambient temperature SP : Define setpoint of free cooling DIF : Setting of the free cooling difference PUMP : Define if pump is ON/ OFF during free cooling operation LEAD : Lead time of the evaporator water pump This screen allows modification of the free cooling, based on the difference between inlet water temperature and ambient temperature. 5 _ FREE COOLING MODE:INLET-AMBIENT SP:05.0 ° C DIF:050.0 ° C Settings: MODE : INLET-AMBIENT, free cooling based on the difference between inlet water temperature and ambient temperature SP : Define setpoint of the free cooling DIF : Setting of the free cooling difference Remark: During free cooling, based on inlet-ambient, the pump contact is always closed. 2–36 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Free Cooling Chang. Dig. Inp. The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the free cooling based on a digital input signal. _ FREE COOLING MODE:CHANG.DIG.INP PUMP:ON 2 LEAD:000s Settings: MODE : CHANG.DIG.INP., free cooling based on a changeable digital input signal (example from an external thermostat) PUMP : Define if pump is ON/OFF during free cooling operation LEAD : Lead time of the evaporator water pump 3 4 2.8.9 DICN DICN This screen allows modifications of the DICN function. 5 This menu can only be entered when MS is selected in the service/DICN menu. _ MASTER SETTINGS _ MODE:NORMAL OFFSET:0000h PUMP ON IF:UNIT ON Part 2 – Functional Description SLAVE SETTINGS MODE:NORMAL OR OFFSET:0000h PUMP ON IF:UNIT ON 2–37 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 Settings: 1 MODE (Parameter can be set on each unit) : ■ NORMAL: Unit is part of the DICN setup ■ STANDBY: ■ A unit with mode “STANDBY” will only be able to loadup if: -a safety is present on a unit in the DICN setup. 2 OR -all other units are on 100% capacity (possible to disable). 3 ■ 4 Remark: all units can be put on “STANDBY”, in which case the DICN will calculate which unit will be the actual standby. DISCONN. ON/ OFF In case more than 1 unit has “STANDBY” setting, the actual standby will be calculated (based on running hours). A unit with mode “DISCONNECT ON/ OFF” can be put on/off independently from the DICN on/off status (setpoint & other network parameters are still controlled on DICN level) and unit can be put in manual mode. : ■ OFFSET : The offset time defines the target difference in running hours between one unit and another unit. PUMP ON IF : UNIT IS ON: pump of individual unit will run if unit is on COMPR ON: pump of individual unit will only run if the compressor of that unit is on 5 2.8.10 Advanced Advanced This screen allows modification of the advanced password settings. _v ADVANCED PASSWORD NEEDED FOR: SETPOINT MENU:Y UNIT ON/OFF:Y 2–38 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Settings: 1 PASSWORD NEEDED FOR: SETPOINT MENU : Y: User password is needed to enter the setpoint menu N: no password is needed to enter the setpoint menu UNIT ON/ OFF : Y: user password is needed to switch the unit ON or OFF N: no password is needed to switch the unit ON or OFF 2 When a password is needed to switch the unit ON or OFF, the following screen will be displayed while pushing the ON/OFF button. 3 SWITCH UNIT ON/OFF ENTER PASSWORD PASSWORD:0000 TO SWITCH UNIT ON 4 When the password is entered, the unit will switch ON/ OFF. This screen allows modification of the advanced main menu, logout timer and buzzer settings. _ 5 ADVANCED MAIN MENU:GRAPHIC LOGOUT TIMER:05min BUZZER IF SAFETY:YES Settings: MAIN MENU Part 2 – Functional Description : set to GRAPHIC to let the main menu show the graphical symbols or to TEXT to let the main menu show the names of the menus. 2–39 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 Main menu Graphic a z e r t y u q b d 2 Main menu Text > READOUT MENU SETPOINTS MENU 3 USERSETTINGS MENU TIMERS MENU HISTORY MENU INFO MENU 4 I/O STATUS MENU LOGIN/LOGOUT MENU NETWORK MENU 5 COOL/HEAT MENU ■ LOGOUT TIMER : Set the time for automatic log out, between 01 and 30 minutes. ■ BUZZER IF SAFETY : To activate or deactivate the buzzer sound when an error occurs. This screen allows modification of the advanced backlight and graphic readout settings. _^ ADVANCED BACKLIGHT TIME:05min GRAPHIC READOUT:YES Settings: 2–40 BACKLIGHT TIME : to define the time (between 01 and 30 minutes) the light of the controller display will stay on after the last manipulation of the controller buttons. GRAPHIC READOUT : to define if the graphical representation of the first screen of the read out menu is present or not. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers _vc 1 013.6 °C … ≤0U4 ∞11 ∞12 H ∞21 ∞22 H 012.0 ° C 2 2.8.11 Defrost Manual Defrost 3 This screen allows activation of a manual defrost. _v MANUAL DEFROST 4 UNIT DEFROST:OFF CIR1 DEFROST:OFF CIR2 DEFROST:OFF 5 Settings: UNIT/CIR1/CIR2 DEFROST : OFF: No manual defrost is requested ON : manual defrost is requested and busy Unit defrost : Both circuits will execute a defrost cycle, due to one circuit defrost control, the 2nd circuit defrost will only start after the defrost finish of the 1st circuit. Circuit defrost : Only this circuit will execute a defrost cycle. Remark: If manual defrost is chosen (for 1 circuit/2 circuits) ■ If condition of defrost is satisfied start defrost AND indicate ON for manual defrost ■ If condition of defrost is not satisfied Part 2 – Functional Description return to OFF indication and ignore manual defrost order 2–41 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Defrost Timer ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the minimum time between 2 defrost cycles of the same circuit. _^ DEFROST MIN. TIME BETWEEN 2 DEFROST: NORMAL MIN. TIME BETWEEN DEFROST 3 : Minimum time between 2 defrost cycles of the same circuit in order to keep heating capacity and prevent frequent defrosting. Settings: 4 5 NORMAL : Normal start value, default 30 min, (range 20~120 min) SHORT : Short start value, default 10min, (range 1~20min) 2.8.12 Service Menu Operational information The service menu is accessible through the last screen of the user settings menu. To enter the service menu you need the service password. Please contact your distributor for this password. It is only possible to access the service menu when the unit is “OFF”. Only a qualified engineer is allowed to access this menu. You need the password to access this menu. ENTER SERVICE PASSWORD:0000 TO LOGIN 2–42 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.9 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Timers menu 1 Software Timers Using this menu, the actual software timers can be read out. This menu displays three screens. General Timers This screen shows the actual value of the general timers: _v 2 GENERAL TIMERS LOADUP:000s-DWN:000s Compressor Timers PUMPLEAD :000s FLOWSTOP :00s 3 Display Description LOADUP ■ LOADUP: starts counting when a thermostat step change has occurred. During the countdown, the unit is not able to go to a higher thermostat step. DWN ■ LOADDOWN: starts counting when a thermostat step change has occurred. During the countdown, the unit is not able to go to a lower thermostat step. PUMPLEAD ■ FLOWSTART-20sec: counts down when the water flow through the evaporator is continuous and the unit is in standby. During the countdown, the unit cannot start up. PUMPLAG ■ Counts down after the unit is switched off. During the pump lag time (60s) the pump will keep running after the chiller has stopped. (appears when PUMPLEAD TIME = 0) FLOWSTOP ■ FLOWSTOP-5 sec: starts counting when the water flow through the evaporator stops after the flowstart timer has reached zero. If the water flow has not restarted during the countdown, the unit will shut down. These screens show the actual value of the compressor timers. _ Part 2 – Functional Description COMPRESSOR TIMERS _^ COMPRESSOR TIMERS GRD11:000s 12:000s GRD21:000s 22:000s AREC11:000s 12:000s AREC21:000s 22:000s M.RT11:000s 12:000s M.RT21:000s 22:000s 2–43 4 5 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2 ESIE06-05 Display Description GRD 11/12/21/22 ■ GUARDTIMER (180 sec): starts counting when the compressor (circuit 1/2) has been shut down. During the countdown, the compressor cannot be restarted. AREC 11/12/21/22 ■ ANTIRECYCLING (300 sec): starts counting when the compressor (circuit1/2) has started. During the countdown, the compressor cannot be restarted. M.RT 11/12/21/22 ■ MINIMUM RUNNING TIME (120 sec) : starts counting when the compressor has started. During the countdown, the compressor will not be switched off by the thermostat function. 3 4 5 2–44 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.10 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Info menu 1 Introduction Using this menu, the additional information about the unit can be consulted. Time info This screen shows the actual time and date. _v 2 TIME INFO TIME: 22h05 DATE: WED Unit info Display Description TIME Actual time DATE Actual day and date 24/01/07 3 4 This screen shows the unit type. _ 5 UNIT INFO UNIT:AW-RH-250 C:SCL CIR:2 EVAP:1 COILC:2 EEV:P REF:R410A Display Description UNITTYPE: XX-XX-XX The first two letters tell that the unit is air cooled, the following two give the type of unit and the number indicates the capacity power of the unit. C: Indicates the type of the compressor. SCL : scroll CIRC: EVAP: COILC: Indicates the quantity of circuits, the evaporators and whether 1 or 2 coils are present per circuit. EEV Indicates the type of electronic expansion valve. P : PCASO EEV REFRIGERANT: XXXX Part 2 – Functional Description Refrigerant type : R410 a 2–45 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Remark: unit type explanation: 1 2 ESIE06-05 Unit info AW : Air-water cooled CO : Cooling only RH : Heat pump (refrigerant) This screen shows the unit type and options. _ UNIT INFO 2PUMP:Y FAN: ST VA:Y 3 HEATERTAPE:Y FAN DO ST:2 DO 4 Display Description FAN Indicates the type of the fans: INV:2 ST : ON/OFF fans INV : ON/OFF fans and inverter fans (OPIF or OPLN) 5 Software Info VA Indicates if the Volt-Ampere option is present on the unit. 2PUMP Indicates if the option dual pump is present on the unit FAN DO ST Indicates the digital outputs for the ON/OFF (standard) fans. DO INV Indicates the digital outputs for the inverter fans. This screen shows the software version. _^ SW INFO MAIN:SP1710C117 V2.3 EXT.:SP1559A019 REM.:SP1734C046 2–46 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Display Description V2.3 Software version 2.3 MAIN Software file for main PCB EXT. Software file for extension PCB REM. Software file for remote controller PCB 1 2 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–47 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.11 ESIE06-05 Input/Output Status Menu Introduction Using this menu you can read the status of the digital inputs and the status of the relay outputs. Digital Inputs This screen shows the status of the emergency stop and the flow switch. 2 _v DIGITAL INPUTS EMERGENCY STOP :OK FLOWSWITCH:FLOW OK 3 4 Digital Inputs Display Description EMERGENCY STOP Status of emergency stop FLOWSWITCH Status of flow switch This screen shows the status of the heater tape, pump interlock and pump. 5 _ DIG. INP/OUTPUTS HEATER TAPE:OFF PUMPINTERLOCK:CLOSED PUMP:ON 2–48 Display Description HEATER TAPE Status of the heater tape (if present) PUMPINTERLOCK Status of the pumpinterlock PUMP Status of the pump Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Digital Inputs The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers This screen shows the status of the reverse phase protection, high pressure switch and overcurrent relay of the compressors in circuit 1. _ DIGITAL INPUTS C1 REV.PH.PROT. :OK C1 1 2 HIGH PR.SW. :OK INT.L C11:OK C12:OK Digital Inputs 3 Display Description C1 REV. PH. PROT. Status of the reverse phase protection of circuit 1 C1 HIGH PR. SW. Status of the high pressure switch of circuit 1 INT. L. C11: C12 Status of the compressor interlock of compressors 1 and 2 of circuit 1 4 This screen shows the status of the fan overcurrent of each fanstep of circuit 1. _ DIGITAL INPUTS 5 C1 FAN OVERC.ST1:OK C1 FAN OVERC.ST2:OK C1 FAN OVERC.ST3:NOK Display Description C1 FAN OVERC. ST1 Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 1 of circuit 1 C1 FAN OVERC. ST2 Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 2 of circuit 1 C1 FAN OVERC. ST3 Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 3 of circuit 1 Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan step 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size). Part 2 – Functional Description 2–49 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Digital Inputs ESIE06-05 This screen shows the status of the reverse phase protection, high pressure switch and overcurrent relay of the compressors in circuit 2. _ DIGITAL INPUTS C2 REV.PH.PROT. :OK 2 C2 HIGH PR.SW. :OK INT.L C21:OK C22:OK 3 4 Digital inputs Display Description C2 REV.PH. PROT. Status of the reverse phase protection of circuit 2 C2 HIGH PR. SW. Status of the high pressure switch of circuit 2 INT. L C21: C22: Status of the compressor interlock of compressors 1 and 2 of circuit 2 This screen shows the status of the fan overcurrent of each fanstep of circuit 2. _ 5 DIGITAL INPUTS C2 FAN OVERC.ST1:OK C2 FAN OVERC.ST2:OK C2 FAN OVERC.ST3:NOK Display Description C1 FAN OVERC. ST1 Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 1 of circuit 2 C1 FAN OVERC. ST2 Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 2 of circuit 2 C1 FAN OVERC. ST3 Status of fan overcurrent of fanstep 3 of circuit 2 Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has Inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan steps 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size). 2–50 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Compressor Outputs The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen shows the status of the compressor outputs. _ COMP. OUTPUTS C11:ON C12:ON 2 C21:ON C22:ON Fan Inputs/Outputs Display Description C11 Compressor 1 status of circuit 1 C12 Compressor 2 status of circuit 1 C21 Compressor 1 status of circuit 2 C22 Compressor 2 status of circuit 2 3 4 This screen shows the status of the relay outputs of the fans from circuit 1. _ 5 FAN INP/OUTPUTS C1 FANSTEP 1:CLOSED C1 FANSTEP 2:CLOSED C1 FANSTEP 3:CLOSED Display Description C1 FANSTEP 1 Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 1 C1 FANSTEP 2 Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 1 C1 FANSTEP 3 Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 1 Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan steps 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size). Part 2 – Functional Description 2–51 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Fan Input/Outputs ESIE06-05 This screen shows the status of the relay outputs of the fans from circuit 2. _ FAN INP/OUTPUTS C2 FANSTEP 1:CLOSED 2 C2 FANSTEP 2:CLOSED C2 FANSTEP 3:CLOSED 3 4 Display Description C2 FANSTEP 1 Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 2 C2 FANSTEP 2 Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 2 C2 FANSTEP 3 Indicates the status of the fan contactor of circuit 2 Remark: When the unit has standard ON/OFF fans, 3 fan steps are present. When the unit has inverter and ON/OFF fans, only fan steps 1 or 1 and 3 are present (depending on unit size). Changeable Digital Inputs This screen shows the status of the digital inputs. 5 _ CHANG. DIG. INPUTS DI1 NONE DI2 NONE DI3 NONE 2–52 Display Description DI1 Changeable digital input 1 + status of input DI2 Changeable digital input 2 + status of input DI3 Changeable digital input 3 + status of input Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Changeable Digital Inputs/Outputs The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen shows the status of the digital inputs and outputs. _ CHANG. DIG. INPUTS DI4 NONE Changeable Digital Outputs DO1 SAFETY+W.(NO) :0 DO2 GEN.OPERATION :0 Display Description DI4 Changeable digital input 4 + status of input DO1 Changeable digital output 1 + status of output DO2 Changeable digital output 2 + status of output 2 3 4 This screen shows the status of the digital outputs. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS 5 DO3 NONE (OPEN) DO4 NONE (OPEN) DO5 NONE (OPEN) Display Description DO3 Changeable digital output 3 + status of output DO4 Changeable digital output 4 + status of output DO5 Changeable digital output 5 + status of output Part 2 – Functional Description 2–53 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Changeable Digital Outputs ESIE06-05 This screen shows the status of the digital output and analogue input. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS DO6 NONE (OPEN) 2 AI1 NONE AI2 NONE 3 4 Changeable Analogue Inputs Display Description DO6 Changeable digital output 6 + status of output AI1 Changeable analogue input 1 + value of input AI2 Changeable analogue input 2 + value of input This screen shows the status of the analogue inputs and outputs. _ CHANG. 5 INP/OUTPUTS AI3 NONE AI4 NONE AO1 NONE 2–54 Display Description AI3 Changeable analogue input 3 + value of input AI4 Changeable analogue input 4 + value of input AO1 Changeable analogue output 1 + value of output Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Communication The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen shows the status of the communication lines. _^ COMMUNICATION RS232 ONLINE:N 2 RS485 ONLINE:N DIII ONLINE:N Display Description RS232 ONLINE Indicates if the RS232 communication line is active. RS485 ONLINE Indicates if the RS485 communication line is active. DIII ONLINE Indicates if the DIII communication line is active. 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–55 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.12 ESIE06-05 User Password Menu Password 2 The user password is used to protect access to : ■ the user settings menu ■ the set points menu (if selected in the USER/ADVANCED menu) ■ the user password menu The password is a 4-digit number between “0000” and “9999”. The units leave the factory with user password “1234”. The service password overrides the user password (in case you don’t know or have forgotten the user password). 3 Enter Password In this screen the USER or SERVICE password must be entered to access the user password menu. Use the h and g keys to select the password. ENTER PASSWORD 4 PASSWORD: 0000 TO LOGIN 5 Log in/ Log out In this screen the user can log out of the controller. When a password is entered to enter a menu, the user is logged on at this password level for a specified time (USER/ADVANCED menu). When the controller is not touched for “LOGOUT” time, the controller will automatically log out. A password is needed again to access the menus. _v LOGIN/LOGOUT MENU LOGIN STATUS:USER LOGOUT? NO 2–56 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Display Description LOGINSTATUS : Indication of password level. USER: User is logged in with user password 2 SERVICE: User is logged in with service password LOGOUT Select to log out of the controller. NO: Remain logged on with the current password level. YES: Log out of the controller. The password will be requested again to enter a menu. In this screen you can change the password. Use the 3 h and g keys to select the new password. 4 _^ LOGIN/LOGOUT MENU CHANGE PASSWORD NEW PASSWORD: 0000 5 CONFIRM: 0000 Display Description NEW PASSWORD : To set a new password CONFIRM : To confirm the new password Part 2 – Functional Description 2–57 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.13 ESIE06-05 Network Menu The network menu is only accessible when MS OPTION is set to “YES” in the SERVICE/DICN menu. Network This screen shows the temperatures of the network (DICN) system. 2 NETWORK _v COOL. INLSP1:012.0 ° C INLET WATER:013.6 ° C 3 4 Display Description COOL Cooling operation is selected. HEAT Heating operation is selected. INLSP1/ INLSP2 Gives the setpoint you selected to use (dual setpoint if selected) 5 INLSP1 : inlet water setpoint 1 INLSP2 : inlet water setpoint 2 (dual setpoint) INLET WATER Network Overview 2–58 Inlet temperature of the inlet water on the master unit This screen shows the status and capacity of all the units in the DICN network. _^M:NORMAL CAP:000% SL1:NORMAL CAP:000% SL2:NORMAL CAP:000% SL3:NORMAL CAP:000% Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Display Description Possible settings “M: Displays status of Master (as selected in USER/DICN settings menu) NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/ SAFETY CAP: % Displays the capacity of the master SL1: Displays status of the slave (as selected in USER/DICN settings menu) CAP: % Displays the capacity of the slave 1 SL2: Displays status of the slave (as selected in USER/DICN settings menu) CAP: % Displays the capacity of the slave 2 SL3: Displays status of the slave (as selected in USER/DICN settings menu) CAP: % Displays the capacity of the slave 3 1 2 NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/ SAFETY 3 NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/ SAFETY NORMAL/STANDBY/DISCONN/ SAFETY 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–59 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.14 ESIE06-05 Cool / Heat Menu Password You need the user password to enter this menu. ENTER PASSWORD 2 PASSWORD: 0000 TO LOGIN 3 Cooling/ Heating This screen allows you to choose between cooling and heating. _^ 4 COOLING/HEATING MODE:COOLING 5 Possible Mode: Cooling mode: Thermostat function on evaporator Heating mode: Thermostat function on condenser 2–60 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 2.15 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Service Menu 1 Operational Information The service menu is accessible through the last screen of the user settings menu. To enter the service menu you need the service password. Please contact your distributor for this password. It is only possible to access the service menu when the unit is “OFF”. Password You need the password to enter this menu. 2 ENTER SERVICE 3 PASSWORD: 0000 TO LOGIN Remark: When the unit is operating, it is not possible to enter the service menu. Service Setting Menu h and Use the of your choice. g keys to scroll through the menu and press the q key to enter the submenu 4 5 Topic See page 2.15.1 Thermostat 2–62 2.15.2 Compressor 2–63 2.15.3 Fan 2–65 2.15.4 Pump 2–68 2.15.5 EEV 2–69 2.15.6 Input Output 2–78 2.15.7 Communication 2–85 2.15.8 DICN 2–88 2.15.9 Safety 2–90 2.15.10 History 2–97 2.15.11 Advanced 2–97 2.15.12 Defrost 2–99 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–61 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 2.15.1 Thermostat Thermostat settings for V2.1 This screen allows modification of the thermostat settings for software version V2.1. THERMOSTAT _ 2 STEPLENGTH A:04.0 ° C C:00.4 ° C RESTART COND.:Ax2 3 Settings: 4 A : Step difference value, used for the thermostat function C : Step length value, used for the thermostat function RESTART COND : Restart condition parameter, used to restart the unit after a forced thermo off in outlet mode. Possible settings: Ax1 Ax2 5 Ax3 Ax4 Remark: The restart condition parameter A in this function is the same as the programmed step difference value A. Thermostat settings for V2.2 or higher This screen allows modification of the thermostat settings for software version V2.2. THERMOSTAT _ STEPLENGTH A:04.0 ° C C:00.4 ° C RESTART COND.:4.0° Cx2 Settings: A : Step difference value, used for the thermostat function C : Step length value, used for the thermostat function RESTART COND : Restart condition parameter (default 4°C), used to restart the unit after a normal thermo off in outlet mode. Restart condition value x 2: Restart condition parameter (default 2), used to restart the unit after a forced thermo off in outlet mode. 2–62 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Possible settings: 1 Restart condition value x 1 Restart condition value x 2 Restart condition value x 3 2 Restart condition value x 4 2.15.2 Compressor Compressor Start 3 This screen allows modification of the fan on lag time. _v 4 COMPR. START FAN ON LAG TIME:003s 5 Setting: FAN ON LAG TIME : Time delay between switching unit/fans ON and compressor start These screens allow modification of the total compressor running hours, cool/heat running hours and compressor starts. _ RUN.H-COMPR STARTS _ RUN.H-COMPR STARTS C11RH:00000hCS:00000 C21RH:00000hCS:00000 RUN.H COOL-HEAT RUN.H COOL-HEAT C11C: 00000hH:00000h C21C: 00000hH:00000h These screens are only visible if the unit has 2 circuits. Part 2 – Functional Description _ RUN.H-COMPR STARTS _^RUN.H-COMPR STARTS C12RH:00000hCS:00000 C22RH:00000hCS:00000 RUN.H COOL-HEAT RUN.H COOL-HEAT C12C: 00000hH:00000h C22C: 00000hH:00000h 2–63 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 Settings: 1 2 3 RUN. H-COMPR. STARTS : Title, running hours and compressor starts CxxRH : Define or change total running hours of this compressor CS : Define or change total compressor starts of this compressor RUN. H COOL-HEAT : Title, running hours in cooling and heating mode CxxC : Define or change running hours in cooling mode of this compressor H : Define or change running hours in heating mode of this compressor Remark: ■ These parameters need to be entered (changed) when replacing a PCB or compressor. ■ Running hours COOL/HEAT are only visible with EWYQ units. 4 5 2–64 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 2.15.3 Fan Fan Control Ambient 1 This screen allows modification of the ambient fan control used during the startup of the chiller. _v FAN CONTROL 2 AMBIENT TIMER:070s AMBIENT SETP A:15.0 ° C AMBIENT SETP B:05.0 ° C 3 Settings: Fan Control AMBIENT TIMER : Time when the fan control based on ambient temperature is used at the startup of a circuit AMBIENT SETP A : Setpoint for high fan speed used in ambient fan control AMBIENT SETP B : Setpoint for medium fan speed used in ambient fan control 4 This screen allows modification of the fan high pressure setpoints. _v FANST. 5 FAN CONTROL A:18.9b/28.0b FANST. B1:32.4b FANST. B2:27.5b/35.0b Settings: FANST. A : High pressure setpoint for fan control -First value: setpoint used for standard ON/OFF fans and units with inverter fans -Second value: setpoint used for inverter fans working in LOW NOISE mode FANST. B1 : High pressure setpoint for fan control with standard ON/OFF fans FANST B2 : High pressure setpoint for fan control -First value: setpoint used for standard ON/OFF fans and units with inverter fans -Second value: setpoint used for inverter fans working in LOW NOISE mode Part 2 – Functional Description 2–65 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Fan Control ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the fan high pressure setpoints. _^ FAN CONTROL FANST. B3:35.0b/37.0b 2 UNLOAD CONST:02.6b COMPAR. PRESSURE:01.9b Settings: 3 FANST. B3 : High pressure setpoint for fan control -First value: setpoint used for standard ON/OFF fans and units with inverter fans -Second value: setpoint used for inverter fans working in LOW NOISE mode 4 5 Fan Control Antihunting UNLOAD CONST : Parameter used to calculate the high pressure fan switching point if 1 compressor of this circuit is in operation. COMPAR. PRESSURE : Parameter to specify extra condition for fan up/down. This screen allows modification of the anti-hunting timer and reset conditions. _ FAN CONTROL HUNTING PR TIM:0720s RESET CONDTEMP:02.0 ° C RESET CONDAMB.:03.0 ° C Settings: HUNTING PR TIME : When a fanstep changes with ± 1 fanstep and it becomes the same fanstep within HUNTING PR TIME, then the anti-hunting function will be enabled. - ON/OFF fans: 720s - Inv. fans: 240s 2–66 RESET CONDITION TEMP : When outlet water temp. rises with 2°C, the anti-hunting function will be reset. RESET CONDITION AMBIENT : When the ambient temp. rises with 3°C, the anti-hunting function will be reset. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Fan Control Timers The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the fan timers. _^ FAN CONTROL COMPRESSION RATIO:1.6 2 LOADUP TIM:0015s LOADDOWN TIM:0090s Settings: COMPRESSION RATIO : Used for pressure difference surveillance control LOADUP TIM : Load up time, minimum time between 2 fan up steps LOADDOWN TIM : Load down time, minimum between 2 fan down steps 3 4 Remark: Different default timers are used for ON/OFF and inverter fans LOADUP TIME : ON/OFF fans: 90s Inv. fans: 15s LOADDOWN TIME : ON/OFF fans: 180s 5 Inv. fans: 90s Fan inverter Frequency This screen allows modification of the fan inverter frequency for each fan step. FAN INV FREQ ST4:50HZ ST3:45HZ ST2:30HZ ST1:20HZ Settings: ST1 : Frequency used for inverter fan step 1 ST2 : Frequency used for inverter fan step 2 ST3 : Frequency used for inverter fan step 3 ST4 : Frequency used for inverter fan step 4 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–67 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 2.15.4 Pump Pump Control This screen allows modification of the manual pump control and the pump running hours. _ 2 PUMPCONTROL MAN.PUMP:OFF 2ND:OFF RUNN. HOURS RHP1:00000hP2:00000h 3 Settings: 4 5 MAN. PUMP : Manual switching on pump 1 or 2 RUNN. HOURS RHP1/ P2 : Running hours of pump 1 and pump 2. When the software is updated or the PCB is replaced, these running hours have to be entered in the new configuration. Remark: When the manual pump control is activated, the pump will switch OFF (disable manual control) when you leave the Service menu. Pump Control with low water temperature This screen allows modification of the pump control with low water temperatures when unit is switched off. _ PUMPCONTROL IF UNIT OFF AND LOW WATER TEMP THEN PUMP :OFF Settings: OFF : Pump function is disabled (default setting) ON : Pump function is enabled. Remark: This screen is only visible when no heater tape is installed. 2–68 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 2.15.5 EEV This menu allows modification of the EEV settings. The EEV parameter values used in the following screens are not the same for all units. Each unit has his own parameters and should not been changed. EEV Control This screen allows modification of the EEV additional screen setting. _v 1 2 EEV CONTROL SCREENS: N 3 Setting: SCREENS EEV Control Steps : Used to select whether the additional EEV screens in the Readout menu have to be displayed or not. (C1/C2 Temp readout screen) 4 This screen allows modification of the EEV step pulses. 5 _ EEV CONTROL STEP RANGE:2625pls INITIAL STEP:0132pls ALL CLOSE ADD:160pls Settings: ■ STEP RANGE : Upper limit of max. opening pulses of EV ( o~2625 pls) ■ INITIAL STEP : Open- closing steps during initialisation process at power-on ■ ALL CLOSED ADD : Additional pulses added to the close pulses. Close pulses at power on: 2625 + 160 = 2785 Close pulses at compressor stop: current output pulses + 160 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–69 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 EEV Control Adjust Cool / Heat ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the adjust cool/heat pulses. _ EEV CONTROL ADJUST COOL:0800pls 2 ADJUST HEAT:0300pls SAMPLING TIME:003s Settings: 3 ADJUST COOL : After the initializing process, if the compressor starts up in cooling mode, it goes to the specified output for the electronic expansion valve. After reaching above ADJUST COOL EV opening, it will go to normal superheat control. ADJUST HEAT : After the initializing process, if the compressor starts up in heating mode, it goes to the specified output for the electronic expansion valve. After reaching above ADJUST HEAT EV opening, it will go to normal superheat control. SAMPLING TIME : Sampling time for the expansion valve control. 4 5 Low Ambient EEV Control This screen allows modification of the Low Ambient function. _ EEV CONTROL LOW AMB.CONDITION ADJUST HEAT:150pls HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0 ° C Settings: 2–70 ADJUST HEAT : After initializing process, if the compressor starts up in heating mode and the ambient temperature is below the HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, it goes to the specified output for the electronic expansion value. After reaching above ADJUST HEAT EV opening, it will go to normal superheat control. HEAT AMB. CONST : Ambient setpoint for the low ambient condition function. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Superheat Control The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 These screens allow modification of the superheat control. _ EEV CONTROL _ EEV CONTROL TRANSIENT TIME:300s TIP COOL DRY:002s KP COOL DRY:01.6 TIP HEAT DRY:003s 2 KP HEAT DRY:02.2 _ EEV CONTROL _ EEV CONTROL KP COOL WET:01.8 KP COOL WET:002s KP HEAT WET:02.6 KP HEAT WET:003s _ EEV CONTROL _ 3 EEV CONTROL KP COOL NORMAL:03.0 KP COOL NORMAL:020s KP HEAT NORMAL:03.0 KP HEAT NORMAL:015s 4 Remark: Do not change these parameters because they have a direct influence on the superheat control. EEV Feed Forward Control Ambient Setpoints _ EEV CONTROL FF CONTROL TIME:03s COOL AMB.CONST:005.0 ° C HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0 ° C Settings: FF CONTROL TIME : If the compressor load changes during thermostat control, the controller will change the EV opening after the “FF CONTROL TIME”. COOL AMB. CONST : Ambient setpoint in cooling mode for the feed forward control when the compressor load goes up or down. HEAT AMB. CONST : Ambient setpoint in heating mode for the feed forward control when the compressor load goes up or down. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–71 5 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 EEV Normal Feed Forward Control ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in cooling mode. _ 2 COOL EEV CONTROL FF NORMAL UP:1.3 FF NORMAL DOWN:1.5 Settings: 3 FF CONTROL UP : If the compressor load goes up, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF CONTROL UP” FF CONTROL DOWN : 4 5 If the compressor load goes down, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF CONTROL DOWN” EEV Low Ambient Feed Forward Control This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in cooling mode with low ambient temperatures. _ COOL EEV CONTROL FF LOW AMB.UP :1.1 FF LOW AMB.DOWN:1.2 Settings: FF LOW AMB. UP : If the compressor load goes up AND the ambient temperature is below the COOL AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF LOW AMB. UP” FF LOW AMB. DOWN : If the compressor load goes down AND the ambient temperature is below the COOL AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF LOW AMB. DOWN” 2–72 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 EEV Feed Forward Control The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in Heating mode. _ HEAT EEV CONTROL FF NORMAL UP 2 :1.5 FF NORMAL DOWN:1.7 Settings: FF CONTROL UP : If the compressor load goes up, the controller will change the EEV opening. 3 Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF CONTROL UP” FF CONTROL DOWN : If the compressor load goes down, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF CONTROL DOWN” EEV Feed Forward Low Ambient Control 4 This screen allows modification of the EEV FF control in cooling heating with low ambient temperatures. _ 5 HEAT EEV CONTROL FF LOW AMB.UP :2.2 FF LOW AMB.DOWN:2.2 Settings: FF LOW AMB. UP : If the compressor load goes up AND the ambient temperature is below the HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses x “FF LOW AMB. UP” FF LOW AMB. DOWN : If the compressor load goes down AND the ambient temperature is below the HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change the EEV opening. Output pulses= Current pulses / “FF LOW AMB. DOWN” Part 2 – Functional Description 2–73 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Superheat Limits or C1 in Cooling ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 1 in cooling mode. _ EEV CONTROL C1SH L LIM COOL:04.0 ° C 2 C1SH U LIM COOL:08.5 ° C Settings: 3 C1 SH L LIM COOL : Superheat lower limit in cooling mode for circuit 1 C1 SH U LIM COOL : Superheat upper limit in cooling mode for circuit 1 Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this between an upper and lower superheat limit. 4 Superheat Limits of C1 in Heating This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 1 in heating mode. _ 5 EEV CONTROL C1SH L LIM HEAT:03.0 ° C C1SH U LIM HEAT:08.0 ° C Settings: C1 SH L LIM HEAT : Superheat lower limit in heating mode for circuit 1 C1 SH U LIM HEAT : Superheat upper limit in heating mode for circuit 1 Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this between an upper and lower superheat limit. 2–74 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Superheat Limits of C2 in Cooling The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 2 in cooling mode. _ EEV CONTROL C2SH L LIM COOL:04.0 ° C 2 C2SH U LIM COOL:08.5 ° C Settings: C2 SH L LIM COOL : Superheat lower limit in cooling mode for circuit 2 C2 SH U LIM COOL : Superheat upper limit in cooling mode for circuit 2 3 Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this between an upper and lower superheat limit. Superheat Limits of C2 in Heating 1 4 This screen allows modification of the upper and lower limit of the suction superheat of circuit 2 in heating mode. _ EEV CONTROL 5 C2SH L LIM HEAT:03.0 ° C C2SH U LIM HEAT:08.0 ° C Settings: C2 SH L LIM HEAT : Superheat lower limit in heating mode for circuit 2 C2 SH U LIM HEAT : Superheat upper limit in heating mode for circuit 2 Remark: The suction super heat target changes according to the discharge super heat. However, this between an upper and lower superheat limit. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–75 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 EEV Fan Up/Down Control ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the EEV fan up/down control. _ EEV CONTROL FAN DOWN PLS:050pls 2 FAN UP PLS:200pls Settings: 3 FAN DOWN PLS FAN UP PLS 4 EEV Low Pressure Control : When the Fan step goes DOWN, immediately close EV with 20 pulses. : When the Fan step goes UP, immediately open EV with 20 pulses. This screen allows modification of the EEV Low Pressure Control in cooling mode. _ 5 EEV CONTROL LP PR.SETP COOL:2.3b LP PR.RESET COOL:3.0b LP ADD COOL:0200pls Settings: LP PR. SETP COOL : When the LP drops below LP PR. SETP COOL (2.3 bar) add 200 pulses to the actual electronic expansion valve position. LP PR. RESET COOL : When the LP rises back above LP PR. RESET COOL (3.0 bar) reset the function and stop adding additional pulses. LP ADD COOL 2–76 : Additional pulses that will be added when the low pressure is below the low pressure prevention setpoint in Cooling mode. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 EEV Low Pressure Control The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the EEV Low Pressure Control in heating mode. _^ EEV CONTROL LP PR.SETP HEAT:2.3b 2 LP PR.RESET HEAT:3.0b LP ADD HEAT:0200pls Settings: LP PR. SETP HEAT : 3 When the LP drops below LP PR. SETP HEAT (2.3 bar) add 200 pulses to the actual electronic expansion valve position. LP PR. RESET HEAT : When the LP rises back above LP PR. RESET HEAT (3.0 bar) reset the function and stop adding additional pulses. LP ADD HEAT : 4 Additional pulses that will be added when the low pressure is below the low pressure prevention setpoint in Heating mode. 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–77 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 2.15.6 Input Output Unit Options This screen allows modification of the options installed on the unit. 2 _v UNIT OPTIONS FAN:ST VA:N 2PUMP:N HEATERTAPE:N CONFIRM? N 3 Settings: FAN VA:N/Y 4 : ST: Fantype is ON/OFF fans : INV: Fantype is a combination of ON/OFF fans and Inverter fans : Select if Volt-Ampere meters (option) is installed. When Y is selected, an additional screen will appear in the readout menu. 5 2PUMP:Y/N : Select if 2nd pump is installed HEATERTAPE:Y/N : Select if heatertape is installed CONFIRM? : • • Changeable Digital Inputs Confirm settings, when an option setting has been changed. When a setting has been changed without confirmation the 0UA: OP. NOT CONFIRMED alarm will be displayed and can only be reset after confirmation. When a main PCB has been changed or reprogrammed with new software, the OU4: OP. NOT CONFIRMED will be displayed and can only be reset after confirmation. This screen allows modification of the changeable digital inputs. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS DI1:NONE DI2:NONE DI3:NONE 2–78 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Settings: DI1 : To set the digital input 1 DI2 : To set the digital input 2 DI3 : To set the digital input 3 1 2 When programming this input, check the field wiring to see if it has been installed correctly. Possible settings for Chang. Dig. Inputs ■ None ■ Status ■ Dual setpoint ■ Remote ON/OFF ■ Remote Cool/Heat ■ Cap. Limit 25% (only double circuit) ■ Cap. Limit 50% ■ Cap. Limit 75% (only double circuit) ■ Cap. Limit Set ■ Free cooling request ■ Low noise (only with inverter fans) ■ Fan forced on Part 2 – Functional Description 3 4 5 2–79 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Changeable Digital Input and Outputs ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the changeable digital input and outputs. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS DI4:NONE 2 DO1:SAFETY+W.(NO) DO2:GEN.OPERATION Settings: 3 DI4 : To set the digital input 4 DO1 : To set the digital output 1 DO2 : To set the digital output 2 When programming this input or one of these outputs, check the field wiring to see if the input/output has been installed correctly. 4 Possible settings for Chang. Dig. Outputs 5 2–80 ■ None (open) ■ Closed ■ 2nd pump ■ 100% capacity ■ Full capacity ■ Free cooling ■ Gen. Operation ■ Safety+W (NO) / Safety + W (NC) ■ Safety (NO) / Safety (NC) ■ C1/C2 safety ■ Warning ■ C1/C2 operation ■ 0% capacity ■ Cooling ■ Heating ■ Defrost Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Changeable Digital Outputs The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the changeable digital outputs. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS DO3:NONE (OPEN) 2 DO4:NONE (OPEN) DO5:NONE (OPEN) Settings: DO3 : To set the digital output 3 DO4 : To set the digital output 4 DO5 : To set the digital output 5 3 4 When programming this output, check the field wiring to see if the output has been installed correctly. 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–81 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Changeable Digital Output and Analogue Input ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the changeable digital output and analogue inputs. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS DO6:NONE (OPEN) 2 AI1:NONE AI1 TYPE:0-20mA Settings: 3 4 DO6 : To set the digital output 6 AI1 : To set the analogue input 1 AI1 TYPE : To set the type of the analogue input 1 When programming this digital output or analogue input, check the field wiring to see if the output or analogue input has been installed correctly. The changeable analogue inputs can be programmed as analogue inputs OR as digital inputs. 1. Select the analogue input status 5 2. Specify the type of the used signal Possible settings analogue inputs ■ None ■ Status ■ Floating setpoints ■ Temperature Possible settings analogue input as digital input ■ DI STATUS ■ DI REM. COOL / HEAT ■ DI CAP LIM 25% / 50% / 75% ■ DI CAP LIM SET ■ DI FREE COOLING Remark: The digital input will close when a 5 V DC signal is given to the controller. 2–82 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Changeable Analogue Inputs The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 These screens allow modification of the analogue inputs. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS AI2:NONE AI3 TYPE:0-20mA AI2 TYPE:0-20mA AI4:NONE AI3:NONE AI4 TYPE:0-20mA 2 Settings: AI2 : To set the analogue input 2 AI2 TYPE : To set the type of the analogue input 2 AI3 : To set the analogue input 3 AI3 TYPE : To set the type of the analogue input 3 AI4 : To set the analogue input 4 AI4 TYPE : To set the type of the analogue input 4 3 4 When programming this analogue input, check the field wiring to see if the input has been installed correctly. Changeable Analogue Output 5 This screen allows modification of the analogue output. _ CHANG. INP/OUTPUTS AO1:NONE AO1 TYPE:0-20mA Settings: AO1 : To set the analogue output 1 AO1 TYPE : To set the type of the analogue output 1 Possible settings for the analogue output. ■ None ■ Unit capacity Part 2 – Functional Description 2–83 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Sensor Offset For Software V2.1 ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the sensor offset for software version V2.1. _ NTC/PR. SENSORS SELECT:PCB1 AI1 2 NTC:TYPE1 OFFSET:0.0 ° C Settings: 3 4 Sensor Offset For Software V2.2 or higher SELECT: PCB1 AI1 : All the sensors (temp. and press.) connected to the PCB1, PCB2 or expansion boards can be selected. NTC : This will display the type of sensor. OFFSET : An offset can be done for this sensor. This screen allows modification of the sensor offset for software version V2.2. _ NTC/PR. SENSORS SEL:MAINPCB1 AI X33A 5 NTC:TYPE1 OFFSET:0.0 ° C Settings: 2–84 SEL: MAINPCB AI X33A : All the sensors (temp. and press.) connected to the PCB1, PCB2 or expansion boards can be selected. NTC : This will display the type of sensor. OFFSET : An offset can be done for this sensor. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.15.7 Communication Communication PCB Information This screen shows additional information about the extension PCB, communication PCB and communication P1 P2 PCB. _v 2 COMMUNICATION EXT. PCB:4SSR+HIC 3 COMM. PCB:DIII+SER COMM.P1P2 PCB:NONE EEV PCB Information Display Description EXT. PCB Extension PCB with 4 solid state relays and hybrid type (PCB with Analogue outputs) COMM. PCB Communication PCB with DIII and serial communication COMM. P1 P2 PCB None (not used) 5 This screen shows additional information about the EEV PCB. _ COMMUNICATION PCB EEV. PCB:UNI POLAR Display Description EEV. PCB UNI POLAR, PCB type used for EEV control. Part 2 – Functional Description 4 2–85 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Serial Communication Parameters ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the serial communication parameters. _ COMMUNICATION PCB RS232:NONE 2 BR:19200bps Parameters for the RS232 communication: 3 ■ BNS Communication Parameters Not used in multiple scroll units. This screen allows modification of the communication PCB parameters (BMS settings) _ 4 COMMUNICATION PCB RS485:NONE ADDR:01 BR:19200bps PARITY:EVEN (1STOPb) 5 Settings: RS485 2–86 : ■ NONE: communication disabled ■ MODBUS : MODBUS communication enabled ADDR : Address of the unit in the BMS system BR : Indicates the speed of communication (19200/9600/4800/2400/1200) PARITY : ■ NONE (2 stop bit) ■ EVEN (1stop bit) ■ ODD (1 stop bit) Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 D III Communication Parameters The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the communication PCB parameters (DICN settings, ...). _ COMMUNICATION PCB DIII:YES ADDR:--- 2 POWER:Y AIRNET:01 AUTO:Y Settings: D III: : ADDR : POWER : 3 ■ YES: D III communication enabled ■ No : D III communication disabled ■ ---: No address selected ■ “1-00” to “8-15”: address selected ■ If a D-BACS device is present (iManager, ...) DIII power parameter: “N” on all units ■ If no D-BACS device is present only for DICN DIII power parameter: “Y” on only 1 unit (Master unit) AIRNET : Airnet address (1-64) AUTO : ■ YES: Chiller send information automatic to Airnet ■ NO: Airnet must request chiller data each time 4 5 Remark: The DICN functionality can be used in combination with the D-BACS functionality. This screen allows modification of the BMS control setting. _^ COMMUNICATION BMSCONTROL ALLOWED:N Settings: BMS CONTROL ALLOWED Part 2 – Functional Description : ■ If set to Y (yes), the unit can be commanded and configured from a supervisory system. ■ If set to N (no), the supervisory system can only read out values but cannot modify them. 2–87 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 1 2.15.8 DICN DICN settings This screen allows modification of the DICN settings. 2 _v DICN SETTING MS OPTION:N UNIT:MASTER 3 NR OF SLAVES:1 Settings: MS OPTION : 4 N: DICN is disabled Y: DICN is enabled UNIT : MASTER: unit is selected as master unit SLAVE: unit is selected as slave unit NR OF SLAVES 5 : The number of slaves in the system has to be defined. (only on the master unit) Remark: NR OF SLAVES will only be visible when the unit is programmed as MASTER unit. Slave addresses This screen allows modification of the slave addresses. _ DICN SETTING ADD SL1:--- Settings: Only on MASTER unit ■ ADD SL1 : Specify the D III address programmed in slave 1 ■ ADD SL2 : Specify the D III address programmed in slave 2 (if present) ■ ADD SL3 : Specify the D III address programmed in slave 3 (if present) Example: ADD SL1:1-01 2–88 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Master Settings The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the master unit settings. _ MASTER SETTING PRIORITY:0-2 2 STEPLENGTH:1.5 ° C STANDBY IF MAX CAP:Y Settings: PRIORITY: 0-2 : Select Unit priority - stepL Priority STEPLENGHTTH: 1,5° : parameter used in the formula to calculate the loading priority STANDBY IF MAX CAP : N: When all “normal” units are at maximum capacity 3 standby unit will start up to reach the setpoint. Y: When all “normal” units are at maximum capacity standby unit will not start up (only on error on other units) DICN Thermostat 5 This screen allows modification of the DICN thermostat settings. _^ DICN THERMOSTAT STEPLENGTH A:04.0 ° C B:03.6 ° C B:00.4 ° C Step length settings: A : Step difference value A, used for the DICN thermostat function B : Step difference value B, used for the DICN thermostat function C : Step difference value C, used for the DICN thermostat function Remark: DICN thermostat control is only possible on Inlet control. Part 2 – Functional Description 4 2–89 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 1 2.15.9 Safety 2 MOW and no flow settings This screen allows modification of the minimum outlet water setpoint and the flow alarm. _v SAFETY MIN.OUTL.WATER:005.0 ° C IF NO FLOW AFTER PUMPLEADTIME:ALARM 3 Settings: MIN. OUTL. WATER : The minimum outlet water can be selected in this menu. When using glycol, this setting has to be changed. Units with OPZL (glycol operation) have special software with a lower MOW setpoint range. IF NO FLOW AFTER PUMPLEADTIME : ALARM: The unit will go into alarm and manual reset is needed. 4 STANDBY: The unit will wait to start until the flow is resorted. 5 HP Setback and Inverter Fan Mask Settings This screen allows modification of the high pressure setback and the inverter fan mask time. _ SAFETY HPSETB:37.4b DIFF:0.4b MASK INVFAN SAF:120s Settings: HPSETB : High pressure set back safety. When the HP rises above the setpoint, the unit will switch OFF 1 compressor of this circuit. DIFF : When the high pressure setback is active and the pressure drops below HPSETB-DIFF, normal operation and compressor can be added. MASK INVFAN SAF : Mask time of the inverter fan safety. The inverter safety will be displayed after 120sec. Remark: MASK INVFAN SAF will only be visible when the unit has OPIF or OPLN. 2–90 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Reset Safety Setting The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the reset safety setting. _ SAFETY PASSWORD NEEDED TO 2 RESET SAFETIES: NONE Settings: 3 Select if a password is needed to reset a safety Fan Overcurrent Setting For V2.1 NONE : No password is needed to reset a safety. USER PASSWORD : User password is needed to reset a safety SERVICE PASSWORD : Service password is needed to reset a safety. 4 This screen allows modification of the fan overcurrent safety for software version V2.1. _ SAFETY 5 FAN OVERC.:WARNING Settings: FAN OVERC.: WARNING : When a fan overcurrent occurs, a warning will be displayed, but the unit will continue operation. SAFETY : When a fan overcurrent occurs, a safety will be displayed and the circuit will be switched off. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–91 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Fan Overcurrent Setting For V2.2 ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the fan overcurrent safety for software version V2.2. _ SAFETY FAN OVERC.:WARNING FREEZE UP OW:DIS&SAF 2 Settings: 3 FAN OVERC.: 4 WARNING: When a fan overcurrent occurs, a warning will be displayed, but the unit will continue operation. SAFETY: When a fan overcurrent occurs, a safety will be displayed and the circuit will be switched off. FREEZE UP OW: Freeze up safety on outlet water temperature DIS&SAF Use the same logic as the freeze up safety on refrigerant gas alarm). temperature (second time in 30 min DISABLE Same function as software version V2.1. Unit will shut down on freeze up but will restart automatic and no alarm is displayed. 5 Unit Status during Safety This screen allows modification of the unit status when a safety is active. _ SAFETY IF UNITSAFETY THEN PUT UNIT OFF:NO Settings: IF UNIT SAFETY THEN PUT UNIT OFF: 2–92 YES: Normal function. The after safety unit has to be restarted. NO: Used with D-bacs control. When the unit switches off the after safety, there is a possibility that the safety can not be seen by the D-bacs control. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Warning Settings The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers This screen allows modification of the setting if during the high pressure set back function or the compressor protection function, a warning has to be displayed. _ 1 WARNING IF HP SETBACK:N 2 IF COMPR PR:N Settings: 3 IF HP SETBACK: N: If the unit is in the HP setback function, no warning will be displayed Y: If the unit is in the HP setback function, a warning will be displayed IF COMPR PR: 4 N: If the unit is in the compressor protection function, no warning will be displayed. Y: If the unit is in the compressor protection function, a warning will be displayed. High Discharge Safety Settings This screen allows modification of the high discharge temperature setpoint. 5 _ SAFETY HIGH DIS.SAFETY:135 ° C Settings: HIGH DIS. SAFETY Part 2 – Functional Description : When the discharge temperature of a compressor rises above the setpoint, the circuit will shut down and a HIGH DISCHARGE TEMP. ERROR will be displayed. 2–93 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 LP Setpoint and Mask Timers ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the low pressure alarm setpoint and the low pressure mask timers. _ SAFETY LP SETP. C:1.2b H:0.5b 2 FAN LP MASK:030s COMPR LP MASK:030s Settings: 3 LP SETPOINT: If the low pressure drops below the LP setpoint 4 5 stop the unit immediately on LP Error. ■ Cooling mode: 1,2 bar ■ Heating mode: 0,5 bar FAN LP MASK: Mask time of 30sec from fan switching (only fan Load up) COMPR LP MASK: Mask time of 30sec from 1st compressor start-up (no masking at 2nd compressor start) Freeze-up Settings This screen allows modification of the freeze-up safety settings. _ FREEZE UP SAFETY FREEZE UP DIS:004.0 ° C RESET:005.0 ° C Settings: FREEZE UP DIS: Freeze-up disabling setpoint, used for: ■ Freeze-up protection = FREEZE UP DIS setpoint ■ Freeze-up Prevention = FREEZE UP DIS setpoint +0,5°C RESET: Reset value of freeze-up prevention / protection 2–94 ■ Freeze-up protection : Above RESET value, possible to reset freeze-up safety ■ Freeze-up prevention : Above RESET value, back to normal thermostat control Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Anti-freeze Function The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the anti-freeze function by pump operation and refrigerant temperature. _ FREEZE UP SAFETY PUMP ON SETP.:001.5 ° C 2 REFR TEMP SET:-03.5 ° C Settings: Discharge Gas Safety PUMP ON SETP : Setpoint of the anti-freeze function by pump operation REFR TEMP SET : Setpoint of the anti-freeze function by refrigerant gas temperature 3 4 These screens allow modification of the discharge gas safety. _ DISCH GAS SAFETY START CONTROL:110 °C _ DISCH GAS SAFETY CONTROL EEV:001pls STOP CONTROL:109 °C 5 RESET TO NORMAL:100 °C Settings: START CONTROL : Setpoint of the discharge gas safety, start of adding extra EXV opening STOP CONTROL : Setpoint of the discharge gas stop condition, stop of adding extra EXV opening RESET TO NORMAL : Reset setpoint of the discharge gas safety, stop of the function and switching back to normal EEV control. CONTROL EEV : Setting of the additional pulses that will be added to the EXV opening during the discharge gas safety function Part 2 – Functional Description 2–95 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Compressor and Unit Restart Timers ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the compressor timers and unit restart timer. _^ RESTART SAFETY GRD:03m 2 AREC:005m RESTART POWERON:030s REF GRD EXTEND:12m Settings: 3 GRD : Guard timer setting AREC : Anti recycling timer setting RESTART POWER ON : When the unit is powered up after a power failure / main switch, the unit can restart (automatic restart) after 30 sec. REF GRD EXTEND 4 Refrigerant guard extendtimer, when unit is switched off on refrigerant gas temperature safety. The compressor can only restart after 12 min (default). 5 2–96 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 2.15.10 History Extra screen 1 This screen allows modification of the extra screen parameter that enables or disables the history logging function. _ 2 HISTORY EXTRA SCREENS:N 3 Settings: EXTRA SCREENS : Enable or disable the history logging function 4 N: Log data will not be displayed in the history menu. Y: Log data will be displayed in the history menu. 5 2.15.11 Advanced Auto Restart This screen allows modification of the auto restart function. _v ADVANCED AUTORESTART:YES Settings: Auto re-start: YES: The unit will re-start after a power failure. NO: The unit will not re-start after a power failure. Manual re-start is needed on the controller. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–97 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 Simulation Parameters ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the simulation function, used on simulation boards. _^ ADVANCED SIMULATION:NO 2 AI:0 EEV:0 Settings: 3 ■ SIMULATION: NO: Use of software on real unit YES: Use of software on simulation board ■ 4 AI: 0: Use on real unit 1: Use on simulation board ■ EEV: 0: Use on real unit 1: Use on simulation board 5 2–98 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.15.12 Defrost This screen allows modification of the defrost start condition and defrost timers. 2 _v DEFROST START CONST TEMP:10 ° C NORMAL TIMER:030m 3 SHORT TIMER: 10m Settings: START CONST TEMP : Setting used in the formula to calculate if defrost cycle is requested. NORMAL TIMER : Minimum normal time between 2 defrost cycles of the same circuit. SHORT TIMER : Minimum short time between 2 defrost cycles of the same circuit. 5 Remark: The selection of NORMAL or SHORT timer can be done in the USER/defrost screens. This screen allows modification of the defrost lead time. _ DEFROST LEAD TIME:030s Settings: LEAD TIME Part 2 – Functional Description : 4 Time between the actual defrost start and the moment the defrost start conditions were met. 2–99 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 ESIE06-05 This screen allows modification of the defrost parameters. _ DEFROST START EEV:0200pls 2 START KEEP TIME:005s RESET COIL TEMP:20° C Settings: 3 START EEV : Start opening of the EEV by switching from heating to cooling mode during the defrost cycle. START KEEP TME : Time when the START EEV pulses are used before normal cooling EEV control is active. RESET COIL TEMP : Stop condition of the defrost cycle based on the coil temperature. 4 This screen allows modification of the defrost stop conditions. _ 5 DEFROST START EEV:0200pls START KEEP TIME:005s RESET COIL TEMP:20° C Settings: 2–100 RESET SET PR : Stop condition of the defrost cycle based on the high pressure. RESET OUTL TEMP : Stop condition of the defrost cycle based on the outlet water temperature. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Defrost settings The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 This screen allows modification of the defrost settings. _^ DEFROST INITIAL EEV:0200pls 2 INITIAL TIME:030s EEV KEEPTIME:030s Settings: INITIAL EEV : Initial EEV pulses used in the defrost function INITIAL TIME : Initial time used in the defrost function EEV KEEP TIME : Time when the EEV already completely opens before switching 4-way valve 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–101 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers 1 2.16 ESIE06-05 Menu overview 2 3 4 5 2–102 Part 2 – Functional Description Å Part 2 – Functional Description ‡ > THERMOSTAT COMPRESSOR FAN PUMP EEV INPUT OUTPUT COMMUNICATION DICN SAFETY HISTORY ADVANCED DEFROST USERSETTINGS MENU INPUT OUTPUT EEV PUMP FAN COMPRESSOR THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT PUMPCONTROL FAN CONTROL FAN CONTROL _÷ EEV CONTROL UNIT OPERATIONS AI2:NONE AI2 TYPE:0-20mA AI3:NONE _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS FAN:ST VA:N 2PUMP:N HEATERTAPE:N CONFIRM? N _v C2SH L LIM COOL:04.0¢ C2SH U LIM COOL:08.5¢ _÷ AI3 TYPE:0-20mA AI4:NONE AI4 TYPE:0-20mA _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS DI1:NONE DI2:NONE DI3:NONE AO1:NONE AO1 TYPE:0-20mA _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS DI4:NONE DO1:SAFETY+W.(NO) DO2:GEN.OPERATION _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS EEV CONTROL _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS _÷ FAN DOWN PLS:0100pls FAN UP PLS:0050pls EEV CONTROL C2SH L LIM HEAT:03.0¢ C2SH U LIM HEAT:05.0¢ _÷ FF NORMAL UP :1.5 FF NORMAL DOWN:1.7 EEV CONTROL _÷ HEAT EEV CONTROL FF LOW AMB.UP :2.2 FF LOW AMB.DOWN:2.2 _÷ HEAT EEV CONTROL _÷ COOL EEV CONTROL EEV CONTROL FF LOW AMB.UP :1.1 FF LOW AMB.DOWN:1.2 _÷ ADJUST COOL:0500pls ADJUST HEAT:0500pls SAMPLING TIME:003s KP COOL NORMAL:03.0 KP HEAT NORMAL:03.0 EEV CONTROL _^ FANST. CONST B3:35.0b/37.0b UNLOAD CONST:02.6b COMPAR.PRESSURE:01.9b TIP COOL WET:002s TIP HEAT WET/003s KP COOL WET:01.9 KP HEAT WET:02.0 EEV CONTROL _÷ EEV CONTROL _÷ _÷ STEP RANGE:2625pls INITIAL STEP:0132pls ALL CLOSE ADD:160pls EEV CONTROL _v FANST. A:18.9b/28.0b FANST.B1:32.4b/ FANST.B2:27.5b/35.0b SCREENS: N _v MAN.PUMP:OFF 2ND:OFF RUNN: HOURS RHP1:00000hP2:00000h _ AMBIENT TIMER:070S AMBIENT SETP H:15.0¢ AMBIENT SETP M:05.0¢ FAN CONTROL C12RH:00000hCS:00000 RUN:H COOL-HEAT C12C: 00000hH:00000h C11RH:00000hCS:00000 RUN:H COOL-HEAT C11C: 00000hH:00000h _v _÷RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS _÷RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS COMPR. START FAN ON LAG TIME:003e _v STEPLENGTH STEPLENGTH A:04.0¢ C:04.0¢ A:04.0¢ C:04.0¢ RESTART COND COND :Ax2 :Ax2 RESTART _ EEV CONTROL EEV CONTROL EEV CONTROL _÷ EEV CONTROL EEV CONTROL EEV CONTROL SELECT:PCB1 AI1 NTC:TYPE1 OFFSET: 0.0¢ _÷ NTC/PR. SENSORS DI4:NONE DO1:SAFETY+W.(NO) DO2:GEN.OPERATION DO3:NONE (OPEN) DO4:NONE (OPEN) DO5:NONE (OPEN) _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS EEV CONTROL _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS _^ C1SH L LIM HEAT:03.0¢ C1SH U LIM HEAT:05.0¢ _÷ FF CONTROL TIME:03.S COOL AMB.CONST:005.0¢ HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0¢ _÷ TRANSIENT TIME:300s KP COOL DRY:01.5 KP HEAT DRY/01.9 LP PR.SETP HEAT:2.3b LP PR.RESET HEAT:3.0b LP ADD HEAT:0200pls EEV CONTROL FAN CONTROL COMPRESSION RATION:1.6 LOADUP TIM: 0015s LOADDOWN TIM: 0090s _÷ LP PR.SETP COOL:2.3b LP PR.RESET COOL:3.0b LP ADD COOL:0200pls _÷ C1SH L LIM COOL:04.0¢ C1SH U LIM COOL:08.5¢ _÷ TIP COOL NORMAL:015s TIP HEAT NORMAL:015s _÷ LOW AMB. CONDITION ADJUST HEAT:0151pls HEAT AMB.CONST:005.0¢ _÷ HUNTING PR TIM:0720s REST CONDTEMP:02.0¢ REST CONDAMB.:03.0¢ FAN CONTROL C22RH:00000hCS:00000 RUN:H COOL-HEAT C22C: 00000hH:00000h C21RH:00000hCS:00000 RUN:H COOL-HEAT C21C: 00000hH:00000h _÷ _^RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS _÷RUN.H-COMPR.STARTS EEV CONTROL EEV CONTROL DO6:NONE (OPEN) AI1:NONE AI1 TYPE:0-20mA _÷ CHANG.INP/OUTPUTS FF CONTROL UP :1.3 FF CONTROL DOWN:1.5 _÷ TIP COOL DRY:002s TIP HEAT DRY:003s _÷ ST3:45HZ ST1:20HZ FAN INV FREQ ST4: 50HZ ST2: 30HZ _^ 2.17 PASSWORD: 0000 TO LOGIN ENTER SERVICE ‡ THERMOSTAT ESIE06-05 The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers Service menu overview 1 2 3 4 5 2–103 2–104 DEFROST ADVANCED HISTORY SAFETY DICN SETTING SAFETY SAFETY HISTORY DEFROST START CONST TEMP:10¢ NORMAL TIMER:030m SHORT TIMER: 10m _v :YES ADVANCED EXTRA SCREENS:N AUTORESTART _v _ LP SETP. C:1.2b H:0.5b FAN LP MASK:030s COMPR LP MASK:030s _÷ MIN.OUTL.WATER:004.0¢ IF NO FLOW AFTER PUMPLEADTIME:ALARM _v MS OPTION:N UNIT:MASTER NR OF SLAVES:1 _v DICN SETTING ADVANCED _÷ LEAD TIME:030s DEFROST SIMULATION:NO AI:0 EEV:0 _^ FREEZE UP DIS:003.0¢ RESET:004.0¢ DEFROST START EEV:0200pls START KEEP TIME:005s RESET COIL TEMP:120¢ _÷ PUMP ON SETP.:001.5¢ REFR TEMP SET:-03.5¢ _÷ FREEZE UP SAFETY SAFETY _÷ FREEZE UP SAFETY _÷ PASSWORD NEEDED TO RESET SAFETIES: NONE SAFETY MASTER SETTING PRIORITY:0-2 STEPLENGTH:1.5¢ STANDBY IF MAX CAP:Y _÷ RS232:NONE BR:19200bps HPSETB:37.4b DIFF:0.4b MASK INVFAN SAF:120s _÷ ADD SL1:--- _÷ 4 _÷ COMMUNICATION PCB SAFETY DEFROST RESET SET PR.:25.0b RESET OUTL TEMP:04¢ _÷ START CONTROL:110¢ STOP CONTROL:109¢ RESET TO NORMAL:090¢ _÷ DISCH GAS SAFETY FAN OVERC.:WARNING _÷ STEPLENGTH A:04.0¢ B:03.2¢ C:00.4¢ _^ DICN THERMOSTAT RS485:NONE ADDR:01 BR: 19200bps PARITY:NONE (2STOPb) _÷ COMMUNICATION PCB 3 EEV. PCB:UNI POLAR _÷ COMMUNICATION PCB 5 COMMUNICATION SAFETY POWER:Y AUTO:Y DEFROST INITIAL EEV:0200pls INITIAL TIME:030s EEV KEEP TIME:030s _^ CONTROL EEV:001pls _÷ DISCH GAS SAFETY IF UNITSAFETY THEN PUT UNIT OFF: NO _÷ DIII:YES ADDR:--AIRNET:01 _÷ COMMUNICATION PCB 2 EXT. PCB:4SSR+HIC COMM. PCB:DIII+SER COMM.P1P2 PCB:NONE _v COMMUNICATION SAFETY RESTART SAFETY GRD:03m AREC:005m RESTART POWERON:030s REF GRD EXTEND:12m _^ HIGH DIS SAFETY:135¢ _÷ BMSCONTROL ALLOWED:N _^ 1 DICN COMMUNICATION The Digital Controller For Multiscroll Chillers ESIE06-05 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Part 2 3 1 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 2 3.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction Overview This chapter will give more detailed information about the functions used to control the system. Understanding these functions is vital when diagnosing a malfunction, which is related to functional control. 3 This chapter contains the following topics: Topic See page 3.2–Operation Flowchart 2–106 3.3–On/Off Management 2–107 3.4–Thermostat Control 2–108 3.5–Manual Control 2–114 3.6–Compressor Control 2–115 3.7–Fan Control 2–119 3.8–Pump Control 2–128 3.9–Floating Setpoint 2–129 3.10–Free Cooling 2–133 3.11–Superheat control 2–137 3.12–Changeable digital inputs 2–140 3.13–Changeable digital outputs 2–141 3.14–Changeable analogue inputs 2–142 3.15–Changeable analogue outputs 2–143 3.16–DICN Basic Setup (=master/slave system) 2–144 3.17–BMS Function 2–153 3.18–Freeze-up Control 2–157 3.19–Discharge gas safety 2–163 3.20–Password Function 2–164 3.21–History logging 2–165 3.22–Defrost management 2–166 3.23–Reversing valve 2–171 3.24–Low pressure bypass 2–172 3.25–Simulation 2–173 Part 2 – Functional Description 4 5 2–105 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.2 ESIE06-05 Operation Flowchart Cooling only Power on 2 Start in cooling Thermostat control Inlet or outlet control 3 Stop Heat pump 4 Power on 5 Start in cooling Start in heating Thermostat control Inlet or outlet control evaporator Thermostat control Inlet or outlet control condenser Stop 2–106 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.3 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit On/Off Management Introduction 1 There are three ways of switching the unit on and off: ■ Through the local key of the controller. ■ Through the BMS. 2 The last command, of these two, determines the status of the local key. ■ Through a remote switch. The remote switch gives an on/off signal to one of the changeable digital inputs of the controller. If the remote switch function is used, then an AND function with the first two commands determines the on/off status of the unit. Power on ■ The initialization takes 20 seconds. ■ The controller automatically goes to the menu overview or operation informative screen. Remark: An auto restart function is integrated. This means that the on/off status is remembered after a power failure of the unit. This function can be disabled in the service/advanced menu. Remote on/off 4 The procedure to switch the unit on/off depends on the settings of the changeable inputs/outputs. These settings can be made in the service input output menu. Remark: On/off status 3 5 ■ The remote on/off switch is field supply. ■ When the remote switch is "OFF" it is not possible to switch the unit on with the controller. This table gives an overview of the status of the unit and LEDs in applications with a remote switch. In case there's no remote switch the status of the unit only depends on the status of the local key. Part 2 – Functional Description Local key Remote Switch Unit LED ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF Flashing OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 2–107 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.4 ESIE06-05 Thermostat Control Introduction The thermostat control is used to generate a load -up or load-down according to the active thermostat, if the load-up respectively load-down timer is finished (this means gone to "0"). The thermostat can be set to regulate on different signals: 2 ■ Signal from the water sensor at the inlet of the evaporator. ■ Signal from the water sensor at the outlet of the evaporator. ■ Signal from the water sensor at the inlet of the condenser (only for EWYQ). ■ Signal from the water sensor at the outlet of the condenser (only for EWYQ). There are several possible functions for the thermostat control: 3 4 Mode change over 5 ■ Cooling: inlet evaporator control. ■ Cooling: outlet evaporator control. ■ Heating: inlet condenser control (only for EWYQ). ■ Heating: outlet condenser control (only for EWYQ). ■ External analog signal. ( 0 - 1V, 0 - 10V, 4 -20 mA, 0 - 20 mA). ■ Floating setpoint. Modechange inlet/outlet: ■ From Manual to inlet/outlet (or reverse): switch off all compressors. ■ From inlet to outlet (or reverse): switch off all compressors. Modechange cooling/heating: Thermostat timers and actions ■ From cooling to heating (or reverse): switch off all compressors. ■ If the temperature is below the setpoint, the thermostat control will check every LOADDOWN TIMER (example for cooling mode). According to the deviation to the setpoint, no action, load up, load down is required. ■ If the temperature is above the setpoint, the thermostat control will check every LOADUP TIMER (example for cooling mode). According to the deviation to the setpoint, no action, load up, load down is required. Default and limit values Default value INLET CONTROL Units 2 circuit Lower Limit Upper Limit 4.0 (*) 2.0 (*) ______ ______ _______ ______ Step difference - a (K) Steplength - c (K) Loadup timer (sec) 180 15 300 Loaddown timer (sec) 30 15 300 Setpoint cooling (°C) 12.0 7.0 23.0 Setpoint heating (°C) 40 20.0 45.0 (*) 2–108 Units 1 circuit 0.2 (*) can only be modified in the service menu. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Default value OUTLET CONTROL Inlet control for cooling mode Units 1 circuit Units 2 circuit Lower Limit Upper Limit 4.0 (*) 2.0 (*) ______ ______ _______ ______ Step difference - a (K) Steplength - c (K) Loadup timer (sec) 30 15 300 Loaddown timer (sec) 15 15 300 Setpoint cooling (°C) 7.0 5.0 20.0 Setpoint heating (°C) 45.0 25.0 50.0 0.2 (*) 2 3 The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in cooling mode. 4 Compressor Request >Load up request of 1 compressor >No action 5 >Load down request of 1 compressor Inlet water temerature evaporator (°C) Setpoint (°C) Inlet Control for the Heating Mode The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in heating mode. Compressor Request >Load up request of 1 compressor >No action >Load down request of 1 compressor Inlet water temerature condenser (°C) Setpoint (°C) Part 2 – Functional Description 2–109 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Remark: 1 The EWYQ080DAYN* has a modified control in heating mode when ambient temperature is less than or equal to 5 °C. ■ 2 ESIE06-05 Restart conditions for inlet control If ambient temperature is lesser than or equal to 5 °C, then two compressors always run together (30 seconds between the startup of the first compressor and the second compressor). Restart conditions from normal thermo OFF or forced thermo OFF. When after thermo OFF, all below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted. The start conditions are: 3 ■ Restart prevention timer has counted down. ■ Load up signal is given by controller (thermostat). ■ Inlet water temperature is > inlet water setpoint + A (cooling). ■ Inlet water temperature is > to inlet water setpoint - A (heating). Remark: Parameter A= Restart condition value programmed in the service/thermostat menu. 4 Outlet control for cooling mode The illustration below shows the thermostat outlet control in cooling mode. Compressor Request 5 >Load up request of 1 compressor >No action >Load down request of 1 compressor Outlet water temerature evaporator (°C) Setpoint (°C) Outlet control for heating mode The illustration below shows the thermostat outlet control in heating mode. Compressor Request >Load up request of 1 compressor >No action >Load down request of 1 compressor Outlet water temerature condenser (°C) Setpoint (°C) 2–110 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Restart conditions for outlet control version 2.1 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Restart conditions after normal thermo off for software version 2.1. After NORMAL thermo off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted. Start conditions: ■ Restart Prevention timer has counted down. ■ Load up signal is given by controller (thermostat). ■ Inlet water temp.during previous thermo-off + Stl A °C is < current inlet water temp. (Cooling) ■ Inlet water temp.during previous thermo-off - Stl A °C > current inlet water temperature (Heating). Stl A : Thermostat differential value. However, for below conditions, the start condition of inlet water temperature + Stl A °C is invalid and the unit will start immediately if: ■ Water temperature setpoint has changed + 1 °C or more. ■ Forcing “thermo ON” order has been input from user interface. ■ Inlet thermistor has abnormality and other circuit is in alarm. Remark: Parameter A= Step difference value programmed in the service/thermostat menu. Restart conditions after forced thermo-OFF FORCED thermo off conditions: 2 3 4 After FORCING Thermo-off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted. ■ Re-start prevention timer has been counted down. ■ Outlet setpoint + (Stl A °C x B) < current outlet water temperature. (Cooling) ■ Outlet setpoint _ (Stl A °C X B) > current outlet water temperature. (Heating) Stl A : Step difference value. B= 2 : Differential expansion constant Changeable : 1~ 4. ■ Outlet water temperature below FREEZE up DIS setpoint forcing thermo-off. ■ Refrigerant temperature below REFR TEMP setpoint forcing thermo-off. Part 2 – Functional Description 5 2–111 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Restart conditions for outlet control version 2.2 ESIE06-05 Restart conditions after normal thermo-OFF for software version 2.2. After NORMAL thermo-off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted. Start conditions : 2 ■ Timer has counted down ■ Load up signal is given by controller (thermostat) ■ Inlet water temperature during previous thermo-off + restart condition °C is < current inlet water temp (cooling). ■ Inlet water temperature during previous thermo-off minus restart conditions °C is > current inlet water temperature (heating). Restart conditions: restart condition differential value programmed in the service/thermostat menu. 3 However, for below conditions, condition of inlet water temperature + restart condition °C is invalid and the unit will start immediately if: 4 Restart conditions after forced thermo off 5 ■ Water temperature setpoint has changed + 1 °C or more. ■ Forcing “thermo ON” order has been input from user interface. ■ Inlet thermistor has abnormality and other circuit is in alarm. After FORCING thermo off, AND below conditions are met, the compressor can be restarted. Start conditions: ■ Re-start prevention timer has been counted down. ■ Outlet setpoint + restart conditions x 2 is < current outlet water temperature (cooling). ■ Outlet setpoint - restart conditions x 2 is > current outlet water temperature (heating). Restart condition: restart condition in differential value programmed in the service/thermostat menu. 2 : differential expansion constant changeable 1 ~ 4 programmed in the service/thermostat menu. Forced thermo-off conditions 2–112 ■ Outlet water temperature below FREEZE UP DIS setpoint forcing thermo-off. ■ Refrigerant temperature below REFR TEMP setpoint forcing thermo off. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Startup sequence Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 The unit startup sequence is described in the following schematic overview. (3 seconds) Start condition met Thermostat control ON OFF 2 ON OFF Fan ON OFF Compressor (compreesor with highest priority) 2nd start-up compressor :ON 3 3rd start-up compressor :ON 4th start-up compressor :ON Pump lead time Remote cooling or heating While giving a Download signal ■ If there is a Download signal, turn off the designated compressor after duration of “Compressor minimum running time”. ■ If only the first compressor is running, after duration of the “Compressor minimum running time” Thermo-OFF. 5 Only applicable on heat pump units. This function allows switching from cooling to heating mode trough a remote switch connected to one of the digital inputs. For details about the possible settings of the digital inputs refer to the chapters about the changeable digital inputs and the service menu. Dual setpoint This function allows switching between two set-points, with a switch. The actual setpoint can also be influenced by the floating setpoint function. The set-points can be set in the according menu, refer to the chapter about the set-points menu. For details about the possible settings of the digital inputs refer to the chapters about the changeable digital inputs and the service menu. Part 2 – Functional Description 4 2–113 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 2 3 3.5 ESIE06-05 Manual Control Introduction Only available on standalone unit or in disconnected mode. This function must only be used for testing of the unit, e.g. during commissioning or trouble shooting. Description This function allows setting the compressors & fans to fixed capacity steps, without thermostat control. In manual mode freeze-up prevention, defrost, high pressure setback and low noise operation are not active. In manual mode the load-up and load-down timers are not active. Manual mode versus thermostat mode The following table shows the difference between manual and automatic mode: If… Then there is… Manual capacity control (=fixed capacity step control) ■ No thermostat control, the unit is set to fixed steps manually. ■ No defrost control. ■ No low noise operation. ■ No freeze up prevention. ■ No HP setback. 4 Thermostat control An inlet/outlet thermostat control. When changing from manual to thermostat control all compressors will shut down before operating in thermostat mode. 5 Manual pump control 2–114 In the service menu it is possible to switch on the pump manually, when the unit is off. This makes it possible to check the operation of the pump. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.6 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Compressor Control Lead Lag control 1 Introduction The lead lag control mode determines which circuit/compressor starts up first in case of a capacity demand. It prevents the unit from always starting up the same circuit or compressor. 2 Possible modes: ■ Auto : the controller decides which compressor starts first. ■ Priority : the user can select the sequence of the compressor starts (fixed) Remark : the different modes can be selected in the user/compressor menu. Lead Lag in Auto Mode When the lead lag control is done automatically, the software calculates the differences in operation time between the compressors. Start up priority in Auto Mode At first, power on: 4 Start up priority compressor : cir 1-1 -> cir 2-1* -> cir 1-2 -> cir 2-2 * Sequence Status Start-up priority 0 compressors running Compressor with least running hours 1 compressor running Compressor wit least running hours of the other circuit 2 compressors running* Compressor with least running hours 3 compressors running* Start compressor 4. Remark : (*) is not applicable for 30hp and 40hp unit. Reason : There are only 2 compressors (1 circuit) for 30hp and 40hp unit. Stop priority in Auto Mode Sequence Status Start-up priority 4 compressors running* Compressor with most running hours 3 compressor running* Compressor with the most running hours of the circuit with two compressors running 2 compressors running Compressor with the most running hours 1 compressors running Stop compressor. Remark : (*) is not applicable for 30hp and 40hp unit. Reason : There are only 2 compressors (1 circuit) for 30hp and 40hp unit. In case running hours has the same value for several compressors in start/stop priority. Start up priority compressor : cir1-1 -> cir 2-1* -> cir1-2 -> cir2-2* (stop priority is opposite). Part 2 – Functional Description 3 2–115 5 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Capacity Limitation ESIE06-05 This function allows you to limit the capacity of the chiller. Depending on the adjusted mode, it is possible to control the capacity limitation via remote digital input or software. The limitation setting can be set in the user/compressor menu. In manual mode this function is not active. ■ 2 Changeable digital input To activate the remote digital input mode, program one of the changeable digital inputs to “CAP. LIMIT SET” in the service.Input output menu and connect the limitation switch to the right remote digital input terminal. When a changeable digital input is programmed, the compressor capacity limit mode can be programmed as CHANG. DIG. INP and the limitation can be entered. 3 Remark : when no changeable digital input is programmed as CAP. LIMIT SET, no limitation can be set (not displayed on the screen). ■ Limit Setting To activate the limit setting function, the compressor capacity limit mode can be programmed as LIMIT SETTING and the limitations can be entered. 4 5 ■ Limit 50% To activate the Limit 50% function, the compressor capacity limit mode can be programmed as LIMIT 50% and the unit will be limit to 50% capacity. Re start prevention timers Introduction Delay timers are implemented to prevent the compressor from restarting after a shutdown. Three different timers are present. ■ Guard timer: Delay timer to prevent compressor from restarting after a shutdown (default 3 minutes). Only if AREC timer is already on 0s. ■ Anti recycling timer: AREC timer is used to limit the starts per hour, means counting after starting the compressor. For scroll compressor the default value is 5 min. ■ Minimum running time: Delay timer to prevent switching off compressor after start-up. During the countdown the compressor will not be switched off by the thermostat function. Functional description Minimum running time (2min or more) TimGrd (3min or more) Compressor ON OFF TimArec (5min or more) Compressor’s minimum running time has to be larger than or equal to 2 min. However, stop immediately at unit stop (On/off button pushed when unit is on) OR Forced thermo OFF (Freeze-up prevention, low pressure protection etc.) 2–116 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Time > 5 min. 1 TimGrd (3min or more) Compressor ON OFF 2 Extension of restart prevention timer During restart after FORCED Thermo OFF due to anti-freeze by refrigerant gas temperature or leaving water, the restart compressor timer value (REF GRD EXTEND) is 12 minutes (default). This “REF GRD EXTEND” value can be changed in the service/safety menu. Protection control of compressor running area during heating 3 Introduction When the compressor is operating in heating mode, a compressor protection function will avoid that the compressor works out of operation area. 4 Function When two compressors are in operation of this circuit: ■ If activation condition 1 or 2 is satisfied for 120 seconds: Reduce 1 compressor immediately. 5 When 1 compressor is in operation of this circuit ■ If activation condition 1 or 2 is satisfied for 300 seconds: Switch off this circuit immediately (thermo off). Activation conditions Activation conditions 1 Te < Tc + c (c= -67°C) OR 2 Te < d (d= -20°C) Te: Evaporating temperature. Tc: Condensation temperature. Recovery conditions In case compressors went from 2 to 1 running compressor: next compressor start-up will be when condition 3 and 4 are satisfied. 3 Te > Tc + c + a (a=4°C). AND 4 Te > d + b (b=4°C). Part 2 – Functional Description 2–117 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 1 2 3 Remark: 4 Warning indication 5 2–118 5 This control is bypassed for 30 seconds at 1st compressor start-up after thermo-OFF. 6 During the defrost control, this function is disabled. 7 This control is bypassed for 120 seconds after defrost recovery. 8 After the recovery condition, compressor guard timer is valid. 9 When 1 compressor is running and condition 1 or 2 is met, no load up is allowed during the 300 sec timer (timer busy). In the Service/Safety menu, the compressor protection warning (COMPR PR Setting) can be enabled or disabled. ■ When the warning is enabled. - Compressor status will indicate : COMP PR. - Warning indication is displayed on the controller. ■ When the warning is disabled. - Compressor status will indicate: COMP PR. - No warning on the controller. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.7 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Fan Control Purpose 1 To regulate the high pressure. There are two different methods used to control the HP. ■ Fan control based on ambient control: only at start-up, of each circuit, for the first 70 seconds (default). ■ Fan control based on high pressure value, when fan ambient control is finished. 2 Schematic overview Start up unit No 3 Yes 70 sec Amb. Temp 4 HP Fan step in function of HP value < 7 °C Fan control based on Ambient Temperature with Standard Fans 7-17 °C Ambient based control for standard fans During the first 70 seconds (default), after startup of a circuit, the fan control is based on the ambient temperature. After this timer the fan control changes to high pressure control, based on high pressure value. Ambient temp. Low 1 15°C 3 5°C High H M 17°C 2 L 7°C Parameter Fan control based on high pressure with standard fans 5 > 17 °C 1 and 4 1 : Ambient setp A 3 : Ambient setp B 2 = 1 + 2°C 1 = 3 + 2°C 3 can be changed in the Service/Fan menu. High pressure based control for standard fans. After the first 70 seconds (default) fan control is based on high pressure value. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–119 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Min. time between DWN& DWN: 180sec ESIE06-05 Min. time between UP& UP: 90sec Min. time between UP& UP: 20sec Fanstep H M 2 Step Down Step UP L A:18,9 bar 2,6 bar 2,6 bar B2:27,5 bar 3 B2 (50%): 24,9 bar B3: 35 bar B1:32,4 bar High pressure In case 1 comp or no compr running B1 (50%): 29,8 bar Remark: There are different switching points for fan up depending if 1 or 2 compressors are running in that circuit. 4 5 The parameters for the fan regulation can be changed in the Service/Fan menu. High pressure control: Fanstep up/down by pressure A/B1/B2 ■ HP < A : if below setpoint for 10 sec then 1 fanstep DOWN ■ HP > B1 or B2: 1 fanstep UP. - Min time for next fan step up 90sec. - Min time for next fan down 180 sec During these timer no fanstep up or down is allowed. -If 1 compressor is running or no compressor running, then: B1(50%)=B1-2,6b & B2(50%)=B2 - 2, 6b. -Extra condition For Fanstep up, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30 sec before (memorize and compare with sampling time of 5 sec.), Fanstep up is only allowed if there is a rise of 1,9 bar or more. -Extra condition For Fanstep down, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30 sec before, Fanstep down is only allowed if there is a drop of 1,9 bar or more. High pressure control: Fanstep up/down be pressure B3 (Avoid problem of Fan up decline because of minimum time up condition.) Fan control based on Ambient Temperature with inverter fans Ambient based control for inverter fans. 2–120 ■ HP > B3. 1 fanstep up. - Minimum time between fanstep up (by B1/B2 or B3) and next fan step up (by B3) is 20 sec. During the first 70 seconds (default value), after startup of a circuit, the fan control is based on the ambient temperature. After this timer the fan control changes to high pressure control based on high pressure control. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Ambient temperature Low 1 High 15°C 5°C 100%/100% 50/53% 17°C -5°C 30/33% 2 7°C -10°C 30/30% -3°C -15°C 20/20% Unit with 8 fanstep Unit with 12 fanstep -8°C 20/13% 3 -13°C 1 : Ambient setpoint A 2: 1 + 2°C 4 3: Ambient Setpoint B 4: 3 + 2 °C Parameter Fan control based on high pressure with inverter fans 1 and 3 can be changed in the service/fan menu. 5 High pressure based control for inverter fans. After the first 70 seconds (default) fan control is based on high pressure value. Min. time between DWN& DWN: 90sec Min. time between UP& UP: 15sec Min. time between UP& UP: 10sec Fanstep 100% 95% … Step Down Step Up … 30% 20% A: 18,9 bar 2,6bar B2:27,5bar B2 (50%): 24,9 bar High pressure B3: 35 bar In case 1 comp or no compr running Remark: There are different switching points for fan up depending if 1 or 2 compressors are running in that circuit. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–121 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 The parameters for the fan regulation can be changed in the Service/Fan menu. High pressure control: Fanstep up/down by pressureA/B1/B2 ■ HP < A : if below setpoint for 10 sec then 1 fanstep DOWN ■ HP > B1 or B2: 1 fanstep UP. - Min time for next fan step up 15sec. - Min time for next fan down 90sec. During these timer no fanstep up or down is allowed. -If 1 compressor is running or no compressor running, then: B1(50%)=B1-2,6b & B2(50%)=B2 - 2, 6b. -Extra condition For Fanstep up, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30 sec before (memorize and compare with sampling time of 5 sec.), Fanstep up is only allowed if there is a rise of 1,9 bar or more. -Extra condition For Fanstep down, Compare present High pressure and High pressure from 30 sec before, Fanstep down is only allowed if there is a drop of 1,9 bar or more. High pressure control: Fanstep up/down be pressure B3 (Avoid problem of Fan up decline because of minimum time up condition.) Low noise mode with inverter fans Low noise is only possible when inverter fans are installed. 2 3 4 ESIE06-05 ■ HP > B3. 1 fanstep up. - Minimum time between fanstep up (by B1/B2 or B3) and next fan step up (by B3) is 10 sec. Min. time between DWN& DWN: 90sec 5 Min. time between UP& UP: 15sec Min. time between UP& UP: 10sec Fanstep 100% 95% … Step Down Step Up … 30% 20% A: 28 bar 2,6bar B2:35bar High pressure B3: 37 bar In case 1 comp or no compr running B2 (50%): 32,4 bar The fan control in low noise mode is the same as standard inverter control. Only the setpoints A/B2/B3 are different (higher value). These parameters can be changed in the service/fan menu. This function can be activated by a changeable input or a daily schedule. Example of low noise operation with daily schedule. 2–122 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Low noise 1 : START 2 : STOP :22h00 :26h00 1 Time 06h00 00h00 2 22h00 Fans running in low noise mode (higher pressure) Anti hunting control When the fanstep modifies with + one fanstep and it becomes again the same fanstep within 720 seconds, then : ■ Reset anti-hunting control. the B3 = 35 bar condition is required for the next fanstep up (Reason: Pressure differential bigger than estimated). Anti-hunting will prevent frequently switching between two fan steps. Anti-hunting control will be reset (normal fan control) if one of the following conditions is fulfilled: ■ unit stop/ Thermo OFF ■ 1,5 hour after start of anti-hunting control. ■ outlet water temperature rise: +2°C or more (HP rise due to LP rise). ■ Ambient temperature rise : 1 comp step up (HP rise due to load rise). ■ Comp step drop : 1 compr step down (Deferential drop due to load drop). ■ Example : Fanstep H M ... At this point B3 condition becomes valid for fan step up B2 Condition for Fanstep up B3 Condition for Fanstep up At this point B2 condition becomes valid for fan step up B2 Condition for Fanstep up 30% 20% Maximum + or ñ 1 fanstep Pressure difference surveillance control Reset condition: Unit stop or thermostat off Or 1.5 hour past or outlet water temp rise or ambient temp rise or compr step rise or compr step drop Time The fan control will make a fan step down if the compression ratio of a circuit is too low, this to create a bigger compression ratio. Make a fanstep down in case of below condition. 1.6 > (Compression ratio (HP+1.92)/ (LP+1.92)) : For 30 sec or more. Also in this case the minimum time between fanstep down and next fanstep down of 180sec is valid. This would mean that after the 180sec the ratio is compared with the ratio with 30 sec before. Part 2 – Functional Description 4 5 ... 720 sec 3 2–123 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit When a fanstep down is executed by the pressure diff surveillance control, then fanstep up is not allowed unless one of following conditions is met: 1 2 3 ESIE06-05 Fan control in heating mode Fan output for inverter fans ■ Unit stop/Thermo off ■ 1.5 hr after start of this forbidden area. ■ Water temp. drop : -2°C (bigger pressure difference due to LP drop). ■ Rise of outdoor temp.: +3 °C or more (bigger pressure difference due to HP rise). Fan management : heating mode ■ Fanstep = 100 % (step) ■ Fanstep = 100 % (inverter fans) Fanstep output for 50-60Hp units Fanstep % 4 5 K13F K23F K14F K24F 8 100 50Hz ON 7 95 45Hz ON 6 80 30Hz ON 5 70 20Hz ON 4 50 50Hz OFF 3 45 45Hz OFF 2 30 30Hz OFF 1 20 20Hz OFF Changeover on/off fan & Fan inv Fanstep output for 70-80Hp units 2–124 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Fanstep % K14F K24F K13F K23F K15F K25F 12 100 ON 50 Hz ON 11 96 ON 45 Hz ON 10 86 ON 30 Hz ON 9 79 ON 20 Hz ON 8 66 ON 50 Hz OFF 7 63 ON 45 Hz OFF 6 53 ON 30 Hz OFF 5 46 ON 20 Hz OFF 4 33 OFF 50 Hz OFF 3 30 OFF 45 Hz OFF 2 20 OFF 30 Hz OFF 1 13 OFF 20 Hz OFF 1 2 Changeover on/off fan & Fan inv Changeover on/off fan & Fan inv 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–125 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 Fanstep output for 30-40 Hp and 90-100 Hp units. Circuit 2 is not present with 30-40Hp units. 1 Fanstep % 2 3 K13F K23F K14F K24F K15F K25F K16F K26F 8 100 50 Hz ON 50 Hz ON 7 95 45 Hz ON 45 Hz ON 6 80 30 Hz ON 30 Hz ON 5 70 20 Hz ON 20 Hz ON 4 50 50 Hz OFF 50 Hz OFF 3 45 45 Hz OFF 45 Hz OFF 2 30 30 Hz OFF 30 Hz OFF 1 20 20 Hz OFF 20 Hz OFF Changeover on/off fan & Fan inv 4 5 2–126 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.7.1 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit High pressure setback Description 1 This is a safety prevention function, when high pressure is near to the high pressure switch setpoint. The unit will load-down one compressor to prevent that the unit trips on high pressure switch. Fanstep 100% 95% … Step Down 2 Step Up … HP Switch Level 40,5 Bar 30% 20% A: 18,9 bar 2,6bar B2:27,7bar 3 High pressure B3: 35 bar B2 (50%): 24,9 bar 4 HP Setback reset 37b (possible to add compr.) HP Setback 37,4b (1 compr. Switched off) 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–127 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.8 ESIE06-05 Pump Control Introduction To prevent the chiller to start up without flow, safety checks are performed. First there is a check to make sure that water flows through the system. If a second evaporator pump is installed a second safety check is performed: the double evaporator pump control, in case of failure of one pump the other one takes over. 2 Another advantage of this control is the fact that the system switches from one pump to the other in case failure during operation. 3 Pump lead/lag time The PUMPCONTROL of the user settings menu allows the user to define the pump-lead time and pump-lag time. Daily pump startup The user will get the choice to perform a pump start every day to prevent obstruction of the pump and to increase its lifetime. Everyday at pump start time, which can be set in the user/pump menu, the pump will be started automatically for a short period (5s) if the unit is off. If dual pump control is selected by changeable digital output, then it is also possible to start up this pump in the service/pump menu. Dual evaporator pump control When dual pump control is allowed an extra digital output is needed (see Service Menu). In total four choices will be possible: one pump (default), two pumps with automatic rotation (by running hours and with a certain offset), priority pump 1 and priority pump 2. 4 5 When the dual evaporator pump control is set in automatic rotation, the software calculates the differences in operation time between the two pumps. When this time exceeds the chosen offset time, the pump will shut down and the other pump will start up, during this the unit keeps running. The switchover will happen immediately, there is no transition time. Remark: In case two pumps are present and the running pump fails then the unit is stopped and started up again with the other pump. When the first pump fails a visible warning will be given. The failed pump can not start up before this warning is reset. If the running pump fails while the other pump is already in warning a unit alarm will be given. 2–128 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 3.9 Floating Setpoint 3.9.1 Floating Setpoint - Ambient Mode Introduction 1 The ambient mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of the ambient temperature. The user is able to choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the ambient mode is that the unit will be used more efficiently and that the modified setpoint will be displayed under the normal setpoint. The floating setpoint parameters and function can be set in the user floating setpoint settings menu. 2 Function description Setpoint 3 SLOPE: The rise in floating setpoint value for a 10°C ambient drop. A: Active setpoint B: Setpoint 4 5 Explanation When in cooling mode the load of the unit drops (by drop in outdoor temperature), then the setpoint will be changed upwards by the floating setpoint value. Because of this the unit will evaporate at a higher temperature and thus the performance of the unit will be better. Remark: When you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and set point menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen the set value. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–129 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.9.2 ESIE06-05 Floating Setpoint - changeable analogue input slope NTC Introduction 2 The CH. AI SLOPE NTC mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of the NTC sensor which is connected to a changeable analogue input (and programmed) the user is able to choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the CH. AI. SLOPE NTC mode is that the unit will change setpoint according to the measured temperature. The floating setpoint parameters and functions can be set in the user/floating setpoint menu. Functional description 3 A: Active setpoint B: Setpoint 4 5 Explanation When the temperature measured with the NTC sensor is 20 °C (reference), then the original setpoint will be used. When the measured temperature rises, the active setpoint will change downwards. When the measured temperature drops, the active setpoint will change upwards. Remark: when you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and setpoint menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen the set table. 2–130 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.9.3 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Floating Setpoint - AI SLOPE V-A Introduction 1 The AI SLOPE V-A mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of an external voltage or current (mA) signal connected to a changeable analogue input (and programmed). The user is able to choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the CH.AI. SLOPE V-A mode is that the unit will change setpoint according to the external signal. The floating setpoint parameters and functions can be set in the user/floating setpoint menu. 2 Functional Description A: Active setpoint 3 B: Setpoint 4 5 V-A 50 Explanation 012,0°C When the external signal is 50% of the maximum signal value (reference), then the original setpoint will be used. When the external signal value rises, the active setpoint will change downwards. When the external signal value drops, the active setpoint will change upwards. With the MAXPOS and NEG values the maximum and minimum limit of the active setpoint is specified. Remark : When you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and setpoint menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen set value. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–131 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.9.4 Floating setpoint - CH AI MAX VALUE Introduction 2 ESIE06-05 The CH AI MAX VALUE mode can be used to modify the setpoint in function of an external signal. The user is able to choose to use the floating setpoint or not. The result of using the CH AI MAX VALUE mode is that the unit will change setpoint according to the external signal. The floating setpoint parameter and functions can be set in the user/floating setpoint menu. Functional description 3 4 A: Active setpoint B: Setpoint 5 Explanation When the external signal is at maximum value, the actual setpoint will be the setpoint plus the maximum value. When the external signal is at minimum value, the actual setpoint will be equal to the setpoint. Between the minimum and maximum external signal, the actual setpoint will change according to the signal. Remark : when you use the floating setpoint, the value of the setpoint on the readout and setpoint menu can be different. The readout screen will show the calculated value and the setpoint screen the set value. 2–132 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.10 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Free Cooling Introduction 1 When ambient temperature is low, cool water can be made easily by direct heat exchange with ambient air. Free cooling can work on ambient or difference between inlet water temperature and ambient temperature. When free cooling is activated a 3 way valve will be closed. Free cooling can only be used if the changeable digital output "free cooling" is selected in the service Input/Output menu. Free cooling function is only active if unit is on. It is possible to work with indirect or direct free cooling on ambient temperature. With indirect free cooling the water of the load circulates through a separate heat exchanger instead of through the chiller. A second water circuit circulates through the other side of that heat exchanger. In direct free cooling it is the water from the load that is directly cooled by the ambient air. 2 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–133 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.10.1 ESIE06-05 Free cooling on Ambient Temperature Indirect and direct free cooling CASE 1 CASE 2 2 Chiller Dry Cooler Chiller Dry Cooler 3 Free cooling on ambient : 4 5 Functional description ■ When free cooling becomes active, turn off compressors and close DI to e.g. energize 3 way valve (case 1) or pump (case 2) to dry cooler. ■ When deactivation of free cooling, there is a lead timer to startup the compressors (as to give 3 way valve time to de-energize and go to chiller). ■ When Free cooling is active, it is possible to select if the pump contact must be closed or open (case 1 : closed / case 2 : open). Depending on the settings and according to the function below free cooling is requested or not. Free cooling on ambient: 2–134 ■ When free cooling is active, turn off compressors. ■ When deactivation of free cooling, there is a lead timer to startup the compressors. ■ When free cooling is active, it is possible to select if the pump contact must be closed or open. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.10.2 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Free cooling on inlet evaporator - ambient 1 Functional description 2 inlet water evaporator temperature ambient temperature 3 4 Free cooling on difference between inlet and ambient temperature ■ Compressors are not turned off (also no lead timer). ■ Pump contact always on. 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–135 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.10.3 ESIE06-05 Free cooling on changeable digital input Free cooling on CHANG. DIG.INP ■ When free cooling is active, turn off compressors ■ When deactivation of free cooling, there is a lead timer to startup the compressors. ■ When free cooling is active, it is possible to select if the pump contact must be closed or open. 2 3 4 5 2–136 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.11 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Superheat control Introduction 1 Electronic expansion values are used to control the superheat. Depending from the unit and model 1 or 3 expansion values are used per circuit. ■ EWAQ BO-150 DAYN(N-P-B): one condenser coil per circuit and one electronic expansion value per circuit EWYQ 130-150 DAYN(N-P-B): one condenser coil per circuit and two electronic expansion valve per circuit. One for cooling and one for heating mode. ■ EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260 DAYN(N-P-B): two condenser coils per circuit and one electronic expansion valve per circuit. ■ EWYQ080-100-180-210-240-250DAYN(N-P-B): two condenser coils per circuit and three electronic expansion valves per circuit. One in cooling mode and two in heating mode. 2 3 Example: piping principal for EWY080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B) in cooling mode. Suction temperature sensor for Super heat Control is R14T Suction temperature sensor for Super heat Control is R34T 4 condenser 1-1 condenser condenser 2-1 1-2 condenser 2-2 Evaporator side Y11E EWYQ 080-100-180-210-240-250DAYN(N-P-B) Part 2 – Functional Description Y12E 5 Only EWYQ 180-210-240-250DAYN(N-P-B) 2–137 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 Example : piping principle for EWYQ080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B) in heating mode. 1 (WYQ080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B); only EWYQ180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B). EWYQ 080-100-180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B) Evaporator 1-1 Only EWYQ 180-210-240-250 DAYN(N-P-B) Evaporator Evaporator 1-2 Evaporator 2-1 2 2-2 condenser side 3 Y13E Y22E Y12E Y23E Suction temperature Suction temperature sensor for Super heat sensor for Super heat Control is R38T Control is R18T Suction temperature Suction temperature sensor for Super heat sensor for Super heat Control is R48T Control is R28T 4 Remark: only during heating mode, two expansive valves are used per circuit. For the prevention of air heat exchanger drift during heating mode, each air heat exchanger does individual suction SH control. 5 Variable control condition 2–138 The electronic expansion valve control is done by a variable control. The suction superheat value will be changed according to the discharge superheat. This between the upper and lower limit specified in the controller. Same superheat control in cooling and heating mode, however other limit values are used. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Variable control condition a If Discharge SH < 20°C, continuous for 3 minutes. Raise the target suction SH with 0.5° Judge when 1 compressor is satisfied (Reset the timer then). b If discharge SH > C, continuous for 3 minutes. Drop the target suction SH with 0.5° Judge when 1 compressor is satisfied (Reset the timer then). 2 If a and b conditions are both satisfied at the same time give priority to control a (Discharge SH = Discharge thermistor temperature - Saturated gas temperature for high pressure) Additional EVV Functions ■ 3 Adjust cool/heat function After initializing process, if compressor starts up in cooling or heating mode, it goes to the specified output (service/EEV menu) for electronic expansion value. After reaching the ADJUST COOL/ADJUST HEAT EV Opening, it will go to normal superheat control. Low ambient condition function ■ Low ambient condition. After initializing process, if the compressor starts up in heating mode and the ambient temperature is below the COOL or HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, it goes to the specified output for the electronic expansion valve. After reaching above ADJUST COOL/HEAT EV opening, it will go to normal superheat control. FF control on comp. capacity Feed forward control for compressor loading/unloading. If the compressor load goes up or down, the controller will change (open/close) the electronic expansion valve opening. Different values are used in cooling or heating mode. FF control or ambient Feed forward control on low ambient. If the compressor load goes up or down AND the ambient temperature is below the COOL/HEAT AMB. CONST setpoint, the controller will change the EEV opening. Fan down/up control When the fan stage changes: ■ drastic change of high pressure will happen ■ drastic shortage/Excess of capacity for expansion valve occurs. Therefore, an adjustment of the electric expansion valve opening will be done. Low pressure control 4 EVV low pressure control: when the LP drops below the setpoint, additional pulses will be given to the electronic expansion valve to prevent that the circuit trips on LP safety. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–139 5 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 2 3.12 ESIE06-05 Changeable digital inputs Introduction 4 changeable digital inputs are available and can be assigned to 12 different functions in the service menu. Functions overview Possible settings for changeable digital inputs. 3 4 ■ When NONE is selected -No function is allocated to this changeable input. ■ When STATUS is selected: - In the I/O menu the status of Changeable input (connected switch) can be displayed (open/closed). ■ When DUAL SETPOINT is selected: - A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch between 2 specified setpoints. - Open contact --> Setpoint 1. ■ When REMOTE ON/OFF is selected: - A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch the unit ON and OFF. - Closed contact --> chiller ON. - Remote ON/OFF has priority on “unit ON/OFF password” (no password needed when Remote on/off is selected) ■ When FAN FORCED ON is selected : - A digital input (voltage free contact) van be used to switch on the fans of the unit (by use of changeable input). ■ When CAP. LIMIT 25% / 50% / 75 % / SET is selected : - A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to limit the maximum capacity of the unit. 5 2–140 30-40 HP 50-100 HP Remarks Lim 25 - 25% 1 comp is running Lim 50 50% 50% 2 comps running Lim 75 - 75% 3 comps running Lim SET User can select number of compressors running ■ In case Limit Set mode is selected, each compressor must be defined (C11/C12/C21/C22). - OFF: These compressors will always be switched off - ON : These compressors will still be used by the thermostat according to the required load. ■ When LOW NOISE is selected : (only if OPIF is installed) - A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch on the Low noise mode. ■ When FREE COOLING REQ is selected: - A digital input (voltage free contact) can be used to switch on the Free cooling mode. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.13 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Changeable digital outputs 1 Introduction 6 changeable digital outputs are available and can be assigned to 20 different functions in the service menu. Function overview Possible settings for changeable digital outputs 2 ■ When NONE (OPEN) is selected. -The digital output will open. ■ When Close is selected: - The digital output will close. ■ When 2ND PUMP is selected: - The digital output will indicate (close) the status of the second pump. ■ When 100% capacity is selected: - The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is working at 100 percent capacity. ■ When FULL CAPACITY is selected: - The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is working at maximum capacity, example reached 100% capacity or reached maximum capacity because of safety limitation. ■ When FREE COOLING is selected: - The digital output will close when the free cooling mode is active. ■ When GENERAL OPERATION is selected: -The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is active. ■ When SAFETY+W(NO) is selected -The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety or warning is active. (Normal open contact) ■ When SAFETY+W(NC) is selected: -The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety or warning is active. (normal closed contact) ■ When SAFETY (NO) is selected: - The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety is active (normal open contact). ■ When SAFETY (NC) is selected: -The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety is active (normal closed contact). ■ When C1 or C2 SAFETY is selected: -The digital output will indicate (close) when a safety is active for the specified circuit. ■ When WARNING is selected: -The digital output will indicate (close) when a warning is active. ■ When C1 or C2 OPERATION is selected: - The digital output will indicate (close) when the specified circuit is active. ■ When COOLING or HEATING or DEFROST is selected: - The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit is in Cooling/Heating or Defrost. ■ When 0% CAPACITY is selected: -The digital output will indicate (close) when the unit capacity is 0% Part 2 – Functional Description 3 4 2–141 5 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 2 3.14 ESIE06-05 Changeable analogue inputs Introduction Four changeable analogue inputs are available and can be assigned to four different functions in the service menu. Function overview Possible settings for changeable analogue inputs. 3 ■ None -No status function is allocated to this analogue input. ■ Status -Displays the analogue input value in the I/O menu. ■ Floating Setpoints -Select the signal type used for the floating setpoint function. ■ Temperature - An additional temperature sensor can be connected to the controller and will be displayed in the I/O menu (only NTC type can be selected). Possible analogue input types: 4 5 ■ 0-20 mA ■ 4-20 mA ■ 0-1V ■ 0-5V ■ 0-10V ■ NTC Type1 ■ NTC Type2 ■ NTC Type3 ■ NTC Type4 The analogue input can also be programmed as a digital input. Possible settings analogue inputs: 2–142 ■ Digital inputs - DI STATUS - DI REM COOL/HEAT - DI CAP.LIM 25%/50%/75% - DI CAP LIM SET - DI FREE COOLING When a DI signal is selected the AI type will automatically go to DIGITAL INP. Type. ■ Remark : The digital input will close when an 5Vdc signal is given to the controller. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.15 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Changeable analogue outputs Introduction One analogue output is available and can be assigned to the unit capacity output function. Function overview Possible settings analogue outputs: 1 2 ■ None - No function is allocated to this analogue input ■ Unit capacity - Displays the analogue output value in the I/O menu, and give the selected signal on the AO. Possible analogue output types. ■ 0-20mA ■ 4-20mA ■ 0-1V ■ 0-5V ■ 0-10V 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–143 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.16 ESIE06-05 DICN Basic Setup (=master/slave system) A site with units installed in a DICN configuration will operate as one big chiller with different water circuits installed in parallel. We can virtually speak about a DICN unit instead of a site with different chillers. The DICN-unit can only be controlled via inlet water. DICN can only be used if option kit EKACPG (addresscord) is installed. 2 Up wiring Connection and setup of a DICN system (option kit EKACPG) For a system with chillers in a DICN configuration, the chillers have to be connected as shown in the figure below. 3 4 Make the F1/F2 connection for DIII communication using a 0.75~1.25 mm2 2-wire cable (maximum of 1000 m from start to end). 5 For units in a DICN configuration, be sure to provide every chiller with its own flow switch, and be sure to interlock with the pump that is serving the chiller. Addresses in DICN Setup 2–144 The addresses of the unit (pcb, EEV driver, controller) don’t change when the units are used as standalone or in a DICN system. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit DICN (network): Overview Introduction 1 DICN = Daikin Integrated Chiller Network Also referred to as master-slave system. Remark: In a DICN system (Master-Slave), all the PCASO-controllers must have the same software, bios, and boot version! Function description To activate the DICN function MS Option must be set to "Yes" in the Service/DICN menu. In the user settings menu of the master it must also be specified how many slave units are connected. When activated, this function will transfer all parameters to the different units through F1/F2 communication line. In DICN setup (when MS option is yes): the different units can be put in "normal" or "standby" mode or in disconnected ON / OFF mode. When the mode is disconnected the unit selected will operates as standalone units. 2 3 Remark: If the master is down (= no power) then a network safety is activated and all units will work as standalone (no parameters are transferred), and they will work with their own setting in the controller. Overview of possibilities 4 Basic principles: ■ Maximum four units can be combined in on DICN system. ■ Possible to combine all EWAQ-DAYN in one DICN. ■ Possible to combine all EWYQ-DAYN in one DICN. 5 Important: DICN thermostat function in cooling ■ It is not possible to combine Pco or Pco² and PCASO controllers in one DICN system. ■ When the user enters the service menu, the DIII communication stops. ■ When the user leaves the service menu, the DIII communication restarts. ■ It takes 10 minutes before DIII communication is fully re-established. If communication fails after 10 minutes, the network safety error message “OU4:PCB COMM. PROBLEM” appears. The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in cooling mode for a DICN network. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–145 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 ESIE06-05 Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 4 comp. (15sec between compressor request Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 3 comp. (15sec between 2 Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 2 comp. (15sec between Each 180sec (loaduptimer) 1 comp. inlet water temperature evaporator (°C) = Setpoint 3 DICN: ONLY INLET CONTROL !!!!!!!!!!! 4 5 Default and limit values 2–146 ■ Loadup request of 1 compressor: request to add one additional compressor. ■ Loadup request of 2 compressors: request to add 2 additional compressors (with interval of 15 seconds in between). ■ The maximum number of compressors that can possibly be added in 1 request is limited to the total number of units that are present in the DICN setup. ■ Example: A DICN Setup with two units meats load up requests of maximum two compressors at a time. Inlet control Default value Lower limit Upper limit Step difference -a (K) 4.0(*) ---- ---- Step difference -b (K) 3.6(*) ---- ---- Step difference -c (K) 0.4(*) ---- ---- Loadup timer (sec) 180 15 300 Loaddown timer (sec) 180 15 300 Setpoint cooling (°C) 12.0 7.0 23.0 Setpoint heating (°C) 40.0 20.0 45.0 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Practical example: 1 2 3 = Setpoint Condition Result If evaporator inlet temperature (Master) --> active inlet setpoint +A Loadup request A1 Loadup is executed and loadup timer is put on maximum. If evaporator inlet temperature (Master) --> active inlet setpoint + A +B +C Loadup request A2 Loadup nr1 is executed and loadup timer is put on maximum. Loadup nr2 is executed and loadup timer - 15 sec. If evaporator inlet temperature (Master) --> active inlet setpoint + A + 2x(B+C) Loadup request A3 Loadup nr1 is executed and loadup&loaddown timer is put on maximum. Loadup nr2 is executed at loadup timer - 15 sec Loadup nr3 is executed at loadup timer - 30 sec DICN Thermostat function in heating The illustration below shows the thermostat inlet control in heating mode for a DICN network. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–147 4 5 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 1 2 3 Inlet water temperature condenser (°C) = Setpoint A1 ~A4 Load up request of 1~ 4 compressors 4 B no action C1~C4 load down request of 1~ 4 compressors. D Inlet setpoint. 5 Remark: The EWYQ080DAYN* has a modified control in heating mode when the ambient temperature is < 5 °C. ■ Settings on the controller If the ambient temperature < 5 °C and the master makes a request to load up a EWYQ080 or EWYQ100 unit, then the 2 compressors of this unit will start up (30 sec between the startup of the first compressor and the second compressor). DICN settings for the PCASO controller Remark: The remote start/stop, is the same as with individual units. In case of DICN, the remote start/stop to be used, is the one from then master unit. In case of a disconnect unit, you must use the remote start-stop of this unit. STEP 1 : Go to the Service menu, submenu communication. 2–148 Unit 1 Master Unit 2 Slave 1 Unit 3 Slave 2 Unit 4 Slave 3 DIII: YES YES YES YES ADDR: 1-00 1-01 1-02 1-03 POWER: Y N N N 1 Enable the DIII communication on each chiller 2 Specify a different address for each chiller 3 Enable the power parameter on one chiller in the DICN network (Master). Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit STEP 2 : Go to the service menu, submenu DICN. Unit 1 Master (*) Unit 2 Slave 1 Unit 3 Slave 2 1 Unit 4 Slave 3 MS OPTION: Y Y Y Y UNIT: MASTER SLAVE SLAVE SLAVE NR OF SLAVES: 3 - - - 2 (*) The master unit must be set as last in row, otherwise set to N and back to Y. 1 Enable Master-Slave option on each chiller. 2 Specify the unit as master or slave. 3 Specify the number of slaves (only on master unit). 3 STEP 3: Go to the Service menu, submenu DICN Specify address of slave 1/2/3, same address as programmed in step 1. Unit 1 Master Unit 2 Slave 1 Unit 3 Slave 2 Unit 4 Slave 3 ADD SL1: 1-01 - - - ADD SL2: 1-02 - - - ADD SL3: 1-03 - - - 4 5 STEP 4: Go to the service menu, submenu DICN Unit 1 Master Unit 2 Slave 1 Unit 3 Slave 2 Unit 4 Slave 3 0-2 0-2 0-2 0-2 1.5˚C 1.5˚C 1.5˚C 1.5˚C N N N N PRIORITY STEPLENGTH STANDBYIF MAX CAP STEP 5: Go to the user menu, submenu DICN 1 Specify the unit priority - stepL priority. 2 Specify the steplength parameter used in the steplength priority function. 3 Specify if unit has to start or stay in standby when normal units in DICN system run at 100% and the setpoint is not reached yet. Remark: Unity priority - stepL Priority ■ The first digit of the Master Slave Priority refers to the Unit priority. With this digit you can give each unit a certain start up priority. ■ The second digit refers to the Step Length priority. This setting reacts only on load up steps and avoids that one of the DICN units goes into freeze-up alarm because the common leaving water is still to high. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–149 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 Explanation of Unit priority - stepL Priority Settings 1 There is a possibility to put a priority parameter in the service menu. This parameter is standard set on 2 and can be changed from 0 till 4. The setting reacts only on load up steps and avoid that one of the DICN unit goes into freeze-up alarm. Load up priority result: 2 If an unit has an LWE < MOW + Stepl priority*steplength, than it has a lower priority than the rest. EXAMPLE: LWE setpoint = 6°C C11:ON C12:ON C11:ON C12:OFF C11:OFF C12:OFF C21:ON C22:ON C21:ON C22:OFF C21:OFF C22:OFF 3 Unit 1 LWT 1: Unit 2 10°C Common Leaving Water CLWT 9°C 4 Unit 3 C11:OFF C12:OFF C21:OFF C22:OFF Unit 4 15°C 15°C EWT 15°C (Entering Water temp) Without Priority Parameter compressor capacity (%) T° 15°C 0%° 5 25%° EWT CLWT 50%° LWT2 75%° 4°C LWT1 100%° LWT1 = leaving water temperature unit 1. LWT2 = leaving water temperature unit 2. CLWT = common leaving water temperature DICN system. EWT = Entering water temperature. 2–150 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit With priority parameter T° Step 15°C 0%° EWT 1 2 25%° CLWT LWT2 50%° LWT1 3 75%° 4°C 100%° 4 If unit 1 gets priority 3 then we get : If LWE < 4+(3*1.5) If LWE < 8.5 then this unit gets a lower priority than the other units. For units with more than 2 circuits, the individual lead/lag setting of a unit to determine the priority of the circuits - remain valid. Every unit should be configured as either a “NORMAL”, “STANDBY” or “DISCONNECT” unit. This setting will be mentioned on the display of each chiller. Description of the different operation modes and settings. MODE: NORMAL The network controls the unit. Loading and unloading is decided by the central control of the network. Putting this unit ON or OFF will also put all other units ON or OFF, unless their status is "DISCONNECT ON/OFF". Changing CONTROL SETTINGS or THERMOSTAT SETTINGS on this unit, will apply to all other units. MANUAL CONTROL on such a unit is not possible. MODE: STANDBY The unit is considered as a "NORMAL" unit and its function is then also similar to a unit defined as "NORMAL", but this unit however, will only come into operation if: ■ another unit is in alarm (unit safety or circuit safety) ■ another unit is in "DISCONNECT ON/OFF" mode ■ the setpoint is not reached when all other units have been running on 100% capacity. This condition can be disabled in the service/DICN menu, standby if MAXCAP. If more than one unit is defined as STANDBY, only 1 of the units will be really standby. The number of running hours will decide the unit that is really standby. Also, more than 1 unit (up to 4) can be defined as a ''STANDBY'' unit. In that case, only the unit which is most near to its target running hours will be considered as a ''STANDBY'' unit. This means, if a customer wants to have 1 particular unit always to be in ''off'' mode (except for alarm or capacity shortage of the other chillers), then he only has to define this 1 unit as ''STANDBY''. But if a customer wants to have more than 1, or even all chillers to be a standby unit alternately (each on its turn), then more than 1 or all chillers should be defined as ''STANDBY''. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–151 5 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 MODE: DISCONNECT 1 DISCONNECT: Units which are defined as ''DISCONNECTED'', can be put ''ON/OFF'' or set to MANUAL MODE independent from the other units. This can be very useful e.g. in case of servicing. When changing to ''NORMAL'' or ''STANDBY'', the unit becomes part of the system again. OFFSET 2 The OFFSET time defines the target difference in running hours between one unit and another unit with OFFSET:0000 h. This value is important for maintenance purposes. The difference in setting among different units should be high enough as to avoid servicing of the units all at the same time. The lower and upper limits are 0 and 9000 hours respectively. The default value is 0 hours. For units with 2 circuits, the individual lead/lag setting is valid as to determine the priority of the circuits. 3 E.g. if following setting is made: 4 Then unit 3 and 4 will be operated most. They will get priority in operation as to reach 2000 running hours more than unit 1. Unit 1 will be the unit with the lowest running hours. Unit 1 = 0 h Unit 2 = 1000 h Unit 3 = 2000 h Unit 4 = 2000 h PUMP ON IF Set if the pump must operate as long as the chiller is ON (UNIT ON), or during compressor on condition only (COMPR ON). 5 ■ When UNIT ON is selected, the voltage free contact S9L will remain closed as long as the chiller is ON. The pump of individual unit will run if unit is on. ■ When COMPR ON is selected, the voltage free contact S9L will remain closed as long as the compressor is ON. Remark: If no pumpcontact is closed (ex all pump on if “COMPR ON” & no request to loadup) then turn on the pumpcontact of the unit with highest priority. (This is needed because the temperature sensor must be able to measure the correct water temperature). 2–152 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.17 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit BMS Function Introduction 1 BMS stands for Building Management Systems. These systems were developed for centralized overview and control of technical installation for complete sites. The Daikin BMS option makes it possible to connect the Daikin chillers to a larger control system. The necessary tools for this communication are the Gateway and the address card. In this chapter we will give a short overview of the possibilities and settings for the BMS function. For more detailed information we refer to the service manual “BMS option for Daikin” air cooled chillers with scroll compressor. BMS integration with MODBUS protocol (kit EKACPG per chiller) Modbus protocol. 2 3 Functions: Monitor and Control: Setup: On-Off Thermostat (setpoints, mode) 4 Capacity limit Low noise … Monitor: RS485 Error (active/not active, code, type) Unitcapacity 5 Compressor, fan status RS485 All inputs/outputs (incl all sensors) … RS485 Full list of variables that can be read and/or written: see operation manual of adress card or BMS Service Manual ESIE 07-09. Maximum 32 chillers DIP-switch S3A on adress card on OFF except for last unit in line Part 2 – Functional Description mainPCB circuit 1 mainPCB circuit 2 2–153 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 BMS integration with BACnet/IP protocol ESIE06-05 BACnet/IP Protocol Option 1: via RS485-port on address cards EKACPG and kit EKBNPG. Chiller 1 2 A11P A21P Chiller 2 A11P RS485 A21P A11P A21P RS485 Address card EKACPG 3 Chiller 3 RS485 Chiller 4 A11P A21P RS485 Kit EKBNPG Modbus <-> BACnet gateway Like in previous example, we connect address-cards of different chillers via RS485. Monitor and control : On-Off, Thermostat (setpoints, mode) Monitor: Error (active, code, type), inlet/outlet temp, unitcapacity, compressor status, fan status BACnet BMS Full list of variables that can be read and/or written : see operation manual of address card or BMS Service Manual ESIE 07-09 4 Maximum 8 chillers BMS integration with LON protocol LON protocol 5 Option 1: via RS485-port on address cards EKACPG and kit EKLONPG. Chiller 1 A11P A21P RS485 Chiller 2 A11P A21P Chiller 3 A11P RS485 A21P RS485 A11P RS485 Kit EKLONPG We connect address-cards of different chillers via RS485. Modbus <-> LON gateway Monitor and control : On-Off, Thermostat (setpoints, mode) Monitor: Error (active, code, type), inlet/outlet temp, unitcapacity LON BMS Full list of variables that can be read and/or written : see operation manual of address card or BMS Service Manual ESIE 07-09 Maximum 16 chillers 2–154 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Example of BMS Modbus Setup 1 STEP 1 : Up-Wiring 2 3 STEP 2 : DIP switch settings (S3A) 4 The cable terminal (resistor) is integrated on the address card and is enabled by means of a DIP switch (S3A). 5 In this example, the last in line DIP switch on the address cards of chiller units 1 and 2 has to be set to OFF. Because chiller unit 3 is the last unit in line, the last in line DIP switch on the address card must be set to ON. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–155 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 STEP 3: Go to the Service menu, Submenu comminication (Communication fourth screen). 1 2 3 1 Specify the address of the chiller in the BMS system. 2 Specify the communication speed, baudrate. 3 Specify the parity and stop bit for the communication. Go to the Service menu, submenu. 4 STEP 4: Communication (sixth screen) 5 1 2–156 Enable or disable if BMS control is allowed or not (possible to read or to read and write). Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.18 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Freeze-up Control Introduction 1 Freeze-up control is used to protect the evaporator against accidentally freezing. Three protections are present : 1 Anti-freeze function on water temperature (thermistor). - Anti-freeze prevention. - Anti-freeze protection. 2 Anti-freeze function by pump control OR heater tape. 3 Anti-freeze function by refrigerant gas temp (function only in cooling mode). 2 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–157 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.18.1 Anti-Freeze function or inlet/outlet water temperature Freeze-up prevention 2 3 4 5 ESIE06-05 Freeze-up protection for software version 2.1 Freeze-up prevention will request a load-down when the temperature of the evaporator outlet water gets below the freeze-up disable setpoint +0.5 °C. If 1 compressor is reduced immediately, reset the load up/down timers (and start recounting). After reducing 1 compressor in operation, when the temperature is still in this area, reduce 1 more compressor after 15 seconds. Repeat this until only 1 compressor remains in operation. If only 1 compressor remains on, do not execute this procedure. Characteristics Freeze-up prevention Control device Sensor Diagram name R3T, R4T Activation When 2 or more compressors are in operation AND If leaving water temperature < FREEZE UP DIS + 0.5 °C. Result Load down compressor every 15 seconds until 1 compressor is in operation. Reset Result If leaving water temperature > RESET value Normal mode. When the evaporator outlet water temperature sinks below Freeze-up disable setpoint freeze-up protection is activated and the unit is shut down. When the temperature rises above the reset setpoint, protection is reset and the unit will work in its initial mode after compressor timers. The compressor will go back to the necessary capacity step, depending on the load-up possible status. Characteristics Freeze-up prevention Control device Sensor Diagram name R3T, R4T Activation Result Leaving water temperature < FREEZE UP DIS Reset Reset when leaving water temperature rises above MOW setpoint. Unit disabled Important : No alarm is displayed after freeze-up protection. Unit will restart after the REF GRD EXTEND timer (12 min). 2–158 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Functional description 1 Outlet temp RESET setpoint 2 FREEZE UP DIS setpoint +0.5°C Freeze-up prevention area (loaddown) FREEZE UP DIS setpoint 3 Freeze-up safety-disabling (shutdown) Time Freeze-up protection for software version 2.2 or higher ■ Loadup not possible area : if outlet water is lower then MOW then loadup is not possible. ■ Freeze-up prevention area : if outlet water temperature is lower then freeze up DIS + 0.5°C then unload 1 compressor, as long as the outlet water temp is too low and until 1 compressor is in operation. ■ Freeze-u safety disabling area: unit will shutdown. When the evaporator outlet water temperature sinks below freeze-up disable setpoint, protection is activated and the unit is shut down. When the temperature rises above the reset setpoint the freeze-up protection is reset and the unit will work in its initial mode after compressor timers. The compressor will go back to the necessary capacity step, depending on the load-up possible status. A maximum number of freeze-up protections per 30 min can be set in the service/safety menu. When the unit exceeds this number in less than 30 minutes, an alarm will be activated. Characteristics Freeze-up prevention Control device Sensor Diagram name R3T, R4T Activation Leaving water temperature < FREEZE UP DIS Result Unit disabled, after Reset Reset when leaving water temperature rises above MOW setpoint. Remark: ■ A selection of the freeze-up safety can be made in the : - FREEZE UP OW: DISABLE, freeze-up function as described in software version 2.1. - FREEZE UP OW: DIS & SAF, freeze up function as described above. ■ When Freeze-up safety is active, the controller will display “O4A: Freeze UP” alarm. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–159 4 5 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Functional description ESIE06-05 Outlet temp RESET setpoint 2 FREEZE UP DIS setpoint +0.5°C 3 FREEZE UP DIS setpoint Freeze-up prevention area (loaddown) Freeze-up safety-disabling (shutdown) Time 4 ■ Loadup not possible area : if outlet water is lower then MOW then loadup is not possible. ■ Freeze-up prevention area : if outlet water temperature is lower then FREEZE UP ■ DIS + 0.5°C then unload 1 compressor, as long as the outlet water temp is too low and until 1 compressor is in operation. ■ Freeze-u safety disabling area: unit will shutdown. 5 2–160 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.18.2 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Anti-freeze function by pump control OR heater tape Anti-freeze by pump operation 1 Only when no heater tape is present (OP10 not installed). Activation : - If water temperature of inlet/outlet is < PUMP ON SETP. °C AND -pump is off 2 Action: Turn on pump. 3 Reset : Reset function if water temperature gets > reset setpoint. Anti-freeze by heater tape Only when heater tape is present (OP10 installed). Ambient < < MOW MOW -1.5°C -1.5 °C Ambient And EvapPump=Off And EvapPump=Off And 22nd EvapPump=Off nd EvapPump=Off And 4 Ambient Ambient=> =>MOW MOW Or EvapPump=On Or EvapPump=On Or Or2nd 2nd EvapPump=On EvapPump=On Heatertape ON 5 OFF Activation: - If ambient temperature is < MOW -1.5 °C. - AND evaporator pump is OFF - AND 2nd evaporator pump is OFF Action: Turn on evaporator heater tape Reset: -If ambient temperature is > MOW. -OR evaporator pump is ON. -OR 2nd evaporator pump is ON. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–161 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.18.3 ESIE06-05 Anti-freeze function by refrigerant gas temperature Function only in cooling Activation : If refrigerant gas temperature is < REFR TEMP SET continuously for 10 seconds. Action: 2 ■ Switch off/on the unit (first time in 30 min --> no alarm). ■ If above condition is satisfied twice in 30 minutes --> switch off unit on alarm. Reset: Reset possible if refrigerant temperature rises above -2.5 °C. 3 This control will be masked during below operation status. 60 sec from first compressor start-up of each circuit. 4 5 2–162 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.19 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Discharge gas safety Introduction 1 The discharge gas safety is used to protect the compressor. Activation When the discharge gas temperature gets above the “START CONTROL (°C)” till the discharge temperature drops below STOP CONTROL (°C). 2 Action Open EV (Electric expansion valve) with CONTROL EEV(PLS) every sampling time 10 sec. Reset Reset if discharge gas temperature becomes less than “RESET TO NORMAL” value or discharge gas super heat becomes 25°C or less, return to the normal EV control. Remarks : If 2 compressors are operated per circuit, Judge the one with the highest discharge gas temperature for EV opening, and to return to normal EV control, judge on the one with the lowest gas temperature. 3 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–163 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.20 ESIE06-05 Password Function Introduction A user password can be chosen, in the user password menu, to protect the user settings. In the user advanced menu it can be chosen whether a password is needed to change the setpoint. In the service/safety menu you can choose if a password is needed to reset safeties. This password can be either the user password either the service password. 2 When the user is logged in with a password, this password will be remembered. When the controller is not touched for a specified time “LOGOUT TIMER” (user advanced menu), the controller will automatically logout and password is needed again to enter the menu. The user can find back in the password menu with which password he is logged on and he can also manually log off. 3 Overview of possibilities A user password is used to protect the user parameters. This password can be set in the user password menu. A service password is used to protect the service parameters; this password is factory set and cannot be changed. 4 User password Service password 1234 (default) Contact your distributor for this password (fixed) Possible to enter with 5 Menu 1. Setpoint menu (only if Setpoint password is enabled in the user advanced menu) Yes Yes 2. User settings menu Yes Yes 3. Service menu No Yes 4. User password menu Yes Yes Additionally: depending on the status of the "password needed to reset safety" parameter in the service menu. 2–164 5. Possible to reset a safety in safety menu if user password is required Yes Yes 6. Possible to reset a safety in safety menu if service password is required No Yes Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.21 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit History logging Introduction 1 Before a safety happened a number of data (Logs default 5) has been recorded (LogTime: default with 10 sec between), this logging data is only available of the last safety that happened and the data will only be displayed in the history menu, if the History Extra screens =”Y” in the service menu. This logging data will be continuously stored in the RAM memory, when the safety happens the data will be copied into the flash memory (Flash memory: This type of memory will keep all data, even when power is put off). Functional description LogNr 5 4 3 2 Moment when safety happens 1 0 3 Moment when safety is detected by controller HP Safety Yes No HisDelay (def 2.0 sec) LogTime (def 10 sec) Logging data indication: 00: History at moment of last error 01 ~05: Logging data from the moment before error 4 Time Time between moment when safety happens and first log data is not fixed. This time will be between LogTime (def 10s) and 0s 5 History number 00 To consult the log data: 1 Enable history extra screens : Y 2 Enter History menu 3 Go to last error 4 Press Down to consult logging data 1 2 3 4 and 5. Part 2 – Functional Description 2 2–165 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.22 Defrost management 3.22.1 Introduction ESIE06-05 For dual circuit units, each refrigerant circuit will enter defrost function separately. The defrost cycle will only occur on the circuit that needs it. The other circuit will continue its normal operation when required. 2 In heating mode, the defrost will be executed when the following conditions are met: ■ Manual defrost is requested. ■ The temperature sensors reach a certain value. 3 3.22.2 Manual defrost If below conditions are met during compressor operation in heating mode, a manual defrost can be selected from the user menu. 4 Only possible if: 1 The user requests a manual defrost via the controller. 2 Tr < 10° C (or when thermistor abnormality : Ta < 7°C) Remark : in case of coil thermistor error, condition is based on ambient temperature. 5 No defrost forbid timer active when manual defrost is selected. Unit defrost setting: If manual defrost starting conditions are satisfied for both circuits, 2nd circuit defrost will only start after defrost finish of 1st circuit. During 1st circuit defrost, defrost finish conditions for 2nd circuit are not evaluated, so 2nd circuit defrost is guaranteed. Remark : manual defrost can be requested in the user/defrost menu. Tr: coil temperature. Ta: ambient temperature. 2–166 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.22.3 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Automatic defrost Defrost forbidden timer 1 Defrost forbidden timer. This is the minimum time between 2 defrost cycles in order to keep the heating capacity and to prevent frequent defrosting. ■ The timer can be - Normal startvalue (def 30 min, range 20 - 120 min). - Short start value (default 10 min, range 1 - 20 min). ■ If timer is not on 0, the defrost cycle cannot be started. ■ The timer starts counting from previous defrost finished. ■ In case of a safety stop, the timer starts counting. ■ In case of thermostat-OFF, counter does not reset and keeps on counting. ■ If during countdown of the timer, timer selection is modified from normal to short, and the already time past is larger than the short timer value ==> timer is put on 0. Defrost start conditions 2 4 Defrost forbidden timer T(min) must be zero AND OR Conditions were met at time of coil sensor failure 1) Ta-Tr> 0.4 x Ta+A 2) Tr < 0°C 3) Ta < 10 °C 5 A = “start const temp”, default 12 °C (can be changed between 5 - 25°C). Ta = ambient temperature sensor Tr = coil sensor (in case of EWYQ230/250 : lowest temperature of 2 coil temperature sensors = Tr) During compressor operation, above conditions should be met for 5 min before defrost will start. If less than 5 minutes, re-detect again. Part 2 – Functional Description 3 2–167 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 2 Defrost start condition at sensor failure When an abnormality occurs concerning the coil sensor, this is defined as Alarm Level. Defrost conditions will be as stated below. For 50 ~80 HP For 30-40-90-100 HP 3 4 Defrost STOP conditions 5 Defrost stop condition at sensor abnormality For 40 - 80 HP For 30-90-100 HP 2–168 ESIE06-05 TR1 TR 2 Defrost start conditions (Coil sensor) (coil sensor) Normal operation Not present Standard defrost cycle Abnormality Not present Ta < 7°C Normal operation Normal operation Standard defrost cycle Normal operation Abnormality Ta-Tr1 >= 0.4xTa+A and Tr1<0°C Abnormality Normal operation Ta-Tr2 >= 0.4xTa+A and Tr2<0°C Abnormality Abnormality Ta < 7°C When one of the below conditions is met, recovery of the defrost cycle will occur: 1 Tr > RESET COIL TEMP (default 20° C, range 3 - 20°C) 2 HP < RESET SET PR (default 25 bar, range 21 - 30 bar) 3 Tleavingwater < RESET OUTL TEMP (default 4°C, range 3 - 20 °C) 4 In case the defrosting time exceeds 10 min. When an abnormality occurs concerning the coil sensor, this is defined as Alarm Level. Defrost conditions will be as stated below. TR1 TR 2 Defrost start conditions (Coil sensor) (coil sensor) Normal operation Not present Tr >= 20°C Abnormality Not present Timer recovery 10 min. Normal operation Abnormality Tr1>=20°C Abnormality Normal operation Tr2>=20°C Abnormality Abnormality Time recovery 10 min. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 Actions during defrost start Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 Actions during start and execution of the defrost cycle. Defrost starting conditions satisfied Defrost start Comp load 50% EV heatingEV Normal SH CoolingEV 2 control Totally open Completely Open B(PLS) 3 Normal SH control ON OFF 4way valve 4 ON OFF Fan Asec 5 Bsec Low pressure mask Superheat error mask 1 DEFROST CONDITIONS SATISFIED. 2 Only 1 compressor in operation of this circuit during defrost. 3 Open Cooling EV completely. 4 30 seconds (A) normal SH control (heating) before defrost start. 5 DEFROST START. 6 Switch 4way valve and close heating EV totally. 7 Turn OFF fans. 8 Open Cooling EV with “initial pulses” 200pls (B pls) for 5 sec (B sec) 9 Continue normal SH control (cooling) 10 Mask low pressure protection control and superheat error during defrost. Remark : the EWYQ080DAYN* has a modified control during defrost. ■ If the unit is starting a defrost cycle, then keep the number of running compressors. - If 1 compressor is running then 1 compressor defrost. - If 2 compressors are running then 2 compressor defrost. Part 2 – Functional Description 2–169 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 ESIE06-05 Startup control after defrost recovery Defrost recovery E A sec 2 C sec Compressor 3 30hp load 40-100hp load Stable Normal thermo control 50% Normal thermo control Normal SH control 4 EV 30,40hp heatingEV 90,100hp B pls fixed Initial opening angle B pls, normal SH control 50-80hp heatingEV CoolingEV 5 Completely closed ON 4 way valve Fan ON C 1 Defrost recovery conditions satisfied. 2 For 40 - 100 Hp units: only 1 compressor in operation of this circuit during defrost recovery. For 30 Hp units: keep the same number of compressors as used in the defrost function. 3 Energize 4-way valve. 4 Close cooling EV completely. 5 Turn fans ON. 6 For 30, 40, 90, 100 Hp units: EV opening for heating is defined as B(pls) for “C” sec (EEV KEEP TIME), after this timer change to normal SH control. For 50, 80 Hp units: EV opening for heating is defined as B(pls) and direct start with normal SH control (EEV KEEP TIME is defined as 0 sec). 7 For 40 - 100 Hp units: after switching 4-way valve, keep 1 compressor running for “A” sec, after this timer, change to normal heating mode. For 30 Hp units: keep the same number of compressors for “A” sec, after this timer, change to normal heating mode. Remark : 2–170 ■ In case of “A” sec timer < “C” sec timer then FF CONTROL function is invalid and not used when a compressor is added. ■ In case of “A” sec timer > “C” sec timer then FF CONTROL function is valid and used when a compressor is added. Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.23 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Reversing valve 1 This digital output function allows switching a reversing valve. REMOTE COOL/HEAT: ■ Digital input open = Heating ■ Digital input closed = Cooling Remark : if remote cooling/heating is chosen by digital input then it is not possible any more to change by controller or via Supervisor system. ■ Four way valve relay is: -energized during heating mode -not energized during cooling mode. ■ When switching cooling <--> heating during operation : 1 Thermostat OFF 2 Restart unit + change status of 4 way valve (by (de) energizing the relay). 2 3 The four way valve status is changed at the same time of compressor start-up. 4 5 Part 2 – Functional Description 2–171 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit 1 3.24 ESIE06-05 Low pressure bypass To avoid low pressure during startup of the unit or fan shifting (Fan up) the low pressure error is disabled for a certain time. The low pressure bypass can be set in the service safety menu. FAN LP MASK : 30s (default) Low pressure mask after switching to a higher fanstep. 2 COMPR LP MASK : 30 s (default) Low pressure mask from first compressor start of a circuit (no masking at second compressor start). 3 4 5 2–172 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 3.25 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit Simulation This is an operation mode for the controller in a simulation board because then the actual unit and components are replaced by electrical and electronic components. These components would not allow correct operation of the controller if it was in normal mode. 1 This mode can only be used on simulation boards. 2 Possible settings (Service/Advanced menu): ■ ■ ■ Simulation setting: Simulation parameter Application Simulation = NO actual unit Simulation = YES simulation board is selected 3 AI Setting: Simulation parameter Application AI = 0 actual unit = actual sensors are used on the analog inputs AI = 1 simulation board (all analog inputs use potentiometers = NTC) 4 DIS. EEV Setting: Simulation parameter Application DIS. EEV = 0 actual unit with EEV driver DIS. EEV = 1 If no EEV driver is connected to the simulation board this parameter should be put on 1. This will disable the EEV control on the controller. Part 2 – Functional Description 5 2–173 Functional Control for a Standalone Unit ESIE06-05 1 2 3 4 5 2–174 Part 2 – Functional Description ESIE06-05 4 Part 3 Troubleshooting Introduction When a problem occurs, all possible faults have to be checked. This chapter gives a general idea of where to look for faults. Furthermore the general procedures for refrigeration circuit repair and for electrical circuit repair are explained. Remark Not all repair procedures are described. Some procedures are considered common practice. What is in this part? This part contains the following chapters: Part 3 – Troubleshooting 33 4 Chapter See page 1–Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 3–3 2–Checking the Temperature Sensors 3–25 3–Reset procedure 3–31 4–Procedure for Software Upload 3–33 5–Procedure for main PCB changing 3–43 6–Procedure for extension PCB changing 3–47 7–Procedure for controller changing 3–49 8–Procedure for EEV PCB changing 3–51 9–Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer 3–53 10–Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain 3–55 11–Compressor electrical connections and wiring 3–57 12–Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators 3–59 5 3–1 ESIE06-05 1 33 5 3–2 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties Part 3 1 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction Overview Part 3 – Troubleshooting In the first stage of trouble shooting sequence it is important to interpret the fault indication on the controller display. This will help you to find the cause of the problem. 1 33 This chapter contains the following topics: Topic See page 1.2–What happens in the Event of an Alarm? 3–4 1.3–What to do in the Event of an Alarm? 3–5 1.4–Overview of Unit Safeties 3–6 1.5–Overview of Circuit Safeties 3–11 1.6–Overview of Network Safeties 3–19 1.7–Overview of Warnings 3–21 1.8–Overview of Start Problems 3–23 4 5 3–3 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 1.2 ESIE06-05 What happens in the Event of an Alarm? The units are equipped with three kinds of safety devices. Unit alarm Function 33 Description ■ All compressors are shut down. ■ The red LED above the p key lights up Protects the individual circuit ■ ■ Action to take 4 Protects the unit in general Circuit alarm Display example The compressors of the corresponding circuit are shut down. The red LED above the p key lights up Network alarm Is activated when a communication problem occurs ■ The units of the network will operate as standalone. ■ The red LED above the p key lights up Warnings Dual pump safety ■ No action is taken, the units keep operating. ■ The red LED above the p key lights up Press p to acknowledge the alarm Press p to acknowledge the alarm Press p to acknowledge the alarm Press p to acknowledge the warning OAE:FLOW HAS STOPPED OU1:REVERESE PHASE PR 1CA:OUT E SENSOR ERR 1EO:GENERAL SAFETY 1A4:FREEZE -UP PROT. 0U4:PCB COMM.PROBLEM 0AE:FLOW HAS STOPPED 5 3–4 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 1.3 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties What to do in the Event of an Alarm? 1 In event of an alarm or a warning, the following must be done: Step 1 Action Result Press p to acknowledge the alarm. ■ The p LED lights up ■ A unit, circuit or network, safety is displayed. 2 Find the cause of the alarm and correct it. The system is repaired. 3 The cause of the alarm was found and corrected. The p LED starts blinking. Now it is possible to reset. Press p to reset the alarm. ■ The p LED goes out and the alarm screen is deactivated. ■ The main menu screen is displayed automatically. 4 Remark: if in the service menu the option "password needed to reset safeties" is activated, you will be asked to enter the correct password to reset the safety. Remark: After resetting the alarm it is possible to consult the safety information by using the history menu. 5 If all circuits were shutdown, switch the unit on by pressing o. 33 4 The unit starts again. 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–5 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 1.4 ESIE06-05 Overview of Unit Safeties Introduction This section provides useful information for diagnosing and correcting certain troubles which may occur in the unit. Before starting the troubleshooting procedure, carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring. When carrying out an inspection on the supply panel or on the switch box of the unit, always make sure that the circuit breaker of the unit is switched off. 33 Unit safety overview MESSAGE SAFETY MENU UNIT SAFETY 0AE:FLOW HAS STOPPED 0AE:PUMPINTERLOCK 0A4:FREEZE UP 0A9:EEV PCB COMM ERR 4 0A9:EEV PCB ERR 0C9:INL SENSOR ERR 0CA:OUT SENSOR ERR 0H9:AMB T SENSOR ERR 5 0U4:EXTPCB COMM.ERR 0U4:MAINPCB COMM.ERR 0U5:PCB COMM.PROBLEM Unit Safety description OAE : FLOW HAS STOPPED Purpose: ■ To prevent that chiller start up without flow. ■ To stop chiller when there is no flow. Symptom: Flowswitch is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE No water flow for 5 seconds continuously or too low water flow. Check the water pump filler and the water circuit for obstructions. Unit switched off. RESET : After finding the cause, the flowswitch is reset automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset. 3–6 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties OAE : PUMPINTERLOCK 1 Purpose: ■ Detect if pump works or not. Symptom: Pump interlock contact is open POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The pump interlock contact is not closed. Make sure a pump interlock contract is wired correctly and closed when the pump starts operating. Unit switched off RESET : Only if a pump contractor is present: Switch the black handle on the pump fuse inside the switchbox and reset the controller. 33 OA4: FREEZE UP Purpose: ■ 4 To prevent freezing of the evaporator. Symptom: Freeze-up protection is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Water flow too low. Increase the water flow. Inlet temperature to the evaporator is too low. Increase the inlet water temperature. Flow switch is not working or no water flow. Check the flow switch and the water pump. In case outlet water temperature becomes too low. Software version 2.2 or higher. Freeze-up disable, unit will switch off, no safety, unit will restart if water temperature is above reset setpoint and compressor timers are on 0. After second (default) freeze up disable within 30 min alarm is displayed and manual reset of the controller is needed. RESET : After water temperature rises, above the RESET value, this safety resets automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset. Refrigerant temperature becomes too low (=def -3.5 °C) Check the water flow and filter.... (No good heat exchange in the evaporator). Unit switched off. RESET: After refrigerant temperature rise, above -3.5 °C, this safety resets automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset. OA9: EEV PCB COMM ERR OA9: EEV PCB ERR Purpose: ■ Part 3 – Troubleshooting Indicate if there is no communication with the EEV-PCB. 3–7 5 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 ESIE06-05 Symptom: EEV driver is not operating POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The EEV driver is not operating, no communication with the EEV PCB. Check the power supply to the EEV driver. Check if the address setting by DIP-switch is according to the wiring diagram. Unit switched off. RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. 33 OC9: INL SENSOR ERR OCA: OUT SENSOR ERR OH9 : AMB T SENSOR ERR Purpose: 4 ■ Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR short circuit). Symptom: Sensor error 5 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The sensor is broken or not correctly wired (open or short circuit). Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram. ■ If value is too high (above range) ==> display “+ER”. ■ If value is too low (below range) ==> display “-ER”. RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range. OU3 : REMOCON SW ERR Purpose: ■ Indicate if there is no communication with the remote controller. Symptom: The alarm message shows REMOCON SW ERR POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The software for the wired remote controller (A4P or A5P) is corrupt or absent. Check if the wiring to the main PCB (A11P) is according to the wiring diagram. Check if the “address setting” and the “terminator resistor setting” by DIP-switch is according to the setting mentioned in the wiring diagram. Unit switched off and no controller readout. RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. 3–8 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties OU4:EXTPCB COMM.ERR 1 Purpose: ■ Indicate if there is no communication with the Extension PCB (the extension PCB A01P cannot be found). Symptom: The alarm message shows EXT PCB COMM. ERR POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The extension PCB (A01P) cannot be found. Check if the wiring to the extension PCB (A01P) is according to the wiring diagram Unit switched off. RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. 33 OU4:MAINPCB COMM. ERR 4 Purpose: ■ Indicate if there is no communication with the main PCB 2 (double circuit). Symptom: The alarm message shows MAINPCB COMM. ERR POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The main PCB of circuit 2 (A21P) cannot be found Check if the wiring to the main PCB of circuit 2 (A21P) is according to the wiring diagram. Unit switched off. 5 Check if the “address setting” and the “terminator resistor setting” by DIP-swtich is according to the setting mentioned in the wiring diagram. RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–9 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties ESIE06-05 OU5: PCB COMM PROBLEM 1 Purpose: ■ Indicate if there is no communication with the wired remote controller A4P (or A5P, EKRUPG) and the main PCB. Symptom: The alarm message shows PCB COMM. PROBLEM 33 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The wired remote controller (A4P of A5P (EKRUPG)) has no correct communication with the main PCB (A11P) Check if the wiring to the main PCB (A11P) is according to the wiring diagram. Check if the “address setting” and the “terminator resistor setting” by DIP-switch is according to the setting mentioned in the wiring diagram. Unit switched off. RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. 4 5 3–10 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 1.5 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties Overview of Circuit Safeties 1 Circuit safeties overview CIRCUIT SAFETY 1/2 1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST1 1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST2 1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST3 1/2 A9:EEV ERR 1/2 A9:SUPERHEAT ERR 1/2 E3:HIGH PRESSURE SW 33 1/2 E4:LOW PRESSURE 1/2 E6:COMPR 1 SAFETY 1/2 E6:COMPR 2 SAFETY 1/2 F3:HIGH DISCH TEMP1 4 1/2 F3:HIGH DISCH TEMP2 1/2 J3:DISCHSENSOR ERR1 1/2 J3:DISCHSENSOR ERR2 1/2 J5:REFR SENSOR ERR 1/2 J5:SUCTSENSOR ERR 5 1/2 J5:SUCTSENSOR ERRH1 1/2 J5:SUCTSENSOR ERRH2 1/2 JA:HP SENSOR ERR 1/2 JC:LP SENSOR ERR 1/2 U1:REV PHASE PROT Remark: Part 3 – Troubleshooting ■ For circuit 1 error code starts with 1. ■ For circuit 2 error code starts with 2. 3–11 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 Circuit Safeties ESIE06-05 153/253 : FAN OVERC. 1/2/3 Purpose ■ To avoid overheating of the fan motor Symptom: Fan overcurrent is activated 33 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Mechanical failure (fan is blocked) Check that the fan rotates freely. Air flow in the unit too low or outdoor temperature too high. Clean the air heat exchanger properly. Warning or safety displayed on the controller. When warning is selected unit will continue operation. RESET : Push the blue button on the fan fuse inside the switchbox and reset the controller. 1A9/2A9 EEV ERR 4 Purpose ■ Detect when standalone EEV driver gives error Symptom: EEV driver is not operating 5 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The EEV driver is not operating. No communication with the EEV PCB. Check the power supply to the EEV driver. Check if the address setting by DIP-switch is according to the wiring diagram. Circuit switched off. RESET : After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. 3–12 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1A9/2A9 SUPERHEAT ERR 1 Purpose ■ Protection compressor against liquid pumping or overheating of compressor. Symptom: Superheat temperature is not correct. POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Superheat temperature is too high. Check if the unit has enough refrigerant (no foaming visible in sight glass). Check if the suction temperature sensor of the EEV driver is in the holder in the suction tube and not hanging loose. Circuit switched off. SH C1/C2 larger than or equal to 15 °C for 300 sec. Superheat temperature is too low. SH C1/C2 smaller than or equal to 0°C for 300 sec. Check if the EEV driver or the control motor of the EEV is wired correctly and operating. Check if the suction temperature sensor of the EEV driver is reading the night temperature. The sensed suction temperature is more than 2°C higher than the entering water temperature of the evaporator (+2°C) for 300 sec. Check if the suction temperature sensor of the controller is in its holder and not hanging loose. 33 4 5 RESET : After finding the cause, error can be reset on the controller. 1E3/2E3 HIGH PRESSURE SW Purpose ■ Detect high pressure switch activation on a refrigerant circuit (HP higher as 40.5 bar). Symptom: High-pressure switch and high pressure setback. POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Condenser fan does not operate properly Check that the fans turn freely. Clean if necessary. Circuit switched off. Dirty or partially blocked condenser Remove any obstacle and clean condenser coil using brush and blower. Inlet air temperature of the condenser is too high. The air temperature measured at the inlet of the condenser may not exceed 43°C. Fan turning in the wrong direction. Two phases of the power supply to the fan motor must be inverted (by a licensed electrician). RESET : After pressure rise, this safety resets automatically (if HP is below 30,2 b), but the controller still needs to be reset. Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–13 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 ESIE06-05 1E4/2E4 LOW PRESSURE Purpose ■ A low pressure measurement is used to control the low pressure. The setting is depending if the unit is a glycol application or not. Symptom: Low pressure. 33 4 5 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Water flow to water heat exchanger too low. Increase the water flow. Circuit switched off. Shortage of refrigerant Check for leaks and refill refrigerant if necessary. Unit is working out if its operation range. Check the operation conditions of the unit. Inlet temperature to the water heat exchanger is too low. Increase the inlet water temperature. Dirty evaporator. Clean the evaporator, or call your local dealer. Low pressure safety setting too high. Refer to the installation manual “Customization in the service menu”, paragraph “Setting of the minimum outlet water temperature” for correct values. Flowswitch is not working or no water flow. Check the flowswitch and the water pump. RESET : After pressure rise, this safety resets automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset. Reset is possible when LP > LP setpoint + 0.2 bar. 1E6/2E6 COMPR 1/2 SAFETY Purpose ■ 3–14 Protection of the compressor if the compressor motor coil temperature is too high because the compressor motor takes (demands/needs) too much current and is not sufficiently cooled by refrigerant. Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 Symptom: Compressor safety (only for SJ161-4) POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Failure of one of the phases. Check fuses on the supply panel or measure the supply voltage. Circuit switched off. Voltage too low. Measure the supply voltage. The unit is working out of its range. Make sure the unit operates within its operating range. Overload of motor. Reset. If the failure persists, call your local dealer. There is a short circuit. Check the wiring. 33 RESET : Pull the black handle on the compressor fuse inside the switch box and reset the controller. 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–15 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 ESIE06-05 Symptom: Compressor safety (only for SJ180-4-SJ240-4 and SJ300-4) POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The compressor motor coil temperature is too high because the compressor motor takes (demands/needs) too much current and is not sufficiently cooled by refrigerant. Make sure there are no refrigerant leaks. After repairing leaks, charge the unit with additional refrigerant until the sight glass in the liquid line shows no foaming. Circuit switched off. Make sure the unit operates within its operating range (too high ambient or too high water temperature). 33 Make sure the compressor motor is not locked. RESET : After temperature decrease, a 5 minute delay is activated. After this delay the relay in the electronic protection module (EPM) is pulled in. The controller needs to be reset manually. 4 5 Failure of one of the phases. Check fuses on the supply panel or measure the supply voltage. Voltage too low. Measure the supply voltage. The unit is working out of its range. Make sure the unit operates within its operating range. Overload of motor. Reset. If the failure persists, call your local dealer. The compressor is running in reverse phase (only for SJ240-SJ300) Check the wiring. There is a short circuit Check the wiring Circuit switched off. RESET : Pull the black handle on the compressor fuse inside the switch box and reset the controller. 3–16 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1F3/2F3 HIGH DISCH TEMP 1/2 1 Purpose ■ Detect when discharge temperature becomes too high. Discharge temperature < High discharge safety setpoint. Symptom: Low pressure. POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Unit is working outside the operation range. Check the operation condition of the unit. Circuit switched off. The unit is undercharged. Check if there are no refrigerant leaks. After repairing leaks, charge the unit with additional refrigerant until the sight glass in the liquid line shows no foaming. 33 RESET : After temperature decrease, the safety resets automatically but the controller still needs to be reset. 4 1J3/2J3 DISCH SENSOR ERR 1/2 1J5/2J5 REFR SENSOR ERR 1/2 5 1J5/2J5 SUCT SENSOR ERR 1/2 1J5/2J5 SUCT SENSOR ERRH 1/2 Purpose: ■ Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR short circuit). Symptom: Sensor error POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The sensor is broken or not correctly wired (open or short circuit). Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram. ■ If value is too high (above range) ==> display “+ER”. ■ If value is too low (below range) ==> display “-ER”. RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range. Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–17 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties ESIE06-05 1JA/2JA HP SENSOR ERR 1 1JC/2JC LP SENSOR ERR Purpose Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (sensor out of range). ■ Symptom: Sensor error 33 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The sensor is broken or not correctly wired. Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram ■ If value is too high (above range) ==> display “+ER”. ■ If value is too low (below range) ==> display “-ER”. If value is out of voltage range: ■ If value < min value (0.08V) ■ If value > max value (4.92 V). Circuit switched off. RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range. 4 1U1/2U1 REV PHASE PROT Symptom: Reverse phase protector is activated. 5 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Two phases of the power supply are connected in the wrong phase position. Invert two phases of the power supply (by licensed electrician). Unit switched off. One phase is not connected properly. Check the connection of all phases. Voltage too low. Measure the supply voltage. RESET : After inverting two phases or fixing the power supply cables properly, the protector is reset automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset. 3–18 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 1.6 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties Overview of Network Safeties Network Safety Overview 1 NETWORK SAFETY 0C9:INL SENSOR ERR 0U4:PCB COMM.PROBLEM 0U4:SW VERSION ERR Network Safety OC9 INL SENSOR ERR Purpose ■ 33 Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR short circuit). Symptom: Sensor error POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The sensor is broken or not correctly wired (open or short circuit). Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram. ■ If value is too high (above range) ==> display “+ER”. ■ If value is too low (below range) ==> display “-ER”. RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range. 5 OU4: PCB COMM. PROBLEM Purpose ■ Indicate if there is no communication with the communication PCB Symptom: The NETWORK SAFETY alarm message shows PCB COMM. PROBLEM POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The unit cannot be found by the DICN system (EKACPG) Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram. ■ ■ Make sure all the units in the DICN system are powered up. ■ Make sure that the correct number of slave units is defined in the master unit. ■ Make sure that the correct unit address setting is defined in each unit (refer to the installation manual). RESET: After finding the cause and communication is restored, error can be reset on the controller. Part 3 – Troubleshooting 4 3–19 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties ESIE06-05 OU4 : SW VERSION ERR 1 Purpose ■ Indicate if there is a conflict in software versions in the DICN system. Symptom: The NETWORK SAFETY alarm message shows SW VERSION ERR 33 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION All units in the DICN system (EKACPG) do not have the same software version. Check the software version of each unit. Call your local dealer in case a software upgrade is necessary. CONSEQUENCE RESET: After finding the cause and software is upgraded, error can be reset on the controller. 4 5 3–20 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 1.7 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties Overview of Warnings 1 Unit warnings overview UNIT WARNING 5.2 0AE:FLOW HAS STOPPED 7 0C9:INL SENSOR ERR 5.7 1/2 E3:HP SETBACK 5.13 1/2 E6:COMPR PR Unit warning description 1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST1 5.4 1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST2 5.4 1/2 53:FAN OVERC. ST3 5.4 33 OAE : FLOW HAS STOPPED Purpose ■ 4 Detect if one motor of the twin pump is broken Symptom: Flowswitch is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE No water flow for 5 seconds continuously. Check the water pump filter and the water circuit for obstructions. Unit switched off and restart after pump lead of other pump. RESET: After finding the cause, the flowswitch is reset automatically, but the controller still needs to be reset. Remark : only when twin pump is installed. OC9 : INL SENSOR ERR Purpose ■ Detect if sensor is broken or not good connected (open OR Short circuit) Symptom: Sensor error POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE The sensor is broken or not correctly wired (open or short circuit). Check if the wiring is according to the wiring diagram. ■ If value is too high (above range) ==> display “+ER”. ■ If value is too low (below range) ==> display “-ER”. RESET : Possible to reset (manual) if the value is within range. 1E3/2E3 : HP SETBACK Purpose ■ Part 3 – Troubleshooting Detect high pressure setback on a refrigerant circuit. 3–21 5 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties 1 ESIE06-05 Symptom: High pressure switch and high pressure setback 33 POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Condenser fan does not operate properly Check that the fans turn freely. Clean if necessary. Unload compressor till only 1 compressor is in operation. Dirty or partially blocked condenser. Remove any obstacle and clean condenser coil using brush and blower. Inlet air temperature of the condenser is too high. The air temperature measured at the inlet of the condenser may not exceed 43°C. Fan turning in the wrong direction. Two phases of the power supply to the fan motor must be inverted (by a licensed electrician). RESET: After pressure decrease this warning automatically resets. 4 1E6/2E6 COMPR PR Purpose ■ 5 Protection of the compressor if the compressor is working outside the operation range. Symptom: Compressor protection (function of controller) is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Compressor is working outside the operation range Check the operation condition of the compressor. "Protection control of compressor running area during heating" on page 2–117. Circuit is switched off. RESET: When the temperature has returned to normal, the controller resets automatically. 153/253 : FAN OVERC. 1/2/3 Purpose ■ To avoid overheating of the fan motor. Symptom: Fan overcurrent is activated POSSIBLE CAUSES CORRECTIVE ACTION CONSEQUENCE Mechanical failure (fan is blocked) Check that the fan rotates freely. Air flow in the unit too low or outdoor temperature too high. Clean the air heat exchanger properly. Warning or safety displayed on the controller, when warning is selected unit will continue operation. RESET: Push the blue button on the fan fuse inside the switchbox and reset the controller. 3–22 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 1.8 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties Overview of Start Problems Introduction 1 When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and find out why the safety device was activated before resetting it. Under no circumstances safety devices may be bridged or changed to a value other than the factory setting. Symptom 1: The unit does not start, but the ON LED lights up. Possible causes Corrective action The temperature setting is not correct. Check the controller setpoint. The flowchart timer is still running The unit will start after approximately 15 seconds. Make sure that water is flowing through the evaporator. The circuit cannot start up Refer to Symptom 5: The circuit does not start up. Unit is in manual mode (all compressors at 0%) Check on the controller Power supply failure Check the voltage on supply panel. Blown fuse or interrupted protection device. Inspect fuses and protection devices. Replace by fuses of the same size and type. Loose connections. Inspect connections of the field wiring and the internal wiring of the unit. Tighten all loose connections. Shorted or broken wires. Test circuits using a tester and repair if necessary. 4 Symptom 2: The unit does not start, but the ON LED is flashing. Possible causes Corrective action The remote ON/OFF input is enabled and the remote switch is off. Put the remote switch on or disable the remote ON/OFF input. Symptom 3: The unit does not start and the ON LED does not light up. Part 3 – Troubleshooting Possible causes Corrective action The unit is in failure mode. Check safety devices. One of the following safety devices is activated: Check safety devices. ■ Flowswitch (S8L, S9L). ■ Emergency Stop. 33 3–23 5 Overview of Fault Indications and Safeties ESIE06-05 Symptom 4 : Unit stops soon after operation. 1 Possible Causes Corrective Action One of the safety devices is activated. Check safety devices. Voltage is too low. Test the voltage in the supply panel and, if necessary, in the electrical compartment of the unit (voltage drop due to supply cables is too high). Symptom 5: The circuit does not start up. 33 4 5 3–24 Possible causes Corrective action One of the following safety devices is activated: Check on the controller if the safety device is active. ■ Compressor thermal protector (Q*M) ■ Overcurrent relay (K*S) ■ Discharge thermal protector ■ Low pressure ■ High pressure switch (S*PH) ■ Reverse phase protector ■ Freeze-up The anti-recycling timer is still active The circuit can only start up after approximately 5 minutes. The Guard timer is still active. The circuit can only start up after approximately 3 minutes. The circuit is limited to 0% Check the enable/disable capacity limitation remote contact. Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Checking the Temperature Sensors Part 3 2 1 Checking the Temperature Sensors Introduction If the cause of the problem is related to the temperature sensors, the sensors should be checked prior to changing the PCB or an output device. Temperature Sensors In multiple scroll software, four different types of NTP temp sensors are programmed. On the unit, only NTC type 1 and 2 are actually used. In this chapter, the resistance/temp table is described. How to check To check the temperature sensors, proceed as follows: Temperature Sensor Types Temperature Sensor List Part 3 – Troubleshooting 33 4 Step Action 1 Disconnect the sensor from the PCB. 2 Measure the temperature and the resistance value. 3 Check whether the measured values correspond with the values in the appropriate table. The table below contains the four different sensor types programmed in the controller. Type Also used in the following units Type 1: PF-46 F (ST8602/8603/8604 use PB-46F Temp Sensor Sky Air/VRV/ DENV scroll chillers Type 2: ST 8606 Discharge sensor Sky Air / VRV Type 3: PB-43 Water temp DIL screw chillers Type 4: Carel Sensor Water temp DENV scroll and screw chillers The table below contains the list with the sensor name and the sensor type used in the unit. Part number Description R1T ambient temperature sensor Type 1 R2T inlet water temperature sensor Type 1 R3T outlet water temperature sensor Type 1 3–25 5 Checking the Temperature Sensors 1 ESIE06-05 Part number R8T 33 4 5 Description * temperature sensor for changeable analog input Type 1 or 2 or 3 or 4 (Configurable in the service input/output menu) R14T suction temperature sensor circuit 1 Type 1 R15T, R25T discharge temperature sensor circuit 1 Type 2 R16T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (Only for EWYQ) Type 1 R17T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 1 Type 1 R18T, R38T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ) Type 1 R28T, R48T heating suction temperature sensor circuit 1, circuit 2 (only EWYQ 80-100/230-250) Type 1 R26T coil temperature sensor circuit 1 (only for EWYQ 80-100/230-250). Type 1 R34T suction temperature sensor circuit 2 Type 1 R35T, R45T discharge temperature sensor circuit 2 Type 2 R36T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ) Type 1 R37T refrigerant piping temperature sensor circuit 2 Type 1 R46T coil temperature sensor circuit 2 (only for EWYQ230-250) Type 1 * Not included with standard unit (not possible as option + not obligatory). 3–26 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 2.1 Checking the Temperature Sensors Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 1 Temp.-resistance 1 The table below contains the temperature resistance values of sensor type 1. . Temp. (°C) -20 -19 -18 -17 -16 -15 -14 -13 -12 -11 -10 -9 -8 -7 -6 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Resistance (kΩ) At x.0°C At x.5°C 197.81 186.53 175.97 166.07 156.80 148.10 139.94 132.28 125.09 118.34 111.99 106.03 100.41 95.14 90.17 85.49 81.08 76.93 73.01 69.32 65.84 62.54 59.43 56.49 53.71 51.09 48.61 46.26 44.05 41.95 39.96 38.08 36.30 34.62 192.08 181.16 170.94 161.36 152.38 143.96 136.05 128.63 121.66 115.12 108.96 103.18 97.73 92.61 87.79 83.25 78.97 74.94 71.14 67.56 64.17 60.96 57.94 55.08 52.38 49.83 47.42 45.14 42.98 40.94 39.01 37.18 35.45 33.81 Part 3 – Troubleshooting Temp. (°C) 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Resistance (kΩ) At x.0°C At x.5°C 33.02 31.50 30.06 28.70 27.41 26.18 25.01 23.91 22.85 21.85 20.90 20.00 19.14 18.32 17.54 16.80 16.10 15.43 14.79 14.18 13.59 13.04 12.51 12.01 11.52 11.06 10.63 10.21 9.81 9.42 9.06 8.71 8.37 8.05 32.25 30.77 29.37 28.05 26.78 25.59 24.45 23.37 22.35 21.37 20.45 19.56 18.73 17.93 17.17 16.45 15.76 15.10 14.48 13.88 13.31 12.77 12.25 11.76 11.29 10.84 10.41 10.00 9.61 9.24 8.88 8.54 8.21 7.90 Temp. (°C) 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 — Resistance (kΩ) At x.0°C At x.5°C 7.75 7.46 7.18 6.91 6.65 6.41 6.65 6.41 6.18 5.95 5.74 5.14 4.96 4.97 4.62 4.46 4.30 4.16 4.01 3.88 3.75 3.62 3.50 3.38 3.27 3.16 3.06 2.96 2.86 2.77 2.68 2.60 2.51 7.60 7.31 7.04 6.78 6.53 6.53 6.53 6.29 6.06 5.84 5.43 5.05 4.87 4.70 4.54 4.38 4.23 4.08 3.94 3.81 3.68 3.56 3.44 3.32 3.21 3.11 3.01 2.91 2.82 2.72 2.64 2.55 2.47 33 4 5 3–27 Checking the Temperature Sensors 1 2.2 Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 2 Temp-resistance The table below contains the temperature resistance values of the sensor type 2. T°C 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 33 4 5 3–28 ESIE06-05 0.0 640.44 609.31 579.96 552.00 525.63 500.66 477.01 454.60 433.37 413.24 394.16 376.05 358.88 342.58 327.10 312.41 298.45 285.18 272.58 260.60 249.00 238.36 228.05 218.24 208.90 200.00 191.53 183.46 175.77 168.44 161.45 154.79 148.43 142.37 136.59 131.06 125.79 120.76 115.95 111.35 106.96 102.76 98.75 94.92 91.25 87.74 84.38 81.16 78.09 75.14 72.32 (kΩ) 0.5 624.65 594.43 565.78 538.63 512.97 488.67 465.65 443.84 423.17 403.57 384.98 367.35 350.62 334.74 319.66 305.33 291.73 278.80 266.51 254.72 243.61 233.14 223.08 213.51 204.39 195.71 187.44 179.57 172.06 164.90 158.08 151.57 145.37 139.44 133.79 128.39 123.24 118.32 113.62 109.13 104.84 100.73 96.81 93.06 89.47 86.04 82.75 79.61 76.60 73.71 70.96 T°C 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 0.0 72.32 69.64 67.06 64.60 62.24 59.97 57.80 55.72 53.72 51.98 49.96 48.19 46.49 44.86 43.30 41.79 40.35 38.96 37.63 36.34 35.11 33.92 32.78 31.69 30.63 29.61 28.64 27.69 26.79 25.91 25.07 24.26 23.48 22.73 22.01 21.31 20.63 19.98 19.36 18.75 18.17 17.61 17.07 16.54 16.04 15.55 15.08 14.62 14.18 13.76 13.35 (kΩ) 0.5 70.96 68.34 65.82 63.41 61.09 58.87 56.75 54.70 52.84 50.96 49.06 47.33 45.67 44.07 42.54 41.06 39.65 38.29 36.98 35.72 34.51 33.35 32.23 31.15 30.12 29.12 28.16 27.24 26.35 25.49 24.66 23.87 23.10 22.36 21.65 20.97 20.31 19.67 19.05 18.46 17.89 17.34 16.80 16.29 15.79 15.31 14.85 14.40 13.97 13.55 13.15 T°C 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 0.0 13.35 12.95 12.57 12.20 11.84 11.49 11.15 10.83 10.52 10.21 9.92 9.64 9.36 9.10 8.84 8.59 8.35 8.12 7.89 7.68 7.47 7.26 7.06 6.87 6.69 6.51 6.33 6.16 6.00 5.84 5.69 5.54 5.39 5.25 5.12 4.98 4.86 4.73 4.61 4.49 4.38 4.27 4.16 4.06 3.96 3.86 3.76 3.67 3.58 3.49 3.41 (kΩ) 0.5 13.15 12.76 12.38 12.01 11.66 11.32 10.99 10.67 10.36 10.06 9.78 9.50 9.23 8.97 8.71 8.47 8.23 8.01 7.78 7.57 7.36 7.16 6.97 6.78 6.59 6.42 6.25 6.08 5.92 5.76 5.61 5.46 5.32 5.18 5.05 4.92 4.79 4.67 4.55 4.44 4.32 4.22 4.11 4.01 3.91 3.81 3.72 3.62 3.54 3.45 3.37 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 2.3 Checking the Temperature Sensors Temperature and Resistance characteristics of Thermistor Type 3 1 Introduction The thermistors in use have the following temperature (°C) to resistance (K Ω) characteristics. Explanation X-Axis: indicates tens digit (°C). Y-Axis : Indicates ones digit (°C). In the case of -9°C characteristics : -10 + 1 = -9. Therefore, see the characteristics (K Ω) at the intersection of -10 (tens digit) and 1 (ones digit). Similarly, in the case of 12°C characteristics : 10 + 2= 12. 33 Therefore, see the characteristics (K Ω) at the intersection of 10 (tens digit) and 2 (ones digit). The table below contains the temperature resistance values of sensor type 3. Temp.-resistance -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 0 48.5 30.0 19.2 12.7 8.6 6.0 4.3 1 46.1 28.6 18.4 12.2 8.3 5.8 4.1 2 43.9 27.4 17.6 11.7 8.0 5.6 4.0 3 41.8 26.2 16.9 11.2 7.7 5.4 3.9 4 39.8 25.0 16.2 10.8 7.4 5.2 3.7 5 38.0 23.9 15.5 10.4 7.1 5.0 3.6 6 36.2 22.9 14.9 10.0 6.9 4.9 3.5 7 34.5 21.9 14.3 9.6 6.6 4.7 3.4 8 32.9 20.9 13.7 9.3 6.4 4.5 3.3 9 31.4 20.1 13.2 8.9 6.2 4.4 3.2 4 5 Example: characteristics at -9°C -10 0 10 0 1 46.1 2 Example: characteristics at 12°C -10 0 10 0 1 2 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 17.6 3–29 Checking the Temperature Sensors 1 2.4 Temperature and resistance characteristics of thermistor type 4. Temp.-resistance 33 4 5 ESIE06-05 The table below contains the temperature resistance values of sensor type 4. Resistance (kΩ) Temp. (°C) Maximum Standard -50 344.40 329.20 Resistance (kΩ) Temp. (°C) Resistance (kΩ) Minimum Temp. (°C) Maximum Standard Minimum Maximum Standard Minimum 314.70 4 23.42 22.99 22.57 58 3.28 3.21 3.14 3.04 -49 324.70 310.70 297.20 5 22.45 22.05 21.66 59 3.18 3.11 -48 306.40 293.30 280.70 6 21.52 21.15 20.78 60 3.09 3.02 2.95 -47 289.20 277.00 265.30 7 20.64 20.29 19.95 61 2.99 2.92 2.86 -46 273.20 261.80 250.60 8 19.80 19.40 19.15 62 2.90 2.83 2.77 -45 258.10 247.50 237.20 9 19.00 18.70 18.40 63 2.81 2.75 2.69 -44 244.00 234.10 224.60 10 18.24 17.96 17.67 64 2.73 2.66 2.60 -43 230.80 221.60 212.70 11 17.51 17.24 16.97 65 2.65 2.58 2.52 -42 218.50 209.80 201.50 12 16.80 16.55 16.31 66 2.57 2.51 2.45 -41 206.80 198.70 191.00 13 16.13 15.90 15.87 67 2.49 2.43 2.37 -40 195.90 188.40 181.10 14 15.50 15.28 15.06 68 2.42 2.36 2.30 -39 185.40 178.30 171.59 15 14.89 14.68 14.48 69 2.35 2.29 2.24 -38 175.5. 168.90 162.00 16 14.31 14.12 13.93 70 2.28 2.22 2.17 -37 166.20 160.10 154.10 17 13.75 13.57 13.40 71 2.21 2.16 2.10 -36 157.50 151.80 140.20 18 13.22 13.06 12.89 72 2.15 2.10 2.04 -35 149.30 144.00 138.80 19 12.72 12.56 12.41 73 2.09 2.04 1.98 -34 141.60 136.60 131.80 20 12.23 12.09 11.95 74 2.03 1.98 1.93 -33 134.40 129.70 125.20 21 11.77 11.63 11.07 75 1.97 1.92 1.87 -32 127.60 123.20 118.90 22 11.32 11.20 11.07 76 1.92 1.87 1.82 -31 121.20 117.10 113.10 23 10.90 10.78 10.60 77 1.86 1.81 1.78 -30 115.10 111.30 107.50 24 10.49 10.38 10.27 78 1.81 1.76 1.71 -29 109.30 105.70 102.20 25 10.10 10.00 9.90 79 1.76 1.71 1.68 -28 103.80 100.40 97.16 26 9.73 9.63 9.52 80 1.71 1.66 1.62 -27 98.63 95.47 92.41 27 9.38 9.28 9.18 81 1.66 1.62 1.57 -26 93.75 90.80 87.93 28 9.04 8.94 8.84 82 1.62 1.57 1.53 -25 89.15 86.39 83.70 29 8.72 8.62 8.52 83 1.57 1.53 1.49 -24 84.82 82.22 79.71 30 8.41 8.31 8.21 84 1.53 1.49 1.44 -23 80.72 78.29 75.93 31 8.11 8.01 7.91 85 1.49 1.45 1.40 -22 76.85 74.58 72.36 32 7.82 7.72 7.62 86 1.45 1.41 1.37 -21 73.20 71.07 68.99 33 7.55 7.45 7.35 87 1.41 1.37 1.33 -20 69.74 67.74 65.80 34 7.28 7.19 7.09 88 1.37 1.33 1.29 -19 66.42 64.54 62.72 35 7.03 6.94 6.84 89 1.34 1.30 1.26 -18 63.27 61.52 59.81 36 6.79 6.69 6.60 90 1.30 1.26 1.22 -17 60.30 58.66 57.05 37 6.56 6.46 6.37 91 1.27 1.23 1.19 -16 57.49 55.95 54.44 38 6.33 6.24 6.15 92 1.23 1.20 1.16 -15 54.83 53.39 51.97 39 6.12 6.03 5.94 93 1.20 1.16 1.13 -14 52.31 50.96 49.83 40 5.92 5.82 5.73 94 1.17 1.13 1.10 -13 49.93 48.66 47.12 41 5.72 5.63 5.54 95 1.14 1.10 1.07 -12 47.67 46.48 45.31 42 5.53 5.43 5.35 96 1.11 1.08 1.04 -11 45.53 44.41 43.32 43 5.34 5.25 5.17 97 1.08 1.05 1.01 -10 43.50 42.25 41.43 44 5.16 5.08 4.99 98 1.05 1.02 0.99 -9 41.54 40.56 39.59 45 4.99 4.91 4.82 99 1.03 0.99 0.96 -8 39.68 38.76 37.85 46 4.83 4.74 4.66 100 1.00 0.97 0.94 -7 37.91 37.05 36.20 47 4.67 4.59 4.51 101 0.98 0.94 0.91 -6 36.24 35.43 34.03 48 4.52 4.44 4.36 102 0.95 0.92 0.89 -5 34.65 33.89 33.14 49 4.38 4.30 4.22 103 0.93 0.90 0.87 -4 33.14 32.43 31.73 50 4.24 4.16 4.08 104 0.91 0.87 0.84 -3 31.71 31.04 30.39 51 4.10 4.02 3.95 105 0.88 0.85 0.82 -2 30.35 29.72 29.11 52 3.97 3.90 3.82 106 0.86 0.83 0.80 -1 20.00 28.47 27.89 53 3.84 3.77 3.69 107 0.84 0.81 0.78 0 27.83 27.28 26.74 54 3.72 3.65 3.57 108 0.82 0.79 0.76 1 26.64 26.13 25.62 55 3.61 3.53 3.46 109 0.80 0.77 0.74 2 25.51 25.03 24.55 56 3.49 3.42 3.35 110 0.78 0.75 0.73 3 24.24 23.99 23.54 57 3.39 3.31 3.24 — 3–30 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Reset procedure Part 3 3 Reset procedure 3.1 Introduction 1 For all safeties, a login with the user password (default) is required to reset a safety. 33 User password is mentioned in the operation manual. Service password is known by the service technician. 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–31 Reset procedure 1 3.2 ESIE06-05 Login/Logout When a user is logged in with the password equal to the password needed to reset safeties, no password will be asked to reset a safety. Login function: 33 4 5 3–32 ■ Without a login (ex. At startup= no password in login menu), then a limited menus are available. ■ A user can login with the user password, then all menus with user parameters are available. ■ A service man can login with the service password, then all menus with user/service parameters are available. ■ A login can be done in login/logout menu OR if password is requested at first screen of protected menu. ■ A logout is possible in the login/logout menu. ■ An automatically logout (jump to the first screen in readout menu) is done if no buttons are pushed for 5 minutes (default) 1 Warnings ==> no password is required to reset a warning (remark: warning is always logged in history menu). 2 Switch main power off will remember active safeties. 3 Number of reset: if the same error happens 3 times in 1 hour then the level to reset is put 1 level higher. Default case: in case reset safety is protected by user password ==> 1 level higher means service password. In case reset safety is protected by no password ==> 1 level higher means user password. Remark : not in case reset safety is already protected by service password. 4 A backup reset password is present ==> Only possible to reset safeties (meaning no actual login value). This backup reset password is based on a calculation result on the number of safeties that are present in the history. (Example: number of safeties in history. 50 ==> result calculation : 3398) This means it can only be used 1 time, because next time the number of history will be different. Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for Software Upload Part 3 4 Procedure for Software Upload 4.1 What is in this chapter Overview 1 This chapter contains the following topics: 33 Topic See page 4.2–Overview hardware software/Source files 3–34 4.3–Software upload procedure: PCASOflash 3–35 4.4–Installation of PCASOflash Software 3–40 4.5–Overview of most common problems 3–41 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–33 Procedure for Software Upload 1 4.2 ESIE06-05 Overview hardware software/Source files 1. Hardware Laptop PC (windows 2000 or windows xp) Serial cable: DENV part number: 999480P Description: “RS-232C Cable included driver assy” 33 4 This cable exists out of 2 pieces: RS-232C Cable incl drive assy Adapter cable with label “R” (Remark: Similar cables of VRV have labels “A”, instead of “R”) 5 Use in combination with PCASOflash software Remark: A USB / RS232 can be used to connect the serial cable to a USB port. Power supply (230VAC) 2. Software SW program Source files Source files example PCASOflash Main PCB Logic file (*.lgc) Multiple scroll chillers: Remocon PCB Logic file (*.lgc) sp1710_XXX.lgc SP1734_XXX.lgc Language file (*.lng) SP1734_XXX.lng Parameter file (*.par) 4PW30697-X-XX.par 3–34 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 4.3 Procedure for Software Upload Software upload procedure: PCASOflash Introduction 1 The upload of the parameters can be executed on Main PCB nr 1 only. The upload of the Software and parameters can be executed on Main PCB nr 1 only. After this the software is distributed by the Main PCB nr 1 towards the Main PCB nr 2, the extension PCB and towards the Main and sub remocon. (If PCASOflash is not installed yet: refer to chapter “install software PCASOflash”) PCASOflash: manual upload Remark: all lgc and lng and par files should be put in 1 directory! Action Result Connect wires: Result: Communication: X49A ÙRS-232C Cable incl drive assy+ adapter cable with label “R” HAP is blinking 33 Remark: In case HAP is continuously On, then the wrong adapter cable is used. 4 Power: X1A Ù 230V Remark: PCB should be continuously powered. HAP X49A Serial communication 5 X1A power (230V) 2. Start PCASOflash.exe Result: PCASO flash main window By default: “Upload software sheet” is selected Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–35 Procedure for Software Upload 1 ESIE06-05 Action Result 3. Select directory by pushing “…” Result: 33 (Remark: all the files present in a directory are continuously shown) 4. select correct directory and push OK 4 Result: All lgc and lng files in the selected directory are shown. (Remark: all the files present in a directory are continuously shown) 5 3–36 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for Software Upload Action Result 4. Select files to be uploaded and push “Add=>” Result: A selection of files to be uploaded is made. 1 33 (Or in case all files can be uploaded push “Add all =>”) (Remark: if correct software is already present, then it is possible only to select a parameter file) 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–37 Procedure for Software Upload ESIE06-05 1 Action Result 6. Push Start Result: 33 (Remark: default password is 0000 and must not be modified) A pop-up window will show progress and progress is recorded in logging-area. During upload: ■ 4 MainRemocon display: “-PCB SW UPLOAD BUSY-” ■ SubRemocon display: “-PCB SW UPLOAD BUSY-” (if present) 5 Result should be OK at the end. (Remark: Upload by PCASOflash can take up to +- 4 min.) (Remark: if result is OK, then communication cable can be removed) If uploading ended correctly then Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute software towards Main PCB nr 2 (if present) ■ MainRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ ■ SubRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ (if present) After this Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute software towards Remocon PCB Main (if present): 3–38 ■ MainRemocon display “-REM.SW UPLOAD BUSY-“ ■ SubRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ (if present) Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for Software Upload Action Result 1 After this then Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute software towards Remocon PCB Sub (if present) ■ MainRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ ■ SubRemocon display “-REM.SW UPLOAD BUSY-“ After this the normal initialization procedure will start MainRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ ■ SubRemocon display “----STARTUP BUSY----“ When distribution and initialization procedure ended normally then readout screen is shown on display of remocon ■ MainRemocon display: Readout screen ■ SubRemocon display: Readout screen Remark: The distribution and initialization can take up to +-16 min. 33 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–39 Procedure for Software Upload 1 4.4 ESIE06-05 Installation of PCASOflash Software Only needed if software is not yet present on PC. Remark: Only possible to install if user has administrator rights. Necessary files: PCAS0flash0xx.msi. (xx depending on version) ■ To install PCASOflash software: execute PCAS0flash0xx.msi. Select Each time Next when required. Remark: When “Error 1913” message is shown, select OK (this has no influence on the good functioning of the software) ■ To install a newer PCASOflash software, it is required to first remove the existing PCASOflash software as follows: execute PCAS0flash0xx.msi. Select “Remove PCASO flash” and push next. 33 4 5 3–40 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 4.5 Procedure for Software Upload Overview of most common problems 1 PCASO flash Symptom Possible cause 1. Not possible to start upload ■ No connection to Main PCB nr 1 ■ Main PCB nr 1 has no power ■ Wrong adapter cable is used. (“R” label) ■ Serial connection has been cut ■ ex. Debugmonitor is also running => close program ■ Visa software is running (can be checked status bar next to time )=> close program 4. After upload never display on remocon or continuously “STARTUP BUSY” ■ Remocon has been uploaded with wrong mot file. ■ Remocon Main and Sub have same address (ex. Main & Main or Sub & Sub) 5. Not possible to select the different software files from different directories ■ The different software files should be put in one directory. 2. Upload stops after certain % 3. 33 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–41 Procedure for Software Upload ESIE06-05 1 33 4 5 3–42 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for main PCB changing Part 3 5 Procedure for main PCB changing 5.1 Changing the main PCB 1 To change the Main PCB nr1 (circuit 1) or Main PCB nr 2 (circuit 2), proceed as follows: 33 Step Action 1 Turn off the power supply. 2 Remove the connections of the old PCB. 3 Remove the old PCB, also remove the extension PCB if present (only on Main PCB of circuit 1) and communication PCB if present. 4 Place the new PCB in the same way as the old PCB, also place back the extension PCB and communication PCB, if present in the same way. 5 Reconnect the PCB. 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–43 Procedure for main PCB changing 1 5.2 ESIE06-05 Configuration of Main PCB nr 1 To start the configuration of Main PCB nr 1, proceed as follows: 33 4 Step Action 1 Set the address dipswitch S1A to the right address, Main PCB nr. & (circuit 1) : address 1. 2 Upload the software to Main PCB nr 1, see "Installation of PCASOflash Software" on page 3–40. 3 After programming switch on/off power supply. 4 Wait until the Main PCB nr 1 has finished the automatic distribution of software towards Main PCB nr 2 (if present) and Main.Sub Remocon display. 5 After this the normal initialization procedure will start. Main Remocon displays : “------ STARTUP BUSY --------” 6 If Inverterfans/VA meter/2 pump or heatertape is present on the unit, enter the service/input output menu and enable the unit options. Confirm after changing unit options. 5 3–44 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 5.3 Procedure for main PCB changing Configuration of Main PCB nr 2 1 To start the configuration of Main PCB nr 2, proceed as follows : Step Action 1 Set the address dipswitch SIA to the right address. Main PCB nr 2 (circuit 2) : address 2. 2 Switch on the power supply. 3 The Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute the software towards Main PCB nr 2. 4 After this the normal initialization procedure will start. Main Remocon displays: “--------- STARTUP BUSY --------------”. 33 4 5 Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–45 Procedure for main PCB changing ESIE06-05 1 33 4 5 3–46 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for extension PCB changing Part 3 6 Procedure for extension PCB changing 6.1 Changing the extension PCB 1 To change the extension PCB, proceed as follows: 6.2 Step Action 1 Turn off the power supply. 2 Remove the connections of the old PCB. 3 Remove the old PCB. 4 Place the new PCB in the same way as the old PCB. 5 Reconnect the PCB. 33 4 Configuration of the extension PCB When the extension PCB is replaced, no software has to be uploaded and no parameters have to be set. The main PCB will upload the software to the extension PCB. Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–47 5 Procedure for extension PCB changing ESIE06-05 1 33 4 5 3–48 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for controller changing Part 3 7 Procedure for controller changing 7.1 Changing the Main Controller 1 To change the Main Controller or Subcontroller display, proceed as follows: 7.2 Step Action 1 Turn off the power supply. 2 Remove the 4 wires on the back of the controller. 3 Place the new controller in the same way as the old controller. 4 Reconnect the 4 wires on the back of the controller. 33 4 Configuration of the Main Controller To start the configuration of the Main Controller, proceed as follows: Step Action 1 Set the address dipswitch S1A to “MAIN”. 2 If no sub controller is connected : ■ 5 Set the Term dipswitch S2A to “ON”. If a sub controller is connected : ■ 7.3 Set the Term dipswitch S2A to “OFF”. 3 Switch on the power supply. 4 The Main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute the software towards the controller. Main controller will display “------- STARTUP BUSY ----------” during distribution. 5 After this, the normal initialization procedure will start. Main Remocon displays: “-------- STARTUP BUSY ----------”. Configuration of the Sub Controller To start the configuration of the subcontroller, proceed as follows: Part 3 – Troubleshooting Step Action 1 Set the address dipswitch S1A to “SUB”. 2 Set the Term dipswitch S2A to “ON”. 3–49 Procedure for controller changing 1 ESIE06-05 Step Action 3 Switch on the “power supply”. 4 The main PCB nr 1 will automatically distribute the software towards the controller. Subcontroller will display “ ------- REM. SW UPLOAD BUSY -------” during distribution. 5 After this, the normal initialization procedure will start. Sub Remocon displays : “------- STARTUP BUSY ---------”. 33 4 5 3–50 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for EEV PCB changing Part 3 8 Procedure for EEV PCB changing 8.1 Changing the EEV PCB 1 To change the EEVPCB, proceed as follows: 8.2 Step Action 1 Turn off the power supply. 2 Remove the connections of the old PCB. 3 Remove the old PCB. 4 Place the new PCB in the same way as the old PCB. 5 Reconnect the PCB. 33 4 Configuration of EEV PVB 5 To start the configuration of the EEV PCB, proceed as follows: Part 3 – Troubleshooting Step Action 1 Set the address dipswitch DS1 to the right address : ■ A7IP : address 1. ■ A72P : address 2 (only for EWYQ). ■ A73P : address 3 (only for EWYQ 230-250). 3–51 Procedure for EEV PCB changing ESIE06-05 1 33 4 5 3–52 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer Part 3 9 Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer 9.1 Introduction To maintain an equal oil level in 2 compressors, a suction washer is used (in some compressor setup). Therefore it is very important that the right suction washer is used during a compressor replacement. 9.2 1 33 Use of Suction Washer 1) C/O unit When the two tandem compressors are unequal, a restrictor is mounted in the suction of the smallest compressor in order to create a pressure drop in the suction and in such way, when the compressors are in operation, maintain an equal oil level in the 2 compressors. Without this ring, the oil level would be higher in the biggest compressor and in some conditions cause too low oil level in the smallest compressor (especially applications with low LWE and high ambient). Overview 2) H/P unit Cooling only unit Smallest compressor Equal compressors No suction washer needed. Unequal compressors Suction washer installed. 5 Biggest compressor No suction washer installed. When the two tandem compressors are unequal, a restrictor is mounted in the suction of the smallest compressor, also when the two tandem compressors are equal a restrictor is mounted in the compressor that is closed to the 4-way valve (special piping is causing small pressure drop) in such way, when the compressors are in operation, maintain an equal oil level in the 2 compressors. Without the ring, the oil level would be higher in one of the compressors and in some conditions cause to low oil level in the compressor that is close to the 4-way valve (especially applications with low LWE and high ambient). Overview Part 3 – Troubleshooting Heatpump only unit Smallest compressor Equal compressors Suction washer needed in compressor that is closed to the 4-way valve Unequal compressors Suction washer installed. 4 Biggest compressor No suction washer installed. 3–53 Procedure for compressor replacement : Suction washer ESIE06-05 1 Suction Washer The table below contains an overview of the compressor configuration and the used suction washer (if needed) for the cooling only units. 33 Cooling only unit 4 5 Compressor Configuration Conclusion SJ161-SJ161 No restriction SJ180-SJ180 No restriction SJ180-SJ240 Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ 180 SJ240-SJ240 No restriction SJ240-SJ300 Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ 240 SJ300-SJ300 No restriction The table below contains an overview of the compressor configuration and the used suction washer for the heat pump unit. Heat pump unit 3–54 Compressor Configuration Conclusion SJ161-SJ161 Use a 27 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4 way valve side. SJ180-SJ180 Use a 31 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4 way valve side. SJ180-SJ240 Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ180 compressor. SJ240-SJ240 Use a 31 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4 way valve side. SJ240-SJ300 Use a 31 mm restrictor on SJ240 compressor. SJ300-SJ300 Use a 31 mm restrictor on compressor positioned on the 4 way valve side. Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain Part 3 10 Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain 10.1 Introduction 1 An oil fill connection and oil drain connection are present on the compressor to fill or drain the compressor oil in an easy way. 10.2 33 Compressor connections Sight glass All Performer® SJ scroll compressors come equipped with a sight glass which may be used to determine the amount and condition of the oil contained within the sump. 4 Schrader The oil fill connection and gauge port is 1/4” male flare connector incorporating a schrader valve. Oil drain The oil drain connection allows oil to be removed from the sump for changing, testing, etc. The fitting contains an extension tube into the oil sump to more effectively remove the oil. The connection is a female 1/4” NPT fitting and is mounted on SJ180-240-300 models only. Oil fill connection and gauge port Oil drain connection Procedure To drain the oil : 1 Remove the refrigerant from the system (or separate the compressor from the system by use of the suction and discharge valve if present). 2 Open the oil drain connection. 3 Use the oil fill connection to pressurize the compressor. To fill the oil : Part 3 – Troubleshooting 1 Use the oil fill connection to vacuum the compressor. 2 Use the oil fill connection to suck the oil in the compressor. 3–55 5 Procedure for Compressor Oil Fill or Oil Drain ESIE06-05 1 33 4 5 3–56 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Compressor electrical connections and wiring Part 3 11 Compressor electrical connections and wiring 11.1 Electrical connections for SJ161 1 Electrical power is connected to the compressor terminals by diameter 4,8 mm (3/16”) screws. The maximum tightening torque is 3 Nm. Use a 1/4” ring terminal on the power leads. 33 Terminal box 4 Power supply ø 29 mm knockout 11.2 5 Electrical connections SJ180 Electrical power is connected to the compressor terminals by diameter 4,8 mm (3/16”) screws. The maximum tightening torque is 3Nm. Use a 1/4” ring terminal on the power leads. The protection rating of the terminal box is IP54. Discharge gas pipe Discharge gas thermostat Protection module power supply L1 N 1 2 12 14 11 M otorProtection M odule Cover holding screw (x2) Torque: 2.2 Nm. Belt type heater Terminal box Faston 1/4" tabs Power supply 11.3 Electronic protection module wiring The motor protection module comes preinstalled within the terminal box and has pre-wired thermistor connections. The module must be connected to a power supply of the appropriate voltage. Part 3 – Troubleshooting 3–57 Compressor electrical connections and wiring ESIE06-05 Internal control contact 1 L N 1 2 12 14 11 Safety circuit Module power 24 or 230 vac 11.4 Thermistor connection Electrical connections for SJ240-300 Electrical power is connected to the compressor terminals by the diameter 4.8 mm (3/16”) screws. The maximum tightening torque is 3 Nm. Use a 1/4” ring terminal on the power leads. The protection rating of the terminal box is IP54. 33 Discharge gas thermostat Cover holding screws (x4) Torque: 2.2 N.m. Black Blue Discharge gas pipe Brown 4 M1, M2 Control circuit Terminal box Belt type crankcase heater Power supply 5 Power supply 11.5 Electronic protection module wiring The motor protection module comes preinstalled within the terminal box. Phase sequence protection connections and thermistor connections are pre-wired. The module must be connected to a power supply of the appropriate voltage. Phase sequence input L1 L2 L3 Black Blue L N S1 S2 M1 M2 Module power 24 or 115/230 vac 3–58 Internal control contact Brown Thermistor connection Safety circuit Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators Part 3 12 1 Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators If water is detected in the refrigerant circuit after a evaporator damage, the following procedure should be executed to clear the system. Step 1 33 Action Cleaning & drying refrigerant circuit. Cleaning components: ■ Suction and liquid line. 4 Replace components: ■ Sight glass ■ Drier filter element by high density filter ■ Compressor oil 5 Actions: ■ Drill a hole in the bottom of the condenser headers to remove water. ■ Braze the drilled holes. ■ Blow dry N2 trough all the pipes. ■ Drain compressor oil ■ Vacuum the whole installation: Check on a regular base the condition of the oil of the vacuum pump. If the vacuum oil becomes milky, it should be replaced by new vacuum oil. The crankcase heater must be activated. It is advisable to connect a second heater tape at the suction of the compressor. 2 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ■ Stop the vacuum and purge with dry nitrogen. ■ Restart the vacuum of the installation; check after a couple of hours the condition of the vacuum oil. If OK the unit can be recharged. ■ Charge the unit with R410A. ■ Start the unit & re-commissioning. ■ After 24 hours replace HD filter by new HD filter & replace compressor oil. ■ Check oil contamination with measuring kit. ■ After 48 hours replace HD filter by normal filter drier + check sight glass and pressures. Find the cause of this evaporator breakdown and take the necessary actions to prevent recurrence in the future. 3–59 Procedure to Clear the Refrigerant Circuit in Case of Frozen Evaporators ESIE06-05 1 33 4 5 3–60 Part 3 – Troubleshooting ESIE06-05 4 Part 4 Commissioning and Test Run Introduction Commissioning and test run are well known practices in service engineering. This part contains a systematic approach on test run checks and test values, which guarantees a high quality installation and operation of the units. What is in this part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter See page 1–Pre-Test Run Checks 4–3 3 44 5 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–1 ESIE06-05 1 3 4 5 4–2 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 Pre-Test Run Checks Part 4 1 Pre-Test Run Checks 1.1 What Is in This Chapter? Introduction This chapter contains checks you have to carry out before every test run. Overview This chapter contains the following topics: 3 Topic See page 1.2–General Checks 4–5 1.3–Water Piping Checks 4–6 1.4–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) 4–11 1.5–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) 4–12 1.6–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B) 4–13 1.7–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) 4–14 1.8–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) 4–15 1.9–Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) 4–16 1.10–Unit pressure drop : EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model 4–17 1.11–Unit pressure drop : EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model 4–19 1.12–Unit pressure drop : EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model 4–21 1.13–Unit pressure drop : EWYQ080-100DAYNN Standard Unit 4–23 1.14–Unit pressure drop : EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit 4–25 1.15–Unit pressure drop : EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit 4–27 1.16–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B) 4–29 1.17–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B) 4–31 1.18–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B) 4–32 1.19–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B) 4–34 1.20–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B) 4–35 1.21–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B) 4–36 1.22–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) 4–37 1.23–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) 4–39 1.24–External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP) 4–40 1.25–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) 4–41 1.26–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) 4–43 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 1 4 5 4–3 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 ESIE06-05 Topic See page 1.27–External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP) 4–45 1.28–Electrical Checks 4–46 1.29–Field wiring connection diagram : EWAQ/EWYQ 080-260 DAYN* 4–47 3 4 5 4–4 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.2 Checklist Pre-Test Run Checks General Checks 1 The table below contains the general checklist. Step Check whether... 1 There is external damage. 2 The unit is properly supported and/or has a proper foundation. 3 The unit is installed horizontally with a deviation of maximum 1°. 4 Anti-vibration pads are required. 5 Check for remaining metal dust of burrs. Metal dust or burrs from grinding or drilling in the metal parts during construction facilitates the rust process and shortens the lifetime of the unit. 6 The operator has received the operation manual. 7 The installer has received the installation manual. 8 The air volume over the coil is adequate; there is no blockage (from paper, plastic...) or air short circuit due to wrong positioning. 3 4 5 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–5 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.3 Water Piping Checks Checklist 3 4 5 ESIE06-05 Water volume, flow and pressure The table below contains the water piping checklist. Step Check whether... 1 The factory mounted water filter is clean. 2 The water volume is within the limits. 3 There is adequate water flow. 4 The water quality meets the standards. 5 The water piping is properly insulated. 6 Measurement points for temperature and pressure are available on the water circuit. 7 The flow switch, pump interlock and pump are properly working. 8 Air purge points are installed on the high parts of the water piping. 9 Drain taps are installed at the low points of the water piping. 10 Other parts of the water circuit are properly mounted and installed (e.g. buffer tank, expansion tank...). 11 Vibration compensators are mounted at the water connections if the unit is positioned on anti-vibration pads. The table below shows the operation range of water volume and water flow for proper operation of the unit. Evaporator Minimum water volume Minimum water flow Maximum water flow EWAQ080DAYN* 358 l 115 l/min 459 l/min EWAQ100DAYN* 470 l 151 l/min 602 l/min EWAQ130DAYN* 295 l 188 l/min 756 l/min EWAQ150DAYN* 341 l 218 l/min 871 l/min EWAQ180DAYN* 522 l 261 l/min 1043 l/min EWAQ210DAYN* 599 l 300 l/min 1198 l/min EWAQ240DAYN* 529 l 339 l/min 1355 l/min EWAQ260DAYN* 569 l 364 l/min 1456 l/min EWYQ080DAYN* 393 l 110 l/min 503 l/min EWYQ100DAYN* 511 l 143 l/min 654 l/min EWYQ130DAYN* 334 l 195 l/min 854 l/min EWYQ150DAYN* 370 l 208 l/min 946 l/min EWYQ180DAYN* 446 l 262 l/min 1141 l/min EWYQ210DAYN* 504 l 302 l/min 1290 l/min EWYQ240DAYN* 578 l 331 l/min 1479 l/min Chiller type 4–6 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 Evaporator EWYQ250DAYN* 629 l 361 l/min 1611 l/min The water pressure should not exceed the maximum working pressure of 10bar. Calculation of the minimum water volume The calculation method below is based on the fact that the water volume in a chiller should be large enough to prevent the compressor from excessive cycling. Sufficient water volume gives a certain inertia to the system, so that: ■ Water (or glycol) temperature does not drop too fast when the unit turns ON. ■ Water (or glycol) temperature does not rise too fast when the unit turns OFF. 3 0,5 x Q x t V= 2 x ρ x d x Cw [m³] 4 5 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–7 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 with: 1 3 Notation Dimension Description Default V [m³] Required system volume — Q [W] Cooling capacity at the lowest capacity step of each chiller in the system — t [s] Minimum cycling time allowed by the compressor 300 s ρ [kg/m³] Specific mass of the fluid ρ water = 1000 kg/m³ d [K] Thermostat step difference dinlet water control = 4 K Cw [J/kgK] Specific heat capacity of the fluid Cw, water = 4186 J/kgK 4 5 4–8 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 Pre-Test Run Checks Water quality The table below contains the required water quality specifications. It is a table from the JRA (Japanese Refrigerant Assdated GL-02-1994. Cooling water (3) Circulating system Heated water (2) Once flow Cooled water Low temperature High temperature Items to be referred to Items to be controlled Items (1) (5) Tendency if out of criteria Circulating water Supply water (4) Flowing water Circulating water (below 20°C) Supply water (4) Circulating water (20°C ~ 60°C) Supply water (4) Circulating water (60°C ~ 80°C) Supply water (4) 6.5~8.2 6.0~8.0 6.8~8.0 6.8~8.0 6.8~8.0 7.0~8.0 7.0~8.0 7.0~8.0 7.0~8.0 corrosion + scale below 80 below 30 below 40 below 40 below 30 below 30 below 30 below 30 below 30 corrosion + scale below 200 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 30 below 30 corrosion 2 /l) 4 below 200 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 30 below 30 corrosion M-alkalinity (ph 4.8) (mgCaCO3/l) below 100 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 scale Total hardness (mgCaCO3/l) below 200 below 70 below 70 below 70 below 70 below 70 below 70 below 70 below 70 scale Calcium hardness (mgCaCO3/l) below 150 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 below 50 scale Silica ion (mgSiO2/l) Below 50 Below 30 Below 30 Below 30 Below 30 Below 30 Below 30 Below 30 Below 30 scale Iron (mgFe/l) Below 1.0 Below 0.3 Below 1.0 Below 1.0 Below 0.3 Below 1.0 Below 0.3 Below 1.0 Below 0.3 Corrosion + scale Copper (mgCu/l) below 0.3 below 0.1 velow 1.0 below 1.0 below 0.1 below 1.0 below 0.1 below 1.0 below 0.1 corrosion Sulfide ion (mgS 2-/l) not detectable not detectable not detectable not detectable not detectable not detectable not detectable not detectable not detectable corrosion below 1.0 below 0.1 below 1.0 below 1.0 below 0.1 below 0.3 below 0.1 below 0.1 below 0.1 corrosion pH at 25°C Electrical conductivity (mS/m) at 25°C Chloride ion mgCl -/l Sulfate ion Ammonium ion (mgSO (mgNH + 4 /l) (mgCl/l) below 0.3 below 0.3 below 0.3 below 0.3 below 0.3 below 0.25 below 0.3 below 0.1 below 0.3 corrosion Free carbide (mgCO2/l) below 4.0 below 4.0 below 4.0 below 4.0 below 4.0 below 0.4 below 4.0 below 0.4 below 4.0 corrosion 6.0 ~ 7.0 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- corrosion and scale Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 3 4 5 Remaining chloride Stability index 1 4–9 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 (2) In case of using heated water (more than 40°C), corrosion is generally noticeable. Especially when the iron material is in direct contact with water without any protection shields. It is desireable to give the valid measures for corrosion e.g. chemical measure. 1 (3) In the cooling water using hermetic cooling tower, closed circuit water is according to heated water standard and scattered water is according for cooling water standard. (4) Supply water is considered drink water, industrial water and ground water except for genuine water, neutral water and soft water. (5) The above mentioned items are representable items in corrosion and scale cases. 3 4 5 4–10 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.4 Pre-Test Run Checks Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) Water pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B). Pressure drop evaporator [kPa] 1000 3 1 100 4 2 10 5 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow through Evaporator [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ080DAYN* (2) For EWAQ100DAYN* Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–11 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.5 ESIE06-05 Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) Water pressure drop The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). 1000 Pressure drop evaporator [kPa] 3 4 5 1 2 100 4 3 10 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow through Evaporator [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ130DAYN* (2) For EWAQ150DAYN* (3) For EWAQ180DAYN* (4) For EWAQ210DAYN* Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 4–12 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.6 Pre-Test Run Checks Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B) Water pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B). Pressure drop evaporator [kPa] 1000 3 100 1 4 2 10 5 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow through Evaporator [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ240DAYN* (2) For EWAQ260DAYN* (3) Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–13 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.7 ESIE06-05 Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) Water pressure drop The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B) Pressure Drop Evaporator [kPa] 1000 3 4 1 100 2 10 5 1 100 10000 1000 Water Flow Evaporator [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWYQ080DAYN* (2) For EWYQ100DAYN* Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ080-100DAYN" on page 1–8. 4–14 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.8 Pre-Test Run Checks Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B) Water pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYN(N-P-B). Pressure Drop Evaporator [kPa] 1000 1 100 3 2 4 4 3 10 5 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow Evaporator [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWYQ130DAYN* (2) For EWYQ150DAYN* (3) For EWYQ180DAYN* (4) For EWYQ210DAYN* Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ180-210DAYN" on page 1–10. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–15 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.9 ESIE06-05 Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator: EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) Water pressure drop The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through condenser for EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B). Pressure Drop Evaporator [kPa] 1000 3 4 100 1 2 10 5 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow Evaporator [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWYQ230DAYN* (2) For EWYQ250DAYN* Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications for options: EWAQ130-150DAYN" on page 1–9. 4–16 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.10 Pre-Test Run Checks Unit pressure drop : EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model Unit pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100DAYNN Standard Model. 1000 3 100 4 Pressure drop unit [kPa] 1 2 5 10 1 100 1000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ080DAYNN Standard Model (2) For EWAQ100DAYNN Standard Model Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–17 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 1 3 4 5 4–18 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.11 Pre-Test Run Checks Unit pressure drop : EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model Unit pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210DAYNN Standard Model. 1000 3 1 Pressure drop unit [kPa] 100 4 4 2 3 5 10 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ130DAYNN Standard Model (2) For EWAQ150DAYNN Standard Model (3) For EWAQ180DAYNN Standard Model Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–19 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 ESIE06-05 Symbol Description (4) For EWAQ210DAYNN Standard Model Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 3 4 5 4–20 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.12 Pre-Test Run Checks Unit pressure drop : EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model Unit pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model. 1000 3 Pressure drop unit [kPa] 100 1 4 2 5 10 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ240DAYNN Standard Model (2) For EWAQ260DAYNN Standard Model Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–21 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 1 3 4 5 4–22 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.13 Pre-Test Run Checks Unit pressure drop : EWYQ080-100DAYNN Standard Unit Unit pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYNN Standard Model. 1000 3 Pressure Drop Unit [kPa] 100 4 1 5 2 10 1 100 1000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWYQ080DAYNN Standard Unit (2) For EWYQ100DAYNN Standard Unit Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–23 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 1 3 4 5 4–24 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.14 Pre-Test Run Checks Unit pressure drop : EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit Unit pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYNN Standard Unit. 1000 3 1 Pressure Drop Unit [kPa] 100 4 4 2 5 3 10 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWYQ130DAYNN Standard Unit (2) For EWYQ150DAYNN Standard Unit (3) For EWYQ180DAYNN Standard Unit Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–25 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 ESIE06-05 Symbol Description (4) For EWYQ210DAYNN Standard Unit Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 3 4 5 4–26 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.15 Pre-Test Run Checks Unit pressure drop : EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit Unit pressure drop 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ230-250DAYNN Standard Unit. 1000 3 100 4 Pressure Drop Unit [kPa] 1 2 5 10 1 100 1000 10000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWYQ230DAYNN Standard Unit (2) For EWYQ250DAYNN Standard Unit Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–27 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 1 3 4 5 4–28 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.16 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100 DAYN (P-B). 300 3 External Static Pressure Unit [kPa] 250 200 4 2 150 1 5 100 50 0 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 Water Flow [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) For EWAQ080DAYN* + 0PSP (2) For EWAQ100DAYN* + 0PSP Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–29 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 1 3 4 5 4–30 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.17 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210 DAYN (P-B). 300 250 External Static Pressure Unit [kPa] 3 3 200 4 150 4 1 2 5 100 50 0 150 250 350 450 550 650 750 850 Water Flow [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWAQ130 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWAQ150 DAYN*+0PSP (3) EWAQ180 DAYN*+0PSP (4) EWAQ210 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–31 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.18 ESIE06-05 External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B) External Static Pressure The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B). 300 3 External Static Pressure Unit [kPa] 250 4 5 200 2 1 150 100 50 0 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Water Flow [l/min] Symbols 4–32 The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWAQ240 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWAQ260 DAYN*+0PSP Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 Pre-Test Run Checks Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 1 3 4 5 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–33 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.19 ESIE06-05 External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B) External Static Pressure The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B). 300 250 External Static Pressure [kPa] 3 4 5 200 2 150 1 100 50 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWYQ080 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWYQ100 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 4–34 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.20 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYN (P-B). 300 250 3 External Static Pressure [kPa] 3 200 4 4 150 1 2 5 100 50 0 150 250 350 450 550 650 750 850 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWYQ130 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWYQ150 DAYN*+0PSP (3) EWYQ180 DAYN*+0PSP (4) EWYQ210 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–35 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.21 ESIE06-05 External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B) External Static Pressure The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B). 300 250 External Static Pressure [kPa] 3 4 5 200 2 150 1 100 50 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWYQ230 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWYQ250 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 4–36 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.22 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP). 400 350 External Static Pressure Unit [kPa] 300 3 2 250 1 4 200 150 5 100 50 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Water Flow [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWAQ080 DAYN*+0PSP Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–37 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 ESIE06-05 Symbol Description (2) EWAQ100 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 3 4 5 4–38 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.23 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP). 400 350 External Static Pressure Unit [kPa] 300 3 3 250 4 200 4 1 2 150 5 100 50 0 150 350 550 750 950 1150 Water Flow [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWAQ130 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWAQ150 DAYN*+0PSP (3) EWAQ180 DAYN*+0PSP (4) EWAQ210 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–39 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.24 ESIE06-05 External Static Unit Pressure: EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP) External Static Pressure The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP). 400 350 300 External Static Pressure Unit [kPa] 3 4 5 2 250 1 200 150 100 50 0 150 350 550 750 950 1150 1350 Water Flow [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWAQ240 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWAQ260 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWAQ080-260DAYN" on page 1–5. 4–40 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.25 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP). 450 400 3 External Static Pressure [kPa] 350 2 300 4 250 1 5 200 150 100 50 0 0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWYQ080 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWYQ100 DAYN*+0PSP Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–41 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 1 3 4 5 4–42 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.26 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP). 400 350 External Static Pressure [kPa] 300 3 3 250 4 4 1 200 2 5 150 100 50 0 150 250 350 450 550 650 750 850 950 1050 1150 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWYQ130 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWYQ150 DAYN*+0PSP (3) EWYQ180 DAYN*+0PSP (4) EWYQ210 DAYN*+0PSP Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–43 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. 1 3 4 5 4–44 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 1.27 Pre-Test Run Checks External Static Unit Pressure: EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP) External Static Pressure 1 The illustration below shows the water pressure drop through evaporator for EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP). 400 350 3 External Static Pressure [kPa] 300 2 250 4 200 1 5 150 100 50 0 0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 Water Flow Unit [l/min] Symbols The table below describes the symbols. Symbol Description (1) EWYQ230 DAYN*+0PSP (2) EWYQ250 DAYN*+0PSP Selecting a flow outside the curves can cause damage to or malfunction of the unit. See also minimum and maximum allowed water flowrange. See "Technical Specifications: EWYQ080-250DAYN" on page 1–12. Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 4–45 Pre-Test Run Checks 1 1.28 Checklist 3 ESIE06-05 Electrical Checks The table below contains the electrical checklist. Step Check whether... 1 The main fuses, earth leak detector and main isolator are installed. 2 The main power supply voltage deviates less than 10% from the nominal value. 3 The flow switch and pump contact are properly wired. 4 The optional wiring for pump control is installed. 5 The optional wiring for remote start/stop is installed. Make sure that the controller is correctly programmed. 6 The optional wiring for remote cool/heat is installed. Make sure that the controller is correctly programmed. 4 5 4–46 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 L2 F2 4 3 L3 F3 5 6 PE F4 3 1 F5 4 OFF X1M A4P MODBUS DICN 2 V2C X1M ON TERM S3A A02P OFF For S3A setting see installation manual F1 F2 + RS485 - EKACPG (refer to EKACPG installation manual for more details) ADDRESS=MAIN TERM=OFF TERM S2A S1A ON MAIN PE ADDRESS=SUB TERM=ON TERM S2A S1A ON MAIN SUB F4,F5 : fuse 10A gL/gG EKRUPG (refer to EKRUPG installation manual for more details) SUB 2 2 1 7 OP10 and fieldheater E5H Power supply 1ò50Hz 230V S2M (2) Fieldwiring: communication wiring Power supply 3ò50Hz 400V L1 F1 Switchbox S1M + RS485 DC 24V GND Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run 8 OFF X1M M2P Switchbox K2P for OPTC M1P Switchbox K1P U 2 1 U 2 1 3ò M 3ò M for OPSC and OPTC PE W 6 5 PE W 6 5 A5P V 4 3 V 4 3 + RS485 DC 24V GND 9 1.29 (1) Fieldwiring: Main power connection ESIE06-05 Pre-Test Run Checks Field wiring connection diagram : EWAQ/EWYQ 080-260 DAYN* 1 3 4 5 4–47 1 4–48 14 13 S1S E5H 0 Switchbox 2 Fieldheater contact (max 1 kW resistive, 230 VAC) S2S 47 K1P 13 External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) K1S p 12 S3S 49 51 Ch.DI3 50 S4S 53 Ch.DI4 52 Switchbox 3 Operation M11C H11P 4 H12P 6 22 Operation M21C H21P 23 External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) 5 Operation M12C 70 71 72 24 Operation M22C H22P 25 Ch.AI1 Example type: NTC -t∞ R8T not for EWAQ/EWYQ 80-100 Operation compressor contact AC15 (max 3A, 230VAC) Ch.DI2 48 Pump contact for models without OPSC/OPTC/OPSP /OPTP/OPHP (Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC) (6) Fieldwiring: output terminals OBLIGATORY Ch.DI1 FOR MODELS WITHOUT OPSC/OPTC/OPSP/ OPTP/OPHP K1P 46 5 5 6 2 7 8 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact open No safety = contact open Alarm NO (default) 2 H1P 7 External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) H1P 9 Safety active = contact closed No power = contact closed No safety = contact open 8 9 Alarm NC (software setting necessary) Ch.DO1: Alarm S5S 78 7 Ch.AI3 Example type:Vmeasurement 10 H2P 11 Ch.DO2 General operation (default) Changeable digital output terminals (Maximum load: 2A-230VAC, Minimum load: 10mA-5VDC) Ch.AI2 Example type: mA measurement mA measurement (External power supply) + 0 to 10VDC - 77 + 76 0 to 20mA - 5V Signal GND 73 74 75 + 1 0 to 20mA - 5V Signal GND 73 74 75 mA measurement (5V power supply by PCB) 1 (4) Fieldwiring: Analog input terminals (connection is depending on type setting: NTC or mA or V or DI) 4 4 45 3 3 44 2 14 16 H4P 17 + 91 0 to 20mA or 10V - 90 Switchbox 18 H5P 19 Ch.DO5 20 H6P 21 Switchbox Ch.DO6 Ch.AO1 Example type: mA or V output External power supply (ex 24VAC or 230VAC) H3P 15 9 (5) Fieldwiring: Analog output terminals (types: mA or V) Ch.DO4 81 MODELS WITHOUT OPTC OR OPTP Ch.DO3 Ch.AI4 Example type: DI switch 80 Switchbox 79 8 1 (3) Fieldwiring: Digital input terminals 0 Pre-Test Run Checks ESIE06-05 Part 4 – Commissioning and Test Run ESIE06-05 4 Part 5 Maintenance Introduction Preventive maintenance should be set up for operation at maximum capacity or to avoid damage. The following chapters explain how to or when to maintain the units. 3 It is also applicable on other types of Daikin chillers. What is in this part? This part contains the following chapters: Chapter See page 1–Maintenance 5–3 4 55 Part 5 – Maintenance 5–1 ESIE06-05 1 3 5 5–2 Part 5 – Maintenance ESIE06-05 Maintenance Part 5 1 Maintenance 1.1 What Is in This Chapter Introduction Precautions Overview Part 5 – Maintenance As shown in the table below, we have grouped the maintenance in maintenance of the main parts (condenser, compressor and evaporator) and periodical checks. 1 3 Correct choices and decisions have to be made before any maintenance is done. Opening the refrigerant circuit may cause a loss of refrigerant or lead to system contamination. ■ Avoid high gas concentrations. While the heavy concentration of the refrigerant gas will remain on the floor level, good ventilation is a must. ■ Avoid all contact with open fires or hot surfaces. By high temperatures, the refrigerant gas R410A may decompose into irritating and poisonous gas. Avoid skin and hand contact with the liquid refrigerant and protect your eyes against liquid splashes. 55 This chapter covers the following topics: Topic See page 1.2–Maintenance of the Main Parts 5–4 1.3–Maintenance of the Control Devices 5–6 1.4–Periodical Checks 5–7 5–3 Maintenance 1 1.2 ESIE06-05 Maintenance of the Main Parts Preventive maintenance A program of scheduled maintenance should be set up and followed. The items mentioned are to be used as a guide and must be used in combination with sound electrical and refrigeration workmanship to ensure trouble free operation and performance. Unit Casing Follow the below instructions to check the unit casing. 3 Compressor Check if... If not, then... The paint of the unit casing is intact. Touch-up with paint. All plate work is screwed down in position. Screw the plate work down in position. Follow the instructions below to check the compressor: ■ Check crankcase heater operation. Switch of the compressor and carefully touch the crankcase heater area by hand. No operation can cause compressor damage when the ambient temperature reaches a low temperature. 55 Evaporator and condenser Unit switchbox 5–4 Follow the instructions below to check the evaporator and condenser: ■ Inspect the water and condenser after the first operating season. This condition indicates the required frequency of cleaning and also whether water treatment is needed in the chilled water circuit. ■ Check the air plugs and drain plugs to prevent or detect water leakage. ■ Check pressure-drop and water flow. ■ Record temperature difference between water in/out temperature. ■ Inspect evaporator insulation. If damaged, repair. ■ Inspect water and refrigerant connections. ■ If the evaporator heater-tape is installed, check operation by direct power connection and hand-touch. ■ Brush cleaning. Abnormal high condensing-pressures are an indication for periodic cleaning. Follow the instructions below to check the unit switchbox: ■ Check all power connections for tightness. ■ Check compressor motor terminals. ■ Inspect wiring for any signs of overheating (discolouring). ■ Remove all dust and debris from the switchbox. Replaced coils and components should not be left in the unit control panel. ■ Check all field-wired terminals. Part 5 – Maintenance ESIE06-05 Expansion valve Flow switch and pump interlock Maintenance The expansion valve will allow the correct amount of refrigerant to enter the evaporator to match the cooling load (by keeping a constant superheat). Follow the instructions below to check the expansion valve. ■ Check the superheat setting. ■ Inspect the LP sensor operation (offset). Compare the controller valve with a pressure gauge. ■ Inspect the suction temperature sensor (offset). Compare the controller valve with a temperature probe. 1 Follow the instructions below to check the flow switch and the pump interlock. ■ Check operation by ohmmeter after disconnecting the wires to the field terminals and simulating flow and no-flow conditions. ■ Inspect the flow-switch for possible corrosion (glycol applications). Check electrical connections for shunts or bridges. 3 55 Part 5 – Maintenance 5–5 Maintenance 1 1.3 ESIE06-05 Maintenance of the Control Devices Preventive maintenance A program of scheduled maintenance should be set up and followed. The items mentioned are to be used as a guide and must be used in combination with sound electrical and refrigeration workmanship to ensure trouble free operation and performance. 3 55 5–6 Part 5 – Maintenance ESIE06-05 1.4 Maintenance Periodical Checks Electrical checks Refrigerant checks The table below contains the electrical checks. Inspection checks and actions Remarks Check that all electrical wiring is properly connected and securely tightened. — Check the electrical components for damage or loss. — Check if the power supply corresponds with the identification label of the unit. — Check the operation of the circuit breaker and the earth leak detector of the local supply panel. — Check the operation of the safety devices. No operation can cause damage of the unit. Part 5 – Maintenance 3 The table below contains the refrigerant checks. Inspection checks and actions Remarks Check the refrigerant circuit. — ■ Water checks 1 If the unit leaks, contact your dealer. 55 The table below contains the water checks. Inspection checks and actions Remarks Check the water condition. Dirty water causes a cooling capacity drop as well as corrosion of the water heat exchanger and pipe. ■ Drain the water from the air release plug. ■ If the water is dirty, replace all the water in the system. Check the water connection. — Check the water velocity. — Check the function of the flow switch. The evaporator can freeze up if the flow switch is not able to operate. Make sure that there is no air mixed in the water pipes. Even if air is removed at the beginning, air can sometimes enter later. Bleed therefore the system regularly. Check the water filter. — 5–7 Maintenance 1 Noise checks ESIE06-05 The table below contains the noise checks. Inspection checks and actions Remarks Check for any abnormal noise. — ■ Locate the noise producing section and search the cause. ■ If the cause of the noise cannot be located, contact your dealer. 3 55 5–8 Part 5 – Maintenance ESIE06-05 4 Part 6 Appendix Introduction History of the software What is in this part? This part contains the following chapters: 3 Chapter See page 1–Appendix 6–3 4 65 Part 6 – Appendix 6–1 ESIE06-05 1 3 6 6–2 Part 6 – Appendix ESIE06-05 Appendix Part 6 1 Appendix 1.1 What Is in This Chapter Introduction History of the software Overview This chapter covers the following topics: 1 3 Topic See page 1.2–History of the Software 6–4 65 Part 6 – Appendix 6–3 Appendix 1 1.2 ESIE06-05 History of the Software 3 56 6–4 Part 6 – Appendix ESIE06-05 Index 1 C Components Water side EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–85 3 D DICN (network) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–145 E 4 Electrical Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–46 Electrical Specifications EWAQ080~260DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–19 EWAQ130~150DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–21 EWAQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–22 Electrical Specifications for options EWAQ080~100DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–20 EWAQ080-100DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–20 EWAQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–22 EWAQ 080~ 260 DAYN description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k i–i EWYQ 080~250 DAYN description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k i–i External Static Unit Pressure EWAQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–37 EWAQ080-100DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–29 EWAQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–39 EWAQ130-210DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–31 EWAQ240-260DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–40 EWAQ240-260DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–32 EWYQ080-100DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–41 EWYQ080-100DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–34 EWYQ130-210DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–43 EWYQ130-210DAYNN (P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–35 EWYQ230-250DAYN (OPHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–45 EWYQ230-250DAYN (P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–36 5 F Floating setpoint - Ambient mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–129 Free cooling on ambient temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–133 Functional Diagram Refrigeration Circuit EWAP400~540MBYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–80 EWAQ130~150DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–70 EWAQ240=260DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–72 EWYQ080~100DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–76 EWYQ130~210DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–78 EWYQ230~250DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–80 EWYQ230-250DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–80 Functional Diagram Water Piping EWAQ-EWYQ-DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–84 Index 1 ESIE06-05 1 G General Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–5 H High pressure setback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–127 History of the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 6–4 How to read or adjust parameter settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–14 M 3 Maintenance of the Control Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 5–6 Maintenance of the Main Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 5–4, 6–4 Manual control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–114 Menu overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–13 O 4 On/Off management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–107 Operation flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–106 Operational Range EWAQ080-100-180-210-240-260DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–4 EWAQ130~150DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–5 EWYQ080-100-180-210-230-250DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–6 EWYQ130~150DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–7 Optional equipment for EWYQ~DAYN(N-P-B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–33 Outlook Drawing EWAQ080~100DAYN(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–34 EWYQ180~210DAYN(N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–58 Overview of network safeties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–19 Overview of the circuit safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–11 Overview of the unit safeties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–6 Overview of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–21 5 P Password function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–164 Periodical Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 5–7 Pump control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–128 R Read-out menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–15 S Set Points Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–25 Start/Stop, Cool/Heat and Temperature settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–12 T Technical Specifications EWAQ080~100DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–8 EWAQ080~260DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–5 EWAQ130~150DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–9 EWAQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–10 EWAQ240~260DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–11 EWTP110~540MBYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–12 EWYQ230~250DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–18 2 Index ESIE06-05 1 Technical specifications for options EWYQ180~210DAYN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–17 The Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–10 Thermostat control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–108 Thermostat settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 2–27 U Unit Pressure Drop EWAQ080-100DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EWAQ130-210DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EWAQ240-260DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EWYQ080-100DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EWYQ130-210DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EWYQ230-250DAYNN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k k k k k k k 4–17 4–19 4–21 4–23 4–25 4–27 2–26 3 W 4 Water Piping Checks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–6 Water Pressure Drop through Evaporator EWAQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–11 EWAQ130-210DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–12 EWAQ240-260DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–13 EWYQ080-100DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–14 EWYQ130-210DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–15 Water Pressure Drop through evaporator EWYQ230-250DAYN (N-P-B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 4–16 What happens in the event of an alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–4 What to do in the event of an alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . k 3–5 Wiring Layout EWAQ080=100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080=100DAYN(N-P-B) with OPIF. . . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–149 EWAQ080~100DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ080~100DAYN(N-P-B) standard unit . . . . . . . . . . . k 1–88 EWAQ130=260DAYN(N-P-B) and EWYQ130=250DAYN(N-P-B) standard unit . . . . . . . . . . k 1–116 Index 5 3 ESIE06-05 1 3 4 5 4 Index